fiber optic isolators

219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: sales@ozoptics.com 

ALL FIBER POLARIZATION CONTROLLER 

Features 

• No intrinsic loss 

• No backreflection 

• Compact size 

• Easy to use 

• Wavelength insensitive 

• Low cost 

Applications 

• Singlemode to Polarization Maintaining (PM) fiber launching 

• Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) measurements 

• Launching into Polarization sensitive devices 

• Fiber lasers 

• Fiber interferometers 

Product Description 

Polarization controllers allow one to convert any input polarization 

to any desired output polarization. The device combines the 

compact size and ease of use of standard bulk optics systems with 

low costs, low losses, and low backreflections. 

The controller works by applying pressure with an adjustable 

clamp. The pressure on the fiber causes a birefringence within 

the fiber core, causing the fiber to act as a fractional wave plate. 

Varying the pressure varies the delay between the fast and slow 

polarization components. The clamp is rotatable, allowing one to 

change the direction in which the stress is applied. This allows 

any output polarization to be achieved. The process is simple and 

quick. Output polarizations exceeding 30dB can be routinely 

achieved in seconds. 

The fiber polarization controller works with singlemode fiber of 

any wavelength. The controller does not work with multimode or 

Polarization Maintaining (PM) fiber. For multimode and PM fiber 

OZ Optics still offers their standard series of polarization rotators 

and analyzers (refer to the Polarization Rotators/Controllers/ 

Analyzers data sheet). 

All fiber polarization controllers are offered in three versions. The 

in-line polarization controller can be inserted onto a customer’s 

own singlemode fiber. It can be used with any wavelength 

singlemode fiber. The in-line version is designed to work with only 

250 micron and 400 micron jacketed fibers. Second, a pigtailed 

version is also offered. This version is available with any size of 

cable or fiber, and with your choice of connectors. Finally, a 

connector receptacle style controller is available, using a short 

section of fiber terminated with female receptacles. For further 

information contact OZ Optics. 

In-Line Polarization 

Controller With Fiber 

Receptacle Style 

Polarization Controller 

In-Line Polarization 

Controller Without Fiber 

DTS0001 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 17-Nov-04 

1

Ordering Example For Standard Parts 

A university scientist is building a fiber interferometer and needs to manipulate the polarization of the light travelling through the fiber. He 

is using standard singlemode fiber for telecommunications wavelengths, and is using a 1480 nm source. To minimize reflections in his 

system he is using FC connectors with an APC finish. Based on this, a receptacle style controller will work in his application. 

Bar Code Part Number Description 

6324 HFPC-11-1300/1500-S-9/125-3A3A 

All Fiber Polarization Controller for 1300/1500 nm with 9/125 singlemode fiber and FC/APC 

receptacles on both ends. 

Questionnaire 

1. Which of the following options best describes your needs? 

a) I want to install and remove my own fiber. 

b) I want a specific fiber permanently installed. 

c) I want receptacles on either side to plug devices into. 

2. What wavelengths are you using? 

3. For pigtail style models, what should be the fiber length and cable type? 

4. For both pigtail and receptacle styles, what type of connector are you using? 

5. What is the intensity of the light travelling through the fiber? 

Ordering Information For Custom Parts 

Pigtail Version: 

PFPC-11-W-S-a/b-XY-JD-L 

Wavelength: Specify in nanometers 

(Example: 1550 for 1550 nm) 

Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 

9/125 for 1300/1550 nm SM fiber. 

See Table 1 of the Standard Tables for other 

standard fiber sizes 

Receptacle Version: 

HFPC-11-W-S-a/b-XY 

Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the device 

Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at the input and 

7 meters at the output, replace L with 1,7 

Fiber jacket type: 1=900 micron OD hytrel jacket 

3=3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced 

PVC cable 

See Table 7 of the Standard Tables for other jacket 

sizes 

Connector Code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 

3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 

3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 

8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 

SCA = Angled SC 


connectors 








3U = Ultra FC NTT-FC/PC 


8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 



connectors 

Ordering Example For Custom Parts 

A fiber laser manufacturer wants to put a polarization controller in his system. His laser will operate at 1053 nm, so he needs singlemode 

fiber for that wavelength. He needs 10 meters of fiber installed in the device, five meters per side. For strength and safety, he is using 

3 mm OD cabling. He wants FC/APC connectors on both ends. 

Part Number 

PFPC-11-980-S-6/125-3A3A-3-5 

Description 

All Fiber Polarization Controller with 5 meter long 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cabled 980 nm 

6/125 singlemode fiber pigtails with FC/APC connectors on both ends. 

3


Features: 

• High output power from 13 dBm (20mW) to 27 dBm (500mW) 

• Wide spectral bandwidth 

• Covers C-band, L-band, or both 

• High stability 

• Multi-output option-up to 4 ports 

• Un-polarized output light 

• Optional RS232 or USB interface 

• High performance-to-cost ratio 

• Optional built-in attenuator and optical power monitor 

• Custom design flexibility 

ASE BROADBAND LIGHT SOURCE 

Preliminary 

Applications: 

• Optical component testing 

• Telecom system compliance testing 

• EDFA gain spectrum measurements 

• Optical fiber sensors and sensing systems 

• WDM by spectral slicing 

• Biomedical imaging 

• Coherent communication systems 

Erbium-doped Fiber ASE Broadband Light Source 

Product Description: 

An ASE (Amplified Spontaneous Emission) broadband low 

coherence light source is an ideal instrument for optical component 

spectral measurement and system compliance testing in 

manufacturing and R&D environments. The new generation of ASE 

sources have no high frequency ripples, which makes them very 

useful for sensor interrogation applications. 

Sources are available to cover the C-band, L-band, or both the C & 

L bands together. These are available with either a flattened spectral 

output for demanding applications, or a non-flattened response for 

less demanding or cost-sensitive applications. A range of output 

powers are available. 

The output light is accessed via a female fiber connector receptacle 

on the front panel. A variety of standard connector types are 

available. Custom connectors can also be accommodated. Built-in 

splitters can also be provided to give multiple outputs without the 

cost of purchasing multiple sources. 

The basic version of the source has a simple ON/OFF operation. A 

built-in attenuator is available as an option, for users who need to be 

able to vary the output power. A built-in microprocessor can be 

included for applications that require the source or optional 

attenuator to operate under computer control. Either RS-232 or USB 

interfaces are offered. 

DTS0106 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 22-Mar-05 

1

Questionnaire 

1. What is the required power level? 

2. What range of wavelengths do you need? 

3. Would you like more than one optical output? If yes, how many? 

4. Do you need to be able to control the optical power? 

5. Do you need to have the source controlled by a computer? If yes, with what control interface? 

6. Do you need a flattened spectral response? 

7. What is your preferred connector interface? 

8. What sort of package style do you prefer? 

Description 

ASE Broadband Source 

Part Number 

ASE-N-PP-B-S-F-X-O-I 

N 

PP 

B 

S 

Number of Output Ports. 

Specify 1, 2 or 4. The specified output 

power is divided equally amongst the 

output ports. 

Output Power in dBm: 

Example – specify 13 for 13 dBm, 27 

for 27 dBm. Power should be within the 

range of 13 to 27 dBm. 

Wavelength band: 

C = C band 

L = L band 

D= C & L bands 

Package style: 

1 = Bench top 

2 = Rack mountable 

3 = OEM module 

4 = Gain Block - No electronics 

provided, user must provide pump 

drivers 

9 = Custom 

I 

O 

X 

Control interface: 

R = RS232 

U = USB 

X = Not Applicable - ie. gain block 

version or basic version 

Options 

A = Built-in attenuator with 

microprocessor control 

B = Basic version 

M = Microprocessor controlled 

Receptacle style: 

3 = Standard flat, Super, or Ultra FC/PC 

3A = Angled FC/PC 

8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


LC = LC 

MU = MU 

F 

Flatness: 

N = Non-flattened 

F = Flattened 

3

Features: 


PRELIMINARY 

• Sensitivity to -70 dB 

• Built-in RS-232 communications port 

• Wide range of available wavelengths 

• Built-in source 

• Dual wavelength source available 

• Rugged and compact design 

• High resolution 

• Optional insertion loss measurement capability 

BACKREFLECTION METER 

Applications: 

• Backreflection measurement of components 

• Insertion loss measurement 

• End-to-end loss measurement 

• Quality control 

• New Product development 

• Component or system troubleshooting 

• Network installation 

Fiber Optic Backreflection Meter 


The OZ Optics Limited BM-100 and BM-200 Backreflection Meters measure the total accumulated optical return loss that is reflected back 

through a device or fiber under test. The measured reflections are caused by Rayleigh scattering, sudden changes in the refractive index 

within the device under test (DUT), or from connector ends. 

The Backreflection Meter is configured with an FC/APC connector on the output port, to minimize unwanted reflections. The meter has either 

one or two built-in laser diodes for return loss measurement at specific wavelengths. An optional detector can be added to the unit for insertion 

loss measurements. Reference patchcords for calibration are available. Adaptor patchcords are also available, to allow the meter to be used 

with devices having different connectors. 

The BM-100 and BM-200 Backreflection Meters can be operated remotely via the built-in RS-232 interface. An optional GPIB to RS-232 

converter is also available. A universal AC/DC power supply, with a North American-standard power cord, is included with all units. Other types 

of power cords can be purchased separately. 

DTS0002 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 11/14/02 1

Ordering Examples For Standard Parts: 

A European fiber optic manufacturer must measure the backreflection and the insertion loss of singlemode and polarization-maintaining jumpers, at 

1550 nm and at 1310 nm. The manufacturer needs to order the following parts: 


14726 BM-200-3A-1310/1550-9/125-S-IL Singlemode Fiber Optic Backreflection Meter, with dual 1310 and 1550 nm 

built-in sources and insertion loss measurement capability. 

10229 SMJ-3A1-1300/1550-9/125-3-1 Reference patchcord, FC/APC to flat-polished ferrule, 9/125 micron 

singlemode 1300/1550 nm fiber, 3 mm OD PVC jacket, 1 m long. 

8131 SMJ-3A3U-1300/1550-9/125-3-2 Hybrid patchcord, FC/APC to FC/UPC, 9/125 micron singlemode 1300/1550 

nm fiber, 3 mm OD PVC jacket, 2 m long. 

2737 POWER CORD - EUROPE European power cord. 

Ordering Information For Custom Parts: 

Although we strongly recommend the purchase of our standard products, OZ Optics also welcomes the opportunity to provide customdesigned 

products to meet your application requirements. There can be a difference in the pricing for a custom-designed device or part 

compared to our standard parts list. Please consider the following points when reviewing your quotation: 

• Additional time is required to prepare a comprehensive quotation. 

• Lead times are usually longer than normal. 

• Non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges and lot charges may apply. 

• A five piece minimum order is necessary. 

These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so you can make a well-informed decision. 

Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 

1. What is your application? 

2. What wavelengths do you plan to use? 

3. What connector receptacle type do you need? 

4. What fiber type are you using? 

5. What is the minimum backreflection you want to measure? 

6. Do you want to measure insertion losses? 

7. Do you want a single wavelength or dual wavelength source? 

Backreflection Meter: 

BM-A-X-W-a/b - F - BL(-IL) 

A =Source type: 

100: Single wavelength source 

200: Dual wavelength source 

X = Connector Code : 

3= Standard, Super, Ultra NTT-FC/PC 

receptacle 

3A= Angled NTT- FC/PC 

SC=SC 

SCA=Angled SC 

8= AT&T-ST 

IL = Add -IL to the end of the part number for 

insertion loss measurement capability. 

BL = Backreflection range. If not specified, 

then a range of 70dB is assumed for 

singlemode fiber and 30dB for multimode 

fiber. 

F = Fiber type 

S: Singlemode 

M: Multimode 

W = Wavelength in nm: 

850, 980, 1310,1480,1550,1625 or 

W 1 /W 2 for dual source, in nm: 

1310/1550, 1550/1625, 1480/1550 

a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in µm 

9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber. 

Notes: 

1. For the multimode backreflection meter, the minimum measureable backreflection is 30 dB. Multimode backreflection meters are 

configured with LED sources. 

2. For singlemode backreflection meters, the minimum measureable backreflection measurement is 70 dB, with angled FC/PC connectors, at 

wavelengths of 1310 nm, or higher. 3


BARE FIBER ADAPTER 

Bare fiber preparation 

Bare fiber adapters provide a simple and effective way to use 

unterminated fibers with commercial receptacles. Simply strip and 

cleave your fiber and insert into the bare fiber adapter. Broken 

fibers are easily removed with piano wire, allowing hundreds of 

insertions. They are recommended for power meter hook-ups, 

temporary system repairs or wherever a quick fiber connection is 

required. Standard adapters accommodate 81 micron, 125 

micron or 140 micron cladding fibers with a typical insertion loss 

of less than 1dB. 

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 

Note: When using alcohol and acetone, carefully follow all 

safety, health and disposal information given on the 

container label, and on any material safety data sheets. 

1. If you are using the bare fiber adapter with uncabled 

fiber, proceed to step 2. If you are using cabled fibers, strip at 

least 3 inches of the cable's outer jacket and cut away the 

exposed strength members (usually Kevlar fibers near the 

stripped edge). 

ORDERING INFORMATION: 

Part Number 

BARE-03-b 

BARE-08-b 

Description 

Bare fiber adapter for FC connectors. 

Bare fiber adapter for ST connectors 

2. Strip a sufficient amount of the buffer to allow for fiber cleaving. 

The length of buffer stripped from the fiber will depend on the 

type of cleaving tool used. (Usually 1" to 2" is adequate.) 

3. Cleave the fiber, leaving approximately 1/2" to 5/8" of exposed 

fiber. (See the illustration above). 

4. Clean the exposed cladding with acetone and/or isopropyl 

alcohol (reagent grade). 

5. Depress the spring-loaded buffer clamping mechanism and 

insert the cleaved fiber into the acceptance hole. Push the 

fiber through until the cleaved fiber end is flush with the 

ceramic ferrule end face. At this point release the buffer 

clamping mechanism, to hold the fiber in place. Inspect the 

end face with an eye loop and if necessary, adjust the fiber 

until it is flush. 

6. Clean the surface of the ceramic ferrule with a lint-free, alcohol 

dampened cloth and blow dry with compressed air. 

7. The fiber is now ready for use. Insert the adapter into the 

optical test equipment's coupler. 

Where: b is the ferrule hole size, in microns Standard sizes are 81 microns, 127 microns and 144 microns. 

Hole size tolerance is +1/-0 microns 

Contact OZ Optics for bare fiber adapters for other adapter types, and other hole diameters. 

ORDERING EXAMPLE: An FC style bare fiber adapter is needed for use with 127 micron cladded fibers. OZ Optics part 

number: BARE-03-127. 

09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.


BEAM SPLITTERS/COMBINERS 

Features 

• High power handling 

• High extinction ratio 

• Highly modular and flexible design 

• Wide wavelength range 

• Bi-directional 

• Broadband performance 

• Custom designs welcomed 

• Mode independent behavior in multimode fiber applications. 

Applications 

• EDFA amplifier 

• Raman amplifier combiner 

• Polarization mode dispersion compensation 

• Polarization extinction ratio measurements 

• Fiber optic sensors 


• Return loss measurement 


Fiber optic beam splitters are used to divide light from one fiber into two 

or more fibers. Light from an input fiber is first collimated, then sent 

through a beam splitting optic to divide it into two. The resultant output 

beams are then focused back into the output fibers. Both 1XN and 2XN 

splitters can be constructed in this fashion with both low return losses 

and low insertion losses. This design is extremely flexible, allowing one 

to use different fiber types on different ports, and different beam splitter 

optics inside. Splitters can also be made with either fibers permanently 

attached to each port (pigtail style) or with receptacles on each port that 

one can plug your fiber into (receptacle style). We can also build source 

to fiber couplers with built-in beamsplitters for either laser or laser diode 

sources. Contact OZ for details. 

Please note that we strongly recommend using pigtail style devices 

whenever possible. Mechanical tolerances on connectors and 

receptacles mean receptacle style devices suffer from higher losses and 

poorer polarization extinction ratios than pigtail style devices. This is 

especially true for singlemode and polarization maintaining fiber 

devices. 

If size is a concern, we recommend that you consider our miniature line 

of splitters. Please refer to our data sheet titled Miniature Inline 

Polarization Maintaining Splitters/Taps/Combiners. 

The two most common types of splitters offered are polarizing beam 

splitters and polarization maintaining beam splitters. Their operating 

principles are as follows: 

Polarization Maintaining Splitters: These splitters use a partially 

reflecting mirror to transmit a portion of the light from the input fiber to 

the main output fiber, and reflect the remainder of the light to the second 

output fiber. All ports made using polarization maintaining fiber are 

Pigtail Style One-by-two Splitter 

Pigtail Style Two-by-two Splitter 

Laser To Fiber Coupler 

With Built-in Beam Splitter 

Laser Diode 

Polarization Beam Combiner 


1

aligned so that polarized light aligned parallel to the stress rods on 

the input fiber emerges from the output fibers in the same manner, 

maintaining the polarization state to a high degree. 

Polarization maintaining splitters use a multi-layer coating to split the 

light by a specific ratio regardless of the incoming polarization. 

Because of the nature of these coatings, their behavior will vary 

somewhat with respect to wavelength, and so are recommended for 

an operating wavelength range of about ±10nm. Broadband beam 

splitters are offered, but with greater variation in the split ratio with 

respect to input polarization. 

Splitters that only split off a small portion of the input light are 

commonly known as taps. These splitters are often used for power 

monitoring applications. The small signal, typically between one and 

ten percent, is sent to a monitoring photodiode, while the majority of 

the signal goes on to the main destination. For a very low cost 

alternative configuration, combining the functions of a tap and 

monitor photodiode in a single unit, we invite you to review our Inline 

Optical Taps and Monitors data sheet. 

Polarizing Splitters: Polarizing Beam Splitters split incoming light 

into two orthogonal states. They can also be used to combine the 

light from two fibers into a single output fiber. When used as a beam 

combiner, each input signal will transmit along a different output 

polarization axis. It is important when using these splitters with 

polarization maintaining fiber that one understands how the 

polarization axes are aligned on each port. Figure 1 one shows the 

standard configuration. With this configuration, the following 

behavior will be observed: 

1) Light launched along the slow axis of input port T will be 

transmitted along the slow axis of output port 1 

2) Light launched along the fast axis of input port T will be 

transmitted along the slow axis of output port 2 

3) Light launched along the slow axis of input port R will be 

transmitted along the fast axis of output port 1 

4) Light launched along the fast axis of input port R will be 

transmitted along the fast axis of output port 2 

This configuration can be changed based on a customer’s 

requirements. 

Please note that with polarizing splitters there are two 

considerations: The ability of the splitter to prevent polarized light 

intended for port 1 from reaching port 2 or vice versa (polarization 

crosstalk), and the output polarization extinction ratio of the light 

emerging from polarization maintaining fibers attached to each port. 

The crosstalk level will always be equal to or greater than the 

polarization extinction ratio. For example, a splitter can be produced 

with a high cross talk ratio, but if the output fibers have mediocre 

performance, then the output polarization extinction ratio would be 

low. Please be sure to specify both of these values if your system 

has special requirements. 

Input 

Port R 

PORT R 

Two 4-40 Tapped holes, 

0.50 inches apart, 

0.34 inches deep 

(On the bottom) 0.39 

(TYP) 

Input 

Port T 

Output 

Port 1 

PORT T 

0.87 

PORT 1 

Output 

Port 2 

PORT 2 

0.87 

Figure 1: Standard orientation of polarization maintaining 

fibers on polarizing beamsplitters 

Figure 2: Dimensions of standard two-by-two splitter 

2

Description 

Pigtail Style 

One-by-two Splitter 

Pigtail Style 

Two-by-two Splitter 

Part Number 

FOBS-12P-111-a/b-ABC-W-S/R-LB-XYZ-JD-L 

FOBS-22P-1111-a/b-ADBC-W-S/R-LB-XTYZ-JD-L 

a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns 

9/125 for 1300/1550 nm singlemode fiber. 

8/125 for 1550 nm PM fiber 


See tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables 

data sheet for other standard fiber sizes 

A,D, = Fiber Types on each port 

B,C (Input T, Input R, Output 1 and Output 2) 

M = Multimode 

S = Singlemode 

P = Polarization Maintaining 

W = 



S/R = Splitting ratio: 50/50 to 95/5 

50/50 Standard 

Use PBS for polarizing splitters 

L = 

JD = 

LB = 

Fiber length, in meters 

Fiber jacket type 

0.25 = 250 micron OD acrylate coating 

1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket 

3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable 

X,T, = Connector codes for each port 

Y,Z 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 



LC = LC 

SC = SC 


See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet 

for other connectors 

Backreflection level: 

30, 40, 50, or 60 dB 

50, 60 dB are standard for 1300 nm to 

1550 nm only 

40 dB standard for other wavelengths 

30 dB is standard for multimode 

Note: Add “-ER=25” or “-ER=30” to the end of the part number for products with output polarization greater than 25 dB and 30 dB, respectively. 

Description 


One-by-two Splitter 


Two-by-two Splitter 

Part Number 

FOBS-12-XYZ-ABC-W-S/R 

FOBS-22-XTYZ-ADBC-W-S/R 

X,T, = Connector codes for each port 

Y,Z 3 = FC, Super FC/PC and Ultra FC/PC 

3AF = Angled Flat NTT-FC 

SC = SC 

See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for 

other connectors 




W = 



A,D, = Fiber Types on each port 

B,C (Input T, Input R, Output 1and Output 2) 

M = Multimode 



5

Description 

Pigtail Style Laser Diode 

to Fiber Splitter 

Pigtail Style Laser 


Part Number 

LDBS-12P-a/b-AB-W-S/R-LB-XY-JD-L-C 

ULBS-12P-a/b-AB-W-S/R-f-LH-LB-XY-JD-L 

a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns 






A,B = Fiber Types on each port 

(Output 1, Output 2) 

M = Multimode 



W = 






f = Lens ID: See Lens Selection Guide 3 

for Non-Contact couplers with 

receptacles in the Laser to Fiber 

Coupler Application Notes 

LH = Laser Head Adapter 

1 for 1” -32TPI Male Threaded Adapter 

2 for Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 1” 

square 

11 for Post Mount Adapter 



C = Coupling Efficiency 1 : 

30 = 30% 

45 = 45% 

75 = 75% 

L = 

JD = 

LB = 






X,Y = Connector codes for each port 

3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 



LC = LC 

SC = SC 





30, 40, 50, or 60 dB 


1550 nm only 



1 Note that due to variations in the optical characteristics of the laser diode being used, not all coupling efficiencies are available for every laser diode for every 

fiber type. 

Description 

Receptacle Style Laser Diode 


Receptacle Style Laser 


Part Number 

LDBS-1XY-AB-W-S/R-C 

ULBS-1XY-AB-W-S/R-f-LH 

X,Y = Connector codes for each port 

3 = FC, Super FC/PC and Ultra FC/PC 

3AF = Angled Flat NTT-FC 

SC = SC 



A,B = Fiber Types on each port 

(Output 1, Output 2) 

M = Multimode 



W = 






C = Coupling Efficiency 1 : 

30 = 30% 

45 = 45% 

75 = 75% 

LH = Laser Head Adapter 

1 for 1” -32TPI Male Threaded Adapter 


square 




f = Lens ID: See Lens Selection Guide 3 

for Non-Contact couplers with 

receptacles in the Laser to Fiber 


1 Note that due to variations in the optical characteristics of the laser diode being used, not all coupling efficiencies are available for every laser diode for every 

fiber type. 

6


COLLIMATORS AND FOCUSERS – RECEPTACLE STYLE 

FEATURES: 



• Low insertion loss 


• Wide range of beam diameters 

• GRIN, aspheric, achromatic, plano-convex, and 

biconvex lenses available 

• Singlemode, multimode, and polarization maintaining 

fiber versions 

• Diffraction limited optics 

• LOW COST! 

PRELIMINARY 

APPLICATIONS: 

• Fiber optic device packaging, including WDM’s 

Splitters, and integrated optics 

• Source to fiber coupling 

• Fiber to detector coupling 

SPECIFICATIONS: 

• Available Wavelengths: 180nm - 2000nm 

• Polarization 

Extinction ratios: 

20, 25, or 30dB 

• Beam Diameters: 0.2 to 22mm 

• Spot size: As small as

For fiber focusers, the exact calculation of the spot diameter (SD), 

magnification factor (M), and working distance (WD) is more 

difficult and depends on the properties of the lenses being used. 

As a first approximation, one can calculate the desired focuser 

characteristics using the geometric optics lens formulae: 

FIBER COLLIMATOR 

FIBER 

LENS 

DA/2 

FIBER FOCUSER 

FIBER 

LENS 

1 

+ 

1 1 i 

i o 

= M 

f 

= - 

o 

SD = M × a WD =~ i 

Where o, i are the object and image distances respectively. Use 

the above formulae to determine what focal lens you require. 

Standard focal lengths and lenses are listed in the Standard 

Tables data sheet. 

Specifications: 

a 

f 

NA 

BD = 2×f×NA 

DA = a/f 

DA/2 

BD 

Figure 2: Operating Principle 

a 

o 

1/i + 1/o = 1/f 

M = -i/o, SD = M×a 

Note: The following specifications are typical values, and may vary, depending on the exact model selected. Contact OZ for detailed 

specifications for your exact model. 

Temperature Range: Operating: -15°C to 55°C with 0.2dB deviation in loss. 

Storage: -45°C to +75°C with less than 0.05dB residual loss. 

Vibration and Shock Test: Vibration tests were performed, consisting of a 0.05 inch peak to peak displacement, sweeping from 10 to 55 Hz 

over 15 minutes dwell at worst resonance of 55 Hz (.02g). Each device was tested for twenty-five minutes per axis 

for a total of 75 minutes of vibration. Tests were conducted in each of the three major axes of the test unit. Shock 

tests consisting on 100g, 11 msec duration half-sine shocks, three times on each face for a total of 18 shocks, 

were also performed. Coupling loss deviation was 0.05dB with no hysteresis. 

Power Handling: GRIN lenses: Up to 1 Watt. Aspheric lenses:Up to 10 Watts 

Achromat lenses: 5 to 10 Watts 

Plano- and Bi-convex lenses: Up to 100 Watts 

Available Wavelengths: GRIN lenses: 450-1700nm Aspheric lenses:390-2000nm 

Achromat lenses: 400/700nm and 700-1600nm Plano- and Bi-convex lenses: 180-2000nm 

Polarization Extinction Ratios: 

Dimensions: 

Typically >30dB for Aspheric lenses, >20dB for others. 

The dimensions given below are representative of typical products manufactured by OZ Optics. Actual dimensions will depend on the actual 

model ordered. In particular, the lengths of focusers may vary considerably from the lengths of a collimator for a given lens. The choice of 

receptacle will also affect the overall length. However, unless noted otherwise the dimensions for the clear holes, tapped holes and outer 

diameters of the flanges are accurate, and do not vary within product families regardless of which specific model collimator or focuser is 

purchased. 

The lens codes for which each version is designed for is listed below each drawing. Use the lens code to find the dimensions for your assembly. 

i 

SD 

0.200 

0.313 

0.515 

0.320 0.350 

0.100 

0.260 

0.240 

0.433 

0.463 

0.582 

0.727 

1.343 

0.645 

0.675 

0.784 

0.929 

1.545 

Three 0-80 tapped holes 

120° apart on a 1.125" 

diameter bolt circle 

2AS 

3.9AS 

2.7AS 

3.5AC 

6AC 

6.2AS 

10AC 

5BQ 

10BQ 25AC Hole 

Pattern 

HPUCO-23 Dimensions 

Note: All units are in inches 

Three Ø0.096 thru holes 

120° apart on a 1.125" 


ø0.791 

ø0.590 

ø0.472 

0.240 

0.353 

0.555 

Three 0-80 tapped holes 

120° apart on a 1.125" 


2.19 

1.97 

2.38 

3.5AC 

4.5AC 

6AC 

2AS 

2.7AS 

Hole 

Pattern 

3.5AC 2AS 11AS 

4.5AC 2.7AS 13.9AS 

6AC 3.9AS 18AC 

10AC 6.2AS 5BQ 

16AC 8AS 



2


OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, 

customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In 

particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. These points will be 

carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard 

products. 

Questionairre For Custom Parts 

1. Do you require a fiber optic collimator, or a fiber optic focuser instead? 

2a. For fiber collimator users only: 

What is the desired collimated beam diameter (in mm)? 

What is the desired collimated divergence angle (mRad)? 

2b. For fiber focuser users only: 

What is the desired spot diameter (in microns)? 

What is the desired working distance (in mm)? 

3. What is your operating wavelength range, in nanometers? 

4. Will you be using singlemode, multimode, or polarization maintaining fibers? 

5. What type of connector is on your fiber? 

6. What is the output power through your fiber? 

7. What is the desired flange size? 33mm, 20mm, 12mm, 11mm, or something else? 

Description 

Non-Contact Receptacle Style Collimator: 

Part Number 

HPUCO-AX-W-F-f 

A = Collimator Size 

2 for 33mm OD flange 


8 for 12mm diameter by 50mm long housing 

T for 11mm diameter housing 

X = Connector code: 

3 = FC (Compatible with Flat, Super PC 

and Ultra PC finishes 


3AF = Angled Flat FC 

8 = AT & T-ST 

SC = SC 

See table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables data 

sheet for other connectors. 

f = Lens focal length and type: 

See Tables 9 to 12 of the standard tables data 

sheet for a list of available lenses and the 

collimator housings they fit. 

F = Fiber Type: M = Multimode 


P = Polarization maintaining 


(Example: Specify 633 for 633nm) 

For achromat lenses at visible 

wavelengths specify 400/700 

Description 

Non-Contact Receptacle Style Focuser: 

Part Number 

HPUFO-AX-W-F-M-WD-f 




8 for 12mm diameter by 50mm long housing 

T for 11mm diameter housing 


3 = FC (Compatible with Flat, Super PC 

and Ultra PC finishes 


3AF = Angled Flat FC 

8 = AT & T-ST 

SC = SC 







WD = Working Distance, in mm 

M = Magnification Factor 






For achromat lenses at visible 

wavelengths specify 400/700 

5


COLLIMATORS AND FOCUSERS – PIGTAIL STYLE 

FEATURES: 




• Low backreflection 


• Wide range of beam diameters 

• GRIN, aspheric, achromatic, plano-convex, and 

biconvex lenses available 

• Singlemode, multimode, and polarization maintaining 

Fiber versions 

• Diffraction limited optics 

• LOW COST! 

PRELIMINARY 

APPLICATIONS: 

• Fiber optic device packaging, including WDM’s 

Splitters, and integrated optics 

• Source to fiber coupling 

• Fiber to detector coupling 


• Wavelength: 180nm - 2000nm 

• Backreflection: -35, -40, -50, and -60dB 

• Polarization 

Extinction ratios: 20, 25, or 30dB 

• Beam Diameters: 0.2 to 22mm 

• Spot size: As small as

Lens 

2.39/2.44mm 

18.5mm 

Strain Relief Tubing 

(Optional) 

Fiber: 250 micron acrylate coating, 

or 900 micron hytrel jacket 

FIBER COLLIMATOR 

FIBER FOCUSER 

0.5mm 

11.7mm 

5.0mm 

Heat Shrink Tubing (Optional) 

FIBER 

LENS 

DA/2 

FIBER 

LENS 

STANDARD VERSION 

Lens 

10.4mm 

Epoxy bead 

Fiber: 250 micron acrylate coating, 

or 900 micron hytrel jacket 

a 

NA 

BD 

a 

SD 

2.39/2.44mm 

f 

DA/2 

o 

i 

0.5mm 

9.00mm 

Ferrule 

SHORT VERSION 

Figure 1: Miniature pigtail style collimators 

dimensions 

BD = 2×f×NA 

DA = a/f 

Figure 2: Operating Principle 

1/i + 1/o = 1/f 

M = -i/o, SD = M×a 

For fiber focusers, the exact calculation of the spot diameter (SD), magnification factor (M), and working distance (WD) is more difficult 

and depends on the properties of the lenses being used. As a first approximation, one can calculate the desired focuser characteristics 

using the geometric optics lens formulae: 

1 

+ 

1 1 i 

i o 

= M 

f 

= - 

o 

SD = M × a WD =~ i 

Where o, i are the object and image distances respectively. Use the above formulae to determine what focal lens you require. 

Standard focal lengths and lenses are listed in the Standard Tables data sheet. 

TEST RESULTS: 

The following tests were conducted on a pigtail style collimator pair attached to a fixture providing a separation of 60mm. The pair was 

adjusted for maximum coupling efficiency. 

Temperature Range: Operating: -15°C to 55°C with 0.2dB deviation in loss. 

Storage: -45°C to +75°C with less than 0.05dB residual loss. 

Humidity Test: 97% humidity for 48 hours with 0.2dB deviation and less than 0.05dB residual loss 

(with the gap between the collimating lenses sealed against the environment). 

Vibration and Shock Test:Vibration tests were performed, consisting of a 0.05 inch peak to peak displacement, sweeping from 10 to 55 

Hz over 15 minutes dwell at worst resonance of 55 Hz (.02g). Each device was tested for twenty-five minutes 

per axis for a total of 75 minutes of vibration. Tests were conducted in each of the three major axes of the 

test unit. Shock tests consisting on 100g, 11 msec duration half-sine shocks, three times on each face for a 

total of 18 shocks, were also performed. Coupling loss deviation was 0.05dB with no hysteresis. 


1. What wavelength of light will you be transmitting through the fiber? 

2. Do you need multimode, singlemode, or polarization maintaining fiber? 

3. What fiber core/cladding size do you prefer? 

4. If you need a collimator, what size collimated beam do you need? 

5. If you need a focuser, what spot size and working distance do you need? 

6. What is the maximum diameter collimator housing that you can use? 

7. Do you prefer GRIN lenses, aspheric lenses achromat lenses, or plano convex / biconvex lenses? 

8. How low a return loss do you require? 

9. How long should the patchcord be, in meters? 

10. Do you need a connector on the other end of the fiber? If so, what type? 

11. What type of cabling do you need? 

2



customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we 

will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. These points will be carefully explained 

in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 

Description 

Pigtail Style Collimator: 

Part Number 

LPC-0A-W-a/b-F-BD-f-BL-X-JD-L 


1 for 4.0mm OD, no flange 

2 for 33mm OD removable flange 1 


4 for 8.0mm OD no flange 

5 for 2.5mm OD, standard length 

6 for 2.5mm OD, short length 2 


8 for 12mm OD x 50mm long 



a/b = Fiber core and cladding diameters, in 

microns: (Example: 9/125) 

See tables 1 to 5 of the standard tables 

data sheet for standard fiber sizes. 




BD = Beam Diameter, in mm 





Pigtail Style Focuser: 





4 for 8.0mm OD no flange 

5 for 2.5mm OD, standard length 

6 for 2.5mm OD, short length 2 


8 for 12mm OD x 50mm long 




microns: (Example: 9/125) 

See tables 1 to 5 of the standard tables 

data sheet for standard fiber sizes. 




M = Magnification Factor 

WD = Working Distance, in mm 

LPF-0A-W-a/b-F-M-WD-f-BL-X-JD-L 

L = Fiber length, in meters 

JD = Jacket Diameter 


3 = 3mm OD PVC loose tube with Kevlar 

3A = 3mm OD armored 

3AS = 3mm OD stainless steel armored 



See table 7 of the standard tables for drawings 


X = No connector 




8 = AT & T-ST 

SC = SC 


LC = LC/PC 

LCA = Angled LC 



BL = Backreflection level: 

25 or 35dB for multimode assemblies 

25, 40, 50, or 60dB for singlemode or 

polarization maintaining assemblies. 

60dB versions are available for 1300nm and 

1550nm wavelengths only 















8 = AT & T-ST 

SC = SC 


LC = LC/PC 





BL = Backreflection level: 


25 or 35dB for multimode assemblies 


25, 40, 50, or 60dB for singlemode or 


polarization maintaining assemblies. 

1 Smaller diameter removable flanges (11.5mm to 15mm diameters) are available on request. 

60dB versions are available for 1300nm and 3 

1550nm wavelengths only 

2 2.5mm and 1.6mm OD short length collimators are available with 0.25mm, or 0.9mm OD jacketed fibers only.


CONNECTORS, PATCHCORDS, BULKHEAD RECEPTACLES & SLEEVE THRU ADAPTORS 

Patchcords can be terminated with NTT-FC, SC, AT&T-ST, 

LC, and SMA connectors, as well as other connector 

types. FC connectors are highly recommended for both 

singlemode and multimode use. They offer the highest 

precision and repeatability. SMA connectors are used 

mainly for very large core fibers and High Power 

applications. 

OZ Optics produces high quality fiber optic patchcords using a 

variety of commercially available connectors and fibers. These 

patchcords offer low insertion losses, and excellent repeatability. 

Patchcords can be manufactured to any specified length. An 

array of cable materials are available, including unjacketed fiber, 

0.9mm outside diameter (O.D) loose tube buffer, 3mm O.D 

kevlar reinforced PVC jacketing, 3mm armored cabling, and 

5.0mm heavy duty armored cabling. 

OZ Optics offers a variety of multimode (MM) fiber types, 

including telecommunication standard Graded Index (GI) fibers 

(50/125, 62.5/125 and 100/140 fiber sizes), and step index (SI) 

fused silica core fibers for high power applications (10 to 1000 

micron core sizes). Multimode fibers are designed to operate 

well over a wide wavelength range. Their transmission range 

depends on the dopants used. There are low OH- fibers, which 

are optimized to either transmit well from 380nm to over 

1600nm (IRVIS type), or high OH- fibers that transmit well from 

280nm to 900nm (UVVIS type). Fibers that work at wavelengths 

below 280nm and above 1600nm are available on request. 

Singlemode (SM) fibers are available for a variety of 

wavelengths, ranging from 320nm to 1550nm as well as 

standard telecommunication fibers. They typically have a 99% 

numerical aperture (NA) of about 0.13. Higher NA singlemode 

fibers are available for certain special applications. When 

ordering singlemode fibers please specify the wavelength it will 

be used for. Singlemode fiber designed for 1300nm will not be 

singlemode at 633nm. Singlemode fiber designed for 488nm 

will work at 633nm with only slightly higher losses, but at 700nm 

the losses are too high. 

FC connectors with Super PC and angle polished (APC) 

endfaces are available to minimize back-reflection. Typical 

backreflection levels are 45dB for Super PC connectors, 

and 60dB for APC connectors. FC connectors for SM 

fibers with ferrule hole sizes of 79, 80, 81, 82, and 83 

microns are available to accommodate small cladding size 

fibers. FC compatible connectors are also the connector 

of choice for polarization maintaining fibers. Extinction 

ratios of 30dB are achievable. See the data sheet entitled 

Polarization Maintaining Connectors and Patchcords for 

more information. 

Bulkhead sleeve-thru adapters are also available. 

These devices allow you to connect two patchcords 

together, or to convert a male connector to a female 

receptacle. Flanged bulkhead female receptacles are 

also available for attaching angled or flat connectors to 

other optical devices. 

OZ Optics can also provide you with a variety of male 

connectors, housings, and ferrules, to perform your own 

terminations. A termination kit is available for this purpose. 

It contains all the tools necessary to make your own 

terminations in the field. If you only want a way to make a 

quick, temporary connection, then a bare fiber adapter can 

be used. 

NOTE: Multimode does not mean a bundle of fibers. 

Singlemode does not mean a single strand of fiber. 

A large assortment of fiber types are available from stock. OZ 

Optics also offers custom cabling services for customer 

provided fibers. Please read our Standard Tables data sheet for 

available fiber types. 

09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specification without prior notice.

ORDERING INFORMATION 

Part Number 

Description 

MMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L 

Multimode fiber optic patchcord. 

QMMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L High power fused silica multimode fiber optic patchcord. 

SMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L 

Singlemode fiber optic patchcord. 

QSMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L High power fused silica singlemode fiber optic patchcord. 

PMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L-A Polarization maintaining fiber optic patchcord. 

QPMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L-A High power fused silica polarization maintaining fiber optic patchcord. 

SMPC-03 

FC style sleeve-thru adapters with 2.14mm wide keyway. 

PMPC-03 

Polarization maintaining FC style sleeve-thru adapters with 2.06mm keyway. 

BULK-0X-F 

Sleeve-thru connector adapters. 

HPLC-NTT/FC-SM (or PM) Flanged bulkhead FC receptacle. Write SM for singlemode and multimode applications, 

PM for polarization maintaining applications. 

HPLC-NTT/FC-PM-SL3.7 Flanged bulkhead receptacle for Angled NTT-FC/PC connectors 

HPLC-ATT/ST-SM 

Flanged bulkhead ST receptacle. 

HPLC-25-SMA/M 

Flanged bulkhead SMA receptacle without stopper. 

HPLC-SMA/M 

Flanged bulkhead SMA receptacle with stopper. 

PMPC-2X-b-JD 

FC compatible PM connector, with 2mm pin (Use X=3 for FC, 3S for Super FC). 

SMPC-2X-b-JD 

SM male connector, with 2mm pin (Use X=3 for FC, 3S for Super FC and 8 for ST). 

MMPC-2X-b-JD 

MM male connector, with 2mm pin (Use X=3 for FC, 5 for SMA 905 and 8 for ST). 

BARE-0X-b 

Bare fiber adapter (Use X=3 for FC, and 8 for ST). 

OFOC-01-X 

Connector termination kit. (Use X=3 for FC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for ST, and SC for SC). 

HEAT-0X-V Fiber optic connector heater. V indicates the input AC line voltage (120V or 240V) 

HEGU-01-V Fiber optic heat gun. V indicates the input AC line voltage (120V or 240V) 

Where: 

X,Y are the input and output male connector types (1 for a 2mm diameter ferrule, 1A for an angled polished 

ferrule, 2 for Biconic, 3 for NTT-FC compatible, 3S for Super FC/PC, 3A for Angled PC, 5 for SMA 905, 6 for 

SMA 906, 8 for AT&T-ST, SC for SC connectors, X for unterminated fiber ends), 

W is the operating wavelength of the SM or PM fiber, in nm. For MM fibers only, specify IRVIS for fiber with 

a 400nm to 1600nm operating range, or UVVIS for fiber with a 240nm to 900nm operating range. See the 

Standard Tables data sheet for available fibers. 

a,b are the fiber core and cladding diameters, in microns, respectively. Ferrule hole sizes for FC connectors 

are 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 124, 125, 126, and 127 microns, 

F is the type of fiber being used (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fiber); 

JD is the fiber jacket type (0.25 or 0.4 for unjacketed fiber, 0.9 for 0.9mm nylon jacketing or loose tubing, 

3 for 3mm OD loose tube PVC cable, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, and 5A for 5mm OD armored cable.), 

L is the fiber length in meters, 

A is 1 for prealigned and locked PM connectors, 0 for unaligned PM connectors. 

Example 1: A customer requires a high power multimode fiber optic patchcord, with a 50 micron core size, and good 

transmission at 488nm. The patchcord must be 2 meters long, 3mm O.D armored cabled, and with angled FC style 

connectors on both ends. OZ Optics' part number: QMMJ-3A3A-IRVIS-50/125-3A-2. QMMJ-3A3A-UVVIS-50/125-3A-2 is 

also valid. 

Bulkhead SMA Receptacle 

Bulkhead SMA Receptacle with Stopper 

Bulkhead FC/PC Receptacle 

Bulkhead Angled FC/PC Receptacle


DELIVERY SYSTEM FOR FLOW VISUALIZATION – FIBER OPTIC 

Flow visualization systems are useful tools for process 

automation and quality control in liquid and gas production 

and transport. A visible wavelength laser beam is coupled 

into an optical fiber, recollimated at the fiber output, and then 

sent through a lens, generating a line. The line of laser light 

is then shone through the flowing liquid under inspection. As 

the light passes through the moving fluid, it refracts and 

scatters. Any particulate matter present, or changes to the 

flow pattern within the fluid, causes fluctuations in the output 

beam pattern which are visually observed. 

OZ Optics offers complete delivery systems for flow 

visualization, consisting of a laser to fiber coupler, fiber optic 

patchcord, fiber optic collimator, and fiber optic line 

generator. The line generator uses a Powell lens. This lens 

offers the unique ability to take a collimated beam, and 

transform it into a line with a uniform output intensity 

along its entire length. This is a major improvement over 

standard line generators, that use simple cylindrical 

lens. With cylindrical lenses, the output intensity is highest 

at the centre of the beam, then gradually fades away to either 

side. With the Powell lens you get a sharply defined line from 

end to end. 

Fiber optic delivery systems are available for 488nm, 514nm, 

and 633nm wavelengths. Other wavelengths are available 

on request. The maximum power transmission possible 

depends upon the fiber size chosen - 4/125 fiber can handle 

1 to 3 Watts, 10/125 fiber can handle 3 to 5 Watts, 25/125 

fiber can handle 5 to 10 Watts, and 50/125 fiber can handle 

10 to 20 Watts. For best repeatability and stability, FC 

connectors are recommended for the fiber couplers and 

collimators. Pigtail style couplers and collimators are also 

recommended. 

By choosing different focal lengths for the collimating and 

Powell lenses, different line widths and fan angles are 

possible. Standard line widths for singlemode fibers are 

0.8mm and 1.2mm. Standard fan angles are 10, 30 and 45 

degrees. Contact OZ Optics for further information on 

available line widths and fan angles. 


Part Number 

HPUC-2X-W-F-f-LH 

FMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L 

FOLM-2X-W-F-f-FA 

START-0X-V-WR 

Description 

Laser to fiber coupler with a connector receptacle. 

Singlemode or multimode fiber optic patchcord. 

Fiber optic line generator. 

Alignment kit for singlemode laser to fiber couplers with receptacles (V refers to the video 

format. Specify NTSC for North American format, PAL for European PAL format). 

DTS0014 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 22-Feb-05

Where: X,Y are the connector receptacle types for connector style couplers and collimators. For fiber optic 

patchcords they refer to the male connectors on the fiber ends (3 for NTT-FC, 5 for SMA 905 connectors, etc. See table 

1 below.), 

W is the operating wavelength in nm, 

a,b are the fiber core and cladding sizes, respectively, in microns. Available sizes include 4/125, 10/125, 25/125, 50/125, 

and 100/140, 

F is the type of fiber being used (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fibers, QS for fused 

silica core singlemode, QM for fused silica multimode, QP for fused silica polarization maintaining fibers. 10/125 fiber is 

considered to be singlemode fiber. It is constructed with a fused silica core.), 

f is the lens focal length, in mm, and type of lens being used. The following achromatic lenses are available: 3.5AC, 6AC, 

and 10AC, 

JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3 for 3mm OD loose tube kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, and 5A 

for 5mm armored cable.), 

L is the fiber length in meters, 

LH is the laser head adapter number for the laser to fiber couplers (See table 2 below.), 

FA is the fan angle of the laser line from the line marker. Fan angles of 10°, 30°, or 45° are available . 

WR is wavelength range, IRVIS for 400-1600nm, UVVIS for 180-700nm. 

When ordering the delivery system please specify the source laser beam characteristics (beam diameter, divergence angle, 

laser power, wavelength, and laser head adapter). OZ Optics provides a questionnaire to help you choose the best system 

for your application. Please complete it and fax it back before ordering. 

CONNECTOR TYPE 

CONNECTOR RECEPTACLE NUMBER (X) 

2mm OD Ferrule 1 

1.8mm OD Ferrule 1.8 

AT&T Biconic 2 

Universal Receptacle for connectors with 2.5mm OD ferrules 2.5U 

Standard NTT-FC/PC 3 

Super NTT-FC/PC 

3S 

Ultra NTT-FC/PC 

3U 

Angled NTT-FC/PC 

3A 

Angled NTT-FC/AFC 

3AF 

NEC-D4 4 

SMA905 5 

SMA906 6 

Diamond 3.5mm OD 7 

AT&T-ST ® 8 

Super AT&T-ST ® 

8S 

Ultra AT&T-ST ® 

8U 

Diamond HMS-10/HP 2.5mm OD 9 

DIN Standard 2.5mm OD 0 

SC 

SC 

Angled SC 

SCA 

Ultra SC 

SCU 

No Connector 

X 

® ST is a registered trademark of AT&T. 

LASER HEAD ADAPTER ADAPTER NUMBER (LH) BAR CODE # 

1"-32 TPI Male Threaded Adapter 1 817 

1.75" Disk Adapter with 4 holes on corners of 1" square 2 830 

3/4" - 32TPI Male Threaded Adapter 3 825 

5/8" - 32TPI Male Threaded Adapter 4 826 

1/2"-20 TPI Male Threaded Adapter for Amoco lasers 5 824 

5/8"-24 TPI Male Threaded Adapter 6 919 

1.75" O.D. Female Adapter for cylindrical lasers without any mounting holes 7 834 




Post Mount with 1/4"-20 TPI hole 11 835 

25mm O.D. Male Adapter for Spindler and Hoyer Optical Bench 12 851 

Polytec Laser Head Adapter 13 931 

Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 0.625" square for Lightwave Electronic lasers 14 800 

1.75" O.D. Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 1" square and 1"-32 TPI female thread in the middle 15 836 

1/2"-40 TPI UNF-2A Male Threaded Adapter 16 802 

Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 27mm bolt circle Siemens Lasers 17 850 

5/8"-24 TPI Female Laser Head Adapter for ILT lasers 18 765 

Disk Adapter with 3 holes on a 2.25" diameter bolt circle for Omnichrome lasers 19 928 

1.75" Disk Adapter with 4 holes on a 35mm diameter bolt circle 20 837


Features 

• Varies the delay between two polarization states 

• Low loss 

• Sub-picosecond resolution 


• ±50 psec delay range 

• Electronically controlled 

DIFFERENTIAL POLARIZATION DELAY LINES 

Applications 

• PMD compensation in high speed communications networks 

• PMD emulation 

• TDM bit alignment 

• Interferometric sensors 

• Coherent telecommunications 

Differential Delay Line 


OZ Optics’ new differential delay line represents the next stage in controlling polarization mode dispersion in optical networks. The device splits the 

light within a fiber into orthogonal polarizations, and then actively varies the time that one polarization travels compared to the other 

polarization before combining the two polarizations together again. With this technique, one can introduce up to ±50 picoseconds of optical delay 

in a system. The resolution of the device is better than 0.005 picoseconds, thus providing a high degree of control. The device is easily controlled 

by a computer via an RS-232 interface. Home and End position sensors allow easy monitoring of the device status and prevent any potential 

damage to the device. 

Figure 1: Differential Delay Line Dimensions (inches) 

DTS0005 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 04/02 1


OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized 

products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we 

will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering 

(NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so 

your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 


1. What delay range (in psec or mm) do you need? 

2. What resolution (in psec or mm) do you need? 

3. Do you need a readout of the position? 

4. What interface do you prefer for device control? 

5. What wavelength will you be using? 

6. What is the worst acceptable return loss? 

7. What kind of fiber connectors are you using? 

8. What size of cable should be used? 

9. How long should the fibers be? 

W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers 

(Example: 1550 for1550nm) 

a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 

9/125 for 1300/1550nm Corning SMF-28 

singlemode fiber 

LB = Backreflection level 40, 50 or 60dB 

(60dB is available for 1300 and 1550nm only) 

X,Y = Connector code: Specify input connector 

followed by output connector 





8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


LC = LC 


MU = MU 

DDL-650-11-W-a/b-S-LB-XY-JD-L -I 

I = Interface 

PC for base model with no microcontroller 

MC/RS232 for Intelligent RS232 Interface 

L: Fiber length in meters, on each side of the 

device. If they are different, specify the input and 

output fiber lengths separated by a comma. 

Example: To order 1 meter of the fiber at the input 

and 7 meters at the output, replace the L with 1,7 

JD = Fiber jacket type 


3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable 

See the Standard Tables for other jacket sizes 

Ordering Examples for Custom Parts: 

A customer is building a PDL emulation system to test PDL effects at 1480nm using RS232 control. He needs singlemode fiber pigtails 1 meter 

long on each side, and does not need connectors. Because he is fusion splicing, he prefers uncabled fiber. 

Part Number 

DDL-650-11-1480-9/125-S-60-XX-1-1-MC/RS232 

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs): 

Description 

Electrically Controlled Differential Delay Line for 1480nm, with 

60dB return loss. Pigtails are 1 meter long 0.9mm OD tight 

buffered 9/125 SM fibers, no connectors. Controlled via an 

RS232 protocol. 

Q: Is the minimum delay zero picoseconds? 

A: Yes. The delay can be positive or negative (ie, one polarization either lagging or leading the other polarization). 

Q: Are the units calibrated? 

A: Yes. The zero PMD reading is referenced to within ±1psec. All measurements are made relative to this value, with better than 0.002 psec 

resolution. 

Q: What limits the accuracy of the 0 psec point? 

A: Several issues. First, the zero point is determined with a PMD meter, which is limited in its accuracy. Second, the delay introduced by the 

device is also affected by how the fiber is coiled or bent during measurement and installation. 

3


DIGITAL INLINE OPTICAL POWER MONITOR/METER 

Features: 


• Continuous fiber. No interruptions to optical path 

• Display units are interchangeable 

• Wide dynamic range 


• Polarization maintaining (PM) fiber versions available 


• Long battery life 

• Automatic shut off 

• RS-232 interface option available 

• Analog output option available 

Applications: 

• Optical power control devices 

• Channel balancing for WDM systems 

• Dynamic optical amplifier gain monitoring 

• Power monitoring 

• Network monitoring 

• Real time in-line test and measurement 


• Fiber optic sensor 

PRELIMINARY 

DATA SHEET 

Inline Optical Power Monitor/ Meter With Digital Display 


Using a new, patent pending process, OZ Optics, as part of its new series 

of inline optical power monitors and tap couplers, now offers a digital inline 

optical power monitor (for more details about OEM optical power monitors, 

see the "Inline Optical Taps and Monitors" data sheet). Based on a 

groundbreaking new fabrication process, these all-fiber taps and monitors 

provide a way to easily measure the average signal intensity through an 

optical fiber via tapped light channeled into a built-in photodiode, without 

interrupting the traffic. The photodiode produces a signal proportional to the 

optical power traveling through the fiber with high directivity. 

The OPM-200 product integrates a novel inline optical tap with a low noise 

InGaAs detector in combination with a high dynamic range logarithmic 

amplifier. The built-in microcontroller processes and displays the power 

transmitted through the selected fiber channel on an LCD display. 

Inline Optical Power Monitor/Meter 

With Manually Variable Attenuator 

The optical tap modules and display units are independently calibrated, so 

any display unit can be plugged into any tap module and the measured 

power will be automatically calibrated. A low voltage circuitry design 

ensures a long lifetime for the built-in battery. 

The detector module can be calibrated for either a single wavelength or for 

a broad wavelength range. Optional, RS-232 and analog outputs are also 

available. 

The OPM-200 is ideal for network monitoring, out of specification alarms, 

and/or DWDM systems for real time monitoring and feedback. Our inline 

taps are highly directional and ideal for monitoring traffic traveling in one 

direction only. It may also be used for measuring return losses instead of 

transmitted power. In the same product family, OZ Optics now provides 

OEM single channel optical power monitors and multi-channel power 

monitors for DWDM system integration. 

Inline Optical Power Monitor/Meter: 

Detector Unit And Plug 



Although we strongly recommend the purchase of our standard products, OZ Optics also welcomes the opportunity to provide custom-designed 

products to meet your application requirements. There can be a difference in the pricing for a custom-designed device or part compared to our 

standard parts list. Please consider the following points when reviewing your quotation: 

• Additional time is required to prepare a comprehensive quotation. 

• Lead times are usually longer than normal. 

• Non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges and lot charges may apply. 

• A five part minimum order is necessary. 

These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so you can make a well-informed decision. 

Questionnaire for Custom Parts: 

1. What is your operating wavelength range? 

2. Do you need a single calibration wavelength or calibration across the entire wavelength range? 

3. Do you need standard singlemode fiber or polarization maintaining fiber? 

4. What is the expected optical power through the fiber, or what tap ratio do you need? 

5. Do you need the ends of the fiber connectorized? What type of connector do you need? 

6. How long should each end of the fiber be? 

7. Do you need the fiber cabled? What cable size do you need? 

8. Do you need a display? Do you need it with analog output? RS-232, or with both analog and RS-232? 

Description 

Kit: Detector Module With Display unit: 

Part Number 

OPM-200-W-a/b-F-XY-J -L(-C) 

W: Calibrated Wavelength in nm: 980, 1310, 1480, 1550 or 

1620 for single wavelength calibration and 1290/1620 for 

broad spectral calibration 

a/b: Fiber core/cladding sizes, in µm: 


6/125 for 980/1064nm SM fiber 

8/125 for 1550nm PM Fiber 

F: Fiber type S: Singlemode 

P: Polarization maintaining fiber 

C: Communication interface: 

Leave empty for no interface 

A = Analog voltage interface 

S232 = RS-232 communication interface 

A/RS232= For both Analog and RS-232 

L: Fiber Length in meters for each side 

J: Jacket size: 1= 1mm OD loose tube Jacket 

3= 3mm OD PVC cable 

X,Y: 

Connector code: 



3A = Angled NTT- FC/PC 

SC = SC 


8 = AT&T-ST 

LC=LC 

MU=MU 

4

Description 

Detector Module: 

Part Number 

OPM-200-W-a/b-F-XY-J -L-DET 

W: Calibrated Wavelength in nm: 980, 1310, 1480, 1550 or 

1620 for single wavelength calibration and 1290/1620 for 

broad spectral calibration 

a/b: Fiber core/cladding sizes, in µm: 


6/125 for 980/1064 nm SM fiber 

8/125 for 1550 nm PM Fiber 

F: Fiber type S: Singlemode 

P: Polarization maintaining fiber 

Description 

Display unit: 

Part Number 

OPM-200(-C)(-PS) 

L: Fiber Length in meters for each side 

J:: Jacket size: 1= 1mm OD loose tube jacket 

3= 3mm OD PVC cable 

X,Y: 

Connector code: 



3A = Angled NTT- FC/PC 

SC = SC 


8 = AT&T-ST 

LC=LC 

MU=MU 

C: Communication interface: 

Leave empty for no interface (standard) 

A = Analog voltage interface 

RS232 = RS-232 communication interface 

A/RS232= For both analog and RS-232 

PS: 

Power supply plug (only required 

if a communication interface is ordered) 

NA = North America 

EU = Europe 

UK = United Kingdom 

Ordering Example For Custom Parts: 

A North American DWDM manufacturer wants to measure the IL at wavelengths across a broad spectral range through an RS-232 

communication interface. The manufacturer needs to order the following parts: 


20070 OPM-200-1290/1620-9/125-S-3U3U-3-1-DET Inline tap detector module calibrated from 1290 to 1620nm. The fiber is 1m long 

on each side, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 micron singlemode fiber with Ultra FC/PC 

connectors on both ends. 

20069 OPM-200-RS232-NA Optical Power Monitor display unit with RS232 interface. Battery and AC 

powered. RS-232 cable, 5V AC/DC North American power supply and right angle 

detector interface plug are included. 

Figure 2: Detector Unit Mechanical Dimension (inches) [mm] 

5


Features: 

• Narrow linewidth 

• Polarization insensitive 


• Singlemode, multimode, and polarization maintaining fiber versions 


• Built in computer RS232 interface 

• GPIB/RS232 converter available 

Applications: 

• Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) 

• Tunable sources 

• Spectral analysis 

• Quality control and measurement 

• Product development 

• Fiber optic component manufacturing 

• Automated testing 


DIGITAL TUNABLE FILTERS 

Tunable filters consist of a collimating optical assembly, an adjustable narrow 

bandpass filter, and a focusing optical assembly to collect the light again. Tunable 

filters are available in three versions - a manually adjustable version, a motor 

driven version for OEM applications, and a digital version. 

Digital Tunable Filter 

The digital tunable filter is a hand held unit with a keypad, display, and computer 

interface. The device works on the principle that by adjusting the angle of 

incidence between the filter and the incident beam one controls the wavelength at 

which the filter transmits. The digital version is calibrated such that the user 

directly enters the wavelength to transmit via the keypad or remotely, through the 

computer interface. An RS232 interface with cable is standard with GPIB to 

RS232 converter offered as an optional accessory. 

GPIB/RS232 Converter 

Filter linewidths are normally defined in terms of Full Width at Half Maximum 

(FWHM). The standard filter used in tunable filters has a smooth, rounded 

transmission spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. A 

Fabry Perot cavity is simply made up of two reflectors separated by a fixed spacer 

of some thickness. Other filter profiles are available. For instance, flat top 

bandpass filters are made by stacking multiple cavities together. By increasing the 

number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore improving the outof-band 

rejection level. For more information on custom filters please contact OZ 

Optics. 

OZ Optics tunable filters now utilize a new optical technique to control Polarization 

Dependent Losses (PDL). This new design reduces PDL to below 0.3dB, while at 

the same time making the spectral response polarization insensitive. This feature 

makes it ideal for today's DWDM system applications. 

Tunable filters using singlemode, multimode and Polarization Maintaining (PM) 

fibers are offered.In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based 

on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components 

and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber 

structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact 

our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer 

supplied fibers to build devices. 

Figure 1: Digital Tunable Filter Layout 


SAMPLE TEST DATA FOR TUNABLE FILTERS 

Wavelength (nm) 

PDL (dB) 

1520.04 0.30 

1530.00 0.20 

1539.96 0.10 

1550.04 0.15 

1560.00 0.30 

1569.96 0.30 

Figure 2: Typical Transmission Curve For 1.2nm C-Band Tunable Filters 

Standard Product Specifications: 

Power Supply: 

Computer Interface: 

Resolution: 

Tuning Range: 

Wavelength Range: 

Linewidth: (FWHM): 

Wavelength/Temperature 

Sensitivity 

PDL: 

Insertion Loss: 

Standard Wavelength 

Ranges: 

Power Handling: 

Response Time: 

Dimensions: 

Weight: 

Repeatability 

Universal 110/220 Volt AC/DC adapter. Removable North American power cord included. Other power cords 

available as accessories. 

RS232. External GPIB-RS232 adapters available. 

Typically less than 0.1nm 

50nm 

1520-1570 (C-band), 1570-1620 (L-band) and 1470-1520 (S-band) standard. Other ranges available on request. 

1.1 ±0.1nm standard. As narrow as 0.3nm is available as an option. 

Typically less than 0.002nm/°C 

Typically less than 0.3dB 

Typically less than 2.5dB for complete device over full tuning range. 

S, C and L bands: 1470-1520nm, 1520-1570nm and 1570-1620nm 

Up to 200mW for standard package. 

50nm change in less than 1 sec. 1nm change in less than 0.1 sec. 

5.9 x 3.2 x 1.8 inches (150 x 81 x 46mm) 

1lb (450g) (not including protective boot) 

Typically better than 0.2nm 

2


A customer in Europe wants to use a broadband source as a tunable source in order to test the spectral characteristics of optical components at 

different wavelengths. Both the light source and components have FC/PC receptacles and the wavelength region of interest for the components 

is throughout the C-band. The broadband source is polarized randomly and therefore the tunable source required should be polarization 

insensitive. The customer would like to be able to adjust the wavelength at the workstation as well as remotely from a computer. He is using a 

GPIB control interface. 

The component required for this application is a polarization insensitive digital tunable filter. With this unit connected to the broadband light source 

and by directly entering the wavelength to transmit via the keypad or remotely, through the computer interface, the transmitted wavelength from 

the broadband source can be tuned from 1520 to 1570nm. 


10176 TF-100-3S3S-1520/1570-9/125-S-40-1.2 Polarization insensitive digital tunable filter for 1520-1570nm 9/125 SM fiber with 

40dB return loss, super FC/PC receptacles and 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot filter. 

4572 GPIB-RS232 GPIB/RS232 Converter 

4571 GPIB-CABLE-2 GPIB cable, 2m long 

2737 POWER CORD-EUROPE Power Cord - European 4mm Round Pin 



customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, 

we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring 

engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, 

so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products 


1. What wavelength range are you interested in? 

2. What linewidth do you require? 

3. What type of transmission profile do you require? 

4. What type of fiber is being used? Singlemode, Multimode or PM? 

5. Are you using a polarized or randomly polarized light source? 

6. What return losses are acceptable in your system? 

7. What connector type are you using? 

X,Y = Input & Output Connector codes: 

3S=Super NTT-FC/PC 

3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC 

3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC 

8=AT&T-ST 

SC=SC 

SCA=Angled SC 

LC=LC 

LCA=Angled LCA 

W = Wavelength range in nanometers: 

Example: 1520/1570 

a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns: 

9/125 for 1300/1550nm Corning SMF 28 fiber 

8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber 

TF-100-XY-W-a/b-F-LB-LW 

LW = Linewidth in nm: 

Standard filter is Fabry Perot. For a flat top 

profile filter, add the letter F to the end of the 

number. 

LB = Backreflection Level: 

40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or 

polarization maintaining fibers only 

(60dB for 1290 to 1620nm wavelength 

ranges only) 

35dB for multimode fibers 

F = Fiber type: 

M=Multimode 

S=Singlemode 

P=Polarization Maintaining 

Ordering Examples For Custom Parts: 

Example 1: 

A customer in North America has a specialty polarized light source between the C and L bands and wants to use it as a tunable source while 

maintaining the extinction ratio. The source is used between 1550 and 1600nm and is pigtailed with a super FC/PC connector. 

A custom version of the digital tunable filter with a narrow linewidth made for PM fiber will meet this requirement custom filter. 

Part Number 

TF-100-3S3S-1550/1600-8/125-P-40-0.3 

Description 

Polarization maintaining digital tunable filter for 1550-1600nm 8/125 PM fiber 

with 40dB return loss, super FC/PC receptacles and a custom 0.3nm FWHM 

Fabry Perot filter. 

4


Q: What is the filter linewidth? 

A: The standard filter is a 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot filter. This can be customized to suit the customer's requirements. 

Q: How do you define your linewidths? 

A: Standard filters are specified by their Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM). This is the transmitted line width at -3dB from the peak transmission. 

For custom filters linewidths such as the passband at -0.3dB and -25dB can be specified. 

Q: What is the largest tuning range available? 

A: The standard tuning range is 50nm, however the filters can be made operational for a 100nm tuning range with some effects on the linewidth 

and insertion loss in the lower wavelength (high angle of incidence) region. 

Q: What is a Fabry Perot filter? Are there other types available? 

A: A Fabry Perot filter has a smooth, rounded transmission spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. A Fabry Perot 

cavity is simply made up of two reflectors separated by a fixed spacer of some thickness. By adjusting the spacer thickness one can adjust 

the pass bandwidth of the filter. Other shapes of filters are available. For example, flat top bandpass filters are made by stacking multiple 

cavities together. By increasing the number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore improving the out-of-band rejection level. 

For more information on what custom are filters available please contact OZ Optics. 

Q: Is the shape of the transmission curve affected by polarization? 

A: No, OZ Optics tunable filters utilize an optical technique to control Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL). This design reduces PDL to minimal 

levels, while at the same time making the spectral response polarization insensitive. 

Q: How well does the filter block unwanted wavelengths? 

A: For standard single cavity filters the typical line width at -20dB is ~10nm. This type of filter is good for selecting specific channels in a DWDM 

system or cleaning up the ASE noise from a broadband source. The filter may transmit light at specific wavelengths significantly outside the 

operating wavelength range For custom applications requiring different out-of-band isolation please contact OZ Optics. 

Q: What linewidth do I need in a 200GHz DWDM system? 100GHz? 50GHz? 

A: Typical linewidths associated with these frequencies are 1.2, 0.8 and 0.3nm respectively. This ultimately depends on the channel width and 

isolation levels required for the system in question, OZ Optics can work with you to build the filter that best suites your requirements. 

Q: Is the unit calibrated? 

A: YES, the Digital Tunable Filter uses a stepper-motor which is calibrated to give the desired wavelength within the specified wavelength range 

of the unit. 

Q: Does the device operate at 220V as well as 110V? 

A: Yes, the universal power adapter works for both voltages but you have to use the appropriate power cord. A North American style power cord 

is included with the unit. Other types of power cords may be ordered separately. 

Application Notes: 

Introduction: 

OZ Optics' family of hand-held test equipment includes the Digital Tunable Filter for transmission of a well-defined band of light. Wavelength 

selection is controlled by angle of incidence of a collimated beam to a bandpass filter. Control of angle is accomplished with a micro-controlled 

stepper motor geared for an optimal balance of speed and resolution. 

The OZ Digital Tunable Filter TF-100 system includes the handheld unit with impact-absorbing blue rubber boot, RS-232 cable, AC/DC power 

supply with cord. 

Introduction To Thin Film Filters: 

In many fiber-optic applications we need to use light with a specific frequency or wavelength (l). Although a laser may be an excellent source of 

monochromatic radiation, we might need a source of light providing controlled, variable wavelength. Bandpass filters provide an effective means 

of transmitting a well-defined band of light while blocking unwanted wavelengths emanating from a broadband source. 

OZ Optics' Tunable Filter uses a narrow wavelength bandpass filter. With increased angle of incidence, the filter transmits light of decreased 

wavelength (Figure 3) 

Figure 3. Conceptual design of a tunable filter. 

5

Application Notes: (cont’d) 

The typical output wavelength distribution is demonstrated in Figure 4. 

tunable 

filter 

Figure 4: Use of a broadband source and a tunable filter to create a narrow-band signal. 

The main problem with typical tunable filters that has been solved by OZ Optics is their polarization sensitivity. As the angle of incidence 

increases, the sensitivity to polarized light also increases. (See Figure 5) This is a very important point in optical systems as the separation of the 

S and P polarizations causing large PDL can have detrimental affects on the system. 

Figure 5: Differences in spectral width and attenuation between 

"P" and "S" polarized light. 

OZ Optics' tunable filters utilize an optical technique to control PDL making the spectral response polarization insensitive. The polarization 

insensitivity is accomplished through the precision alignment of optical components on both the input and output side of the filter. As 

demonstrated in Figure 6. below, the light is first split into its respective polarizations and then one of the polarizations is rotated such that the 

light incident on the filter is all the samepolarization. After passing through the filter the other poliarization is rotated and then the beams are 

combined for the final focusing and collection into the fiber. By rotating the light and having a common polarization pass through the filters the 

PDL effect of the filter at high angles of incidence is avoided.Therefore, the spectral response of S and P polarizations remain the same for 

increasing angles of incidence. See figure 7. 

Figure 6: A perspective sketch showing the splitting and recombining of the polarizations in a tunable filter. 

Figure 7: "S" and "P" polarized output light at a high 

angle of incidence in the OZ Optics filter. 

6


Features: 

• CE Compliant 

• High power handling (up to 2 watts) 

• High speed 

• Wide attenuation range 

• Low PDL and wavelength dependency 

• Low insertion loss and backreflection 



• Calibrated for dual wavelengths, (1300-1550nm) or calibrated for 

C and L bands. It can also be calibrated for up to four individual 

wavelengths 


• Wide range of receptacles 

• Blocking technique for singlemode; neutral density filter technique for 

multimode fiber applications 

• Computer interface 

• Polarization maintaining fiber versions are available. 

Applications: 

• Bit error testing 

• Trouble shooting receivers and other active fiber optic components 

• Simulating long distance fiber transmission 

• Design of fiber optic transmitter/receiver circuitry 

• Power meter linearity checks 

• Power setting 


DIGITAL VARIABLE ATTENUATOR 

Digital Variable Attenuator 

OZ Optics offers a compact, rugged and low cost digital attenuator with high 

resolution, high speed, high attenuation range and high power handling (blocking 

technique only). OZ Optics' digital attenuator is a hand held unit, CE approved. These 

attenuators have low insertion loss, low backreflection, low PDL and flat 

RS-232 GPIB Interface 

wavelength response. These units can be calibrated for up to 4 wavelengths, for C or 

L bands. Alternatively the unit can be calibrated for a continuous range. By using interpolation between the calibration wavelengths, the unit is 

capable of providing accurate attenuation levels over a continuous, broad range of wavelengths. 

OZ Optics' digital attenuators are ideal for use in bit error rate testing, troubleshooting receivers and other active fiber optic components, power 

meter linearity checks, simulating long distance fiber transmission and power setting. A computer interface allows users to access or remotely 

control the unit through a PC. 

OZ Optics provides digital attenuators that use either singlemode, multimode or Polarization Maintaining (PM) fiber. In general, OZ Optics uses 

polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However 

OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales 

department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. 




products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, 


engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 5 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your 

quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 


1. How much power will be transmitted through the attenuator? 

2. What type of fiber do you wish to use? 


4. Will this attenuator be used in Europe or in the United Kingdom? 

5. Are there any special performance requirements that you need to meet? 

6. What wavelengths do you want the attenuator calibrated at? 

Digital Variable Attenuator: 





8 = AT & T-ST 

SC = SC 


See the standard tables data sheet for 


W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers: 

Example: 1300/1550 for standard telecom 

wavelength range 

DA-100-X-W-a/b-F-LB 

LB = Backreflection level: 40, 50 or 60dB 

for singlemode fibers,35dB for MM fibers 


M=Multimode 

S=Singlemode 




See the standard tables data sheet for 

other standard fiber sizes 

Note 1: For low insertion loss attenuators add "-LL" to the end of the part number. 

LL ≤ 0.6dB with units that have 60dB return loss, LL ≤ 1dB for rest of the attenuators 

To handle continuous power levels above 500mW, add -HP to the end of the part number. Maximum continuous power level should 

not exceed 2 watts. 


A customer wants to order a digital attenuator to be calibrated at 1300nm and 1550nm, using singlemode fiber and FC receptacles with 50dB 

back reflection and ≤ 1dB insertion loss. The part number should be: DA-100-3U-1300/1550-9/125-S-50-LL 


Q: What advantages or disadvantages does the beam blocking version have over the neutral density versions. 

A: The beam blocking technique is naturally suited for high power applications, and can achieve greater attenuation levels. The neutral density 

version shows less mode dependence or modal noise in multimode applications. 

Q: What do you mean by mode dependence and modal noise? 

A: The term multimode means there is more than one path for light to travel inside a single fiber. These paths are known as modes. It does 

not mean the unit consists of multiple fibers in a bundle. When coherent laser light is coupled into multimode fiber, the output shows 

speckles. Bending the fiber causes the speckle pattern to change. If the losses in a system depend on which modes are excited, then 

changing the modes excited in the fiber changes the output power. This is known as modal noise. If the source being used is an LED, 

then one does not see speckles, and modal noise is not an issue. However, for laser sources, modal noise is an issue. 

When blocking style attenuators are used with multimode fiber, some modes are blocked, while others are transmitted. This can produce 1dB 

or greater modal noise fluctuations with coherent sources. A variable attenuator using a neutral density filter is not as strongly affected by 

modal noise. However, neutral density filter attenuators offer lower attenuation range (around 40dB) and can only handle about 50mW of 

power. 

Q: What are the standard numerical apertures (NA) for the fibers used in your attenuators? Should I specify the NA of the fiber when I'm 

ordering an attenuator? 

A: Please see our standard tables for detailed information on our fibers. If you want to use fiber that hasn't been specified in the standard 

tables then you should specify it while ordering. 

Q: I ordered an attenuator with 60dB return loss but when I measured it my return losses are higher. Why? 

A: If you ordered an attenuator with 60dB return loss with connectors, the back reflection will depend on what grade of connector you selected 

for your fibers. Typically only angle polished (APC) style connectors will give the desired return losses. The device itself has 60dB return 

loss (i.e. if you cut off the connectors and measured the return loss you will see it above 60dB) but if you picked only ultra PC finish 

connectors you may only see from 50 to 55dB return losses. 

4


Features: 


• Wide reflectance range 




• Can be calibrated for dual wavelengths 


• Wide range of connectors 


• RS232 communications interface 

• Low cost 

• CE compliant 

DIGITAL VARIABLE REFLECTOR 

Applications: 

• Bit error rate testing 

• Troubleshooting receivers and other active fiber optic components 


Digital Variable Reflector 


OZ Optics’ Digital Variable Reflector enables the user to generate a known level of return loss 

to evaluate system response. The unit allows testing the return loss sensitivity of devices such 

as laser diodes, transmitters, isolators and so on. By generating a precise reflection level, 

system performance (bit error rate, noise levels, isolator performance) can be evaluated. Our 

built-in calibration table accurately defines intermediate degrees of reflection from 2dB to as 

high as 60dB for different wavelengths. 

Digital reflectors are offered using either singlemode, multimode, or polarization maintaining 

(PM) fibers. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA 

fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However 

OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some 

alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, 

we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. 

Optional GPIB To RS-232 Converter 

For best results, the standard parts are designed to accept angled FC/PC connectors. Other 

connector types are possible with lower dynamic reflectance range. 

The device can be controlled remotely via an RS232 interface. An optional GPIB to RS232 

converter is also available. A universal AC/DC power supply is included with all units, along 

with a North American power cord. Other types of power cords may be purchased separately. 

The Digital Variable Reflector can be provided with a custom built-in fused coupler which 

directs a fraction of the reflected light to a second optical connector on the unit. The user can 

use this signal for monitoring the reflected power, or determining the influence of reflected 

power on his device under test. 

Contact OZ Optics for details. 


Digital Variable Reflector: 

DR-100-X-W-a/b-F-LB 

XY = Connector Code : 

3S= Super NTT-FC/PC 

3U= Ultra NTT-FC/PC receptacle 


SC=SC 

SCA=Angled SC 

8= AT&T-ST 


980, 1310, 1480,1550 and 1625 

a/b = Fiber core/cladding size, in microns. 

LB = Backreflection range: 

40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or 

PM fibers 

60dB backreflection is available 

for 1310nm and 1550nm 

singlemode only with FC/APC 

connectors 



M=Multimode 

S=Singlemode 

P= Polarization maintaining (PM) fiber 


A customer would like to emulate the anticipated backreflection from different types of devices by using a variable reflector. If his system is 

operating at a wavelength of 980 nm and he is using an SCA connector, then he could order the following part to perform the required testing: 


N/A DR-100-SCA-980-6/125-S-40 Singlemode Digital Variable Reflector with 40dB dynamic range calibrated at 980nm with 

angled SC connector. 


Q: What is a variable reflector used for? 

A: A variable reflector is useful for emulating the reflectance that normally occurs from all optical interfaces within fiber optic systems. This 

allows a designer to test a prototype quickly and easily to determine if its operation will be adversely affected by unexpected backreflection. 

Q: Can it be used at wavelengths for which it is not calibrated? 

A: Sometimes. Since the wavelength response of the Digital Variable Reflector is fairly flat, it can be used at other wavelengths without 

noticeable degradation, if the wavelength is within a few tens of nanometers of the calibrated values. If the wavelength is significantly 

different than the calibrated value, then the insertion losses will increase and the overall backreflection will deviate somewhat from the 

displayed value. 

Q: How do I get the unit calibrated? 

A: OZ Optics recommends that the unit be returned to the factory annually for calibration. 

Q: Why is the power rating for a multimode unit different than that of a singlemode unit? 

A: Singlemode units use a beam blocking technique that can handle significant power levels. Multimode units use a variable neutral density 

filter. The power handling of the multimode unit is limited by the power handling capabilities of the filter. 

Q: Why do singlemode devices use a different technique than multimode units? 

A: With singlemode units, the beam blocking technique is simple, repeatable, and cost effective. With multimode units, the fiber can support 

many different modes. These mode patterns tend to be susceptible to any changes in the fiber due to applied stresses or temperature 

variations. The beam blocking technique does not work well in such situations because it will not block all possible modes equally. Hence, a 

variable filter is used instead. 


If a coherent light source is used in an application where a variable reflector will also be used, then the user may observe the effects of 

constructive or destructive interference as the reflected light returns to the source. This may cause instabilities in the source or measurements 

that might or might not be a problem in a "real" application. There are a couple of ways of getting around this problem: 

1. If possible, replace the source with a non-coherent source. LED sources are relatively non-coherent and may be used 

successfully in some situations, although their power output is generally less than that of a laser. 

2. By inserting a spool of fiber between the system under test and the variable reflector, the coherence of the light will be 

greatly diminished. 

3. Use a source with a built-in isolator to block any reflections before they reach the source. 

4


DUAL WAVELENGTH LED SOURCE 

Features: 

• Rugged, compact, lightweight, dual wavelength LED source 

• 850, 1300, and 1550 nm wavelengths available 

• Long term stability 

• Low temperature dependence 

• Selectable internal modulation for CW, 270 Hz, 1 kHz, or 2 kHz 

• Auto power-down mode 

• Push-and-hold power keys to prevent accidental activation 

• Low battery indicator 

• Long battery life 

• May be operated from AC power mains with optional adaptor 

• Dust caps attached to the case 

• Low cost 

Applications: 

• Installing and maintaining fiber optic networks 

• Testing multimode fiber cables 

• Testing passive optical components 

• Verifying patchcord specifications 

• Measuring insertion loss 

• Calibrating optical receivers 

• Laboratory research 

Dual LED Source 


The OZ Optics Dual Wavelength LED Source consists of two sources in a single, lightweight package, and is ideal for multimode fiber testing. 

Either one of the two outputs can be activated from the front panel. The user interface is controlled by a microprocessor and the optical outputs 

are thermally stabilized. 

Indicator LEDs and simple keys on the front panel provide easy operation. Two LEDs indicate the wavelength. Three LEDs indicate the modulation 

frequency: 270 Hz, 1kHz, or 2 kHz. When all of these three LEDs are off, the output is continuous. The front panel keys are used to select on, 

off, modulation, and wavelength. 

Figure 1: Stability Of Dual LED Source At 850 nm 



1. A customer in the USA needs an 850 and 1300 nm dual wavelength LED source, with FC/PC receptacles. He also wants an AC power supply 

adaptor. 


11441 DLEDS-850/3-1300/3 Dual LED Source with 850 and 1300 nm wavelengths, receptacles for Standard 

Flat, Super and Ultra NTT-FC/PC. 

11147 AC-5VDC-NA 5 VDC power supply adaptor, for North America. 

2. A customer in Europe needs a 1300 and 1550 nm dual wavelength LED source, with an SC receptacle. He also wants an AC power supply 

adaptor. 


13572 DLEDS-1300/SC-1550/SC Dual LED Source with 1300 and 1550 nm wavelengths, SC receptacles. 

12388 AC-5VDC-EU 5 VDC power supply adaptor, for Europe. 








1. What are the wavelengths required for the LED sources? 

2. What is required maximum output power of each LED source? 

3. What type of receptacles are required for each LED source? 

Dual LED Source DLEDS-W 1 /X 1 -W 2 /X 2 

W 1 ,W 2 = LED source wavelength in nm(W 1 < W 2 ): 

850 = 850nm 

1300 = 1300nm 

1550 = 1550nm 

X 1 ,X 2 = Connector receptacle: 

3 = Flat, Super or Ultra NTT-FC/PC 

8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 

1.25U = Universal receptacle for 

1.25 mm diameter ferrule 

connectors (MU, LC, etc.) 


2.5 mm diameter ferrule connectors 

(FC, ST, SC, etc.) 

Contact OZ Optics Limited for custom 

requirements. 


A customer in North America needs an 850/1300 nm dual wavelength LED source, with an ST receptacle on the 850nm source, and an FC 

connector on the 1300nm source. He also wants an AC adaptor. 


N/A DLEDS-850/8-1300/3 Dual LED Source with an 850nm LED, ST receptacle, and a 1300nm source with a receptacle for 

Standard, Super, and Ultra NTT-FC/PC connectors. 

11147 AC-5VDC-NA 5 VDC power supply and adaptor for North America. 

3


ELECTRICALLY CONTROLLED VARIABLE FIBER OPTIC ATTENUATOR 

Features 

• Stepper motor driven 




• Low PDL and wavelength dependency 

• Low insertion loss and backreflection 



• Can be calibrated for up to five wavelengths 


• Flat wavelength response 

• Blocking attenuation technique for singlemode and polarization maintaining 

fibers, neutral density filter for multimode fiber applications 

• Computer interface (-MC Version) 

• Polarization maintaining fiber versions are available. 

• Latching operation 

• Custom designs available 

• Low Cost 

Applications 

• Active gain equalization in DWDM Systems 

• Local power monitoring and feedback attenuator settings 

• Bit error testing 

• Trouble shooting receivers and other active fiber optic components 

• Simulating long distance fiber transmission 


• Power meter linearity checks 

• Power setting and power control 


OZ Optics offers a complete line of low cost, compact PC board mountable motor driven 

variable attenuators with low backreflection. These attenuators offer excellent speed, 

repeatability, and accuracy. Singlemode and polarization maintaining (PM) attenuators 

utilize a novel blocking style attenuation technique, while multimode attenuators use a 

variable neutral density filter to minimize mode dependent losses. Both types feature a 

homing sensor to calibrate the attenuator, removing the need to use external taps, and a 

jam-proof tuning mechanism. 

In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber 

structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However 

OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some 

alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If 

necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. 

Motor Driven Variable Attenuator 

OEM Motorized Attenuator 

Loopback Style Motorized Attenuator 

The PC version uses a reliable stepper motor that can be controlled by an external driver. The basic model provides the user direct access to the 

stepper motor, as well as a logic level output for HOME position information. The -DR option adds a high speed driver circuit that accepts four logic 

level inputs to control the stepper motor. Finally, the -MC option features an embedded microcontroller with a programmed calibration curve. The 

units are addressable and support RS232, SPI, or I²C communication protocols. At this time, electronically controlled miniature loopback models are 

available only in PC versions. 

The MC version attenuators are calibrated at the wavelength specified in the part number. If required, the attenuators can be calibrated for multiple 

wavelengths. Just specify them in the part number. 

The standard models utilize a stepped motor with a 485:1 antibacklash gear train. Other gear ratios are available to increase either the speed or 

resolution of the device. Keep in mind that choosing lower gear ratios to improve the speed will reduce the resolution of the device. 

OZ Optics can also customize the design to fit your needs. We have smaller and faster versions if lower resolution is acceptable. Please read 

our application notes on our website. Contact OZ Optics for detailed specifications. 







quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 


1. What is your application? 

2. What is your operating wavelength? 


4. What fiber type do you need? What length? 

5. What connectors, if any, are you using? 

6. Do you have size constraints? 

7. Do you require an inline or loopback version? 

8. Do you have specific speed or resolution requirements? Compared to a standard unit with a 485:1 gear ratio, either of characteristics 

can be improved at the expense of the other. 

9. What voltage would you like to use to operate the motor? Most users choose 6 volts. 

10. Do you want to design and build your own motor control circuitry, or do you want it built into the unit? 

11. What optical power level will be used with the attenuator? 

12. Will the fiber be subjected to handling once installed, or will it be undisturbed? A 3mm jacket is more rugged than a 900um jacket, but 

it takes up more space and is less flexible. 

Description 

Part Number 

Electrically Controlled Variable Fiber 

Optic Attenuator DD-N-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-G-V(-CI) 1 (-LL) 2 

N = 100 for inline style 

600 for standard size loopback style 

650 for miniature size loopback style 


(Example: 1550 for 1550nm) 



See Tables 1 to 5 of the OZ Standard Tables 

datasheet for other standard fiber sizes 

F = Fiber type: M = Multimode 



LB = Backreflection level: 40,50 or 60dB for SM 

& PM only. 60dB is available for 1300nm and 

1550nm wavelengths only. 35dB for multimode 

applications is standard. 

X,Y = Connector Code: 




8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


See Table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables 

datasheet for other connectors 

CI = Control Circuit 

PC for an OEM assembly without 

interface port 

DR for built in stepper motor drive 

electronics 

MC/SP” for intelligent SPI interface 

MC/IIC for intelligent I 2 C interface 

MC/RS232 for intelligent RS-232 

interface 

V = Motor supply voltage: 5,6 or 12 Volt 

G = Gear ratio: 485:1 for normal speed, 

76:1 for fast speed. Other gear ratios are 

141:1, 262:1, 900:1 

L = Fiber length, in meters, on each side of 

the device Example: To order 1 meter of 

fiber at the input and 7 meters at the output, 

replace L with 1,7 

JD = Fiber jacket type: 



See Table 7 of the OZ Standard Tables for 

other jacket sizes 

Note 1 Unless specified, the unit will be built as a basic version which provides a TTL compatible home signal. 

The DD-600 and DD-650 use the blocking style attenuation technique and are recommended only for singlemode or polarization 

maintaining applications. 

Note 2 Add LL to the part number for 0.6dB typical insertion losses for 60dB return loss, < 1dB for the rest of the attenuators. 

5


ELECTRICALLY DRIVEN POLARIZATION CONTROLLER-SCRAMBLER 

Features: 

• Negligible insertion losses 

• Negligible return losses 

• Negligible Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL) 

• >100Hz response speed 

• Continuous polarization control capability 

• Low voltage 

Applications: 

• Polarization scrambling 

• Polarization stabilization 

• Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) mitigation 

• Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) mitigation 

• PDL and PMD Measurement Systems 

• Interferometers and Sensors 

Electically Driven 

Polarization Controller-Scrambler 


OZ Optics' Electrically Driven Polarization Controller (EPC) provides 

a simple, efficient means to manipulate the state of polarization 

within a singlemode fiber. Employing a novel mechanical fiber 

squeezing technique, the device is controlled by either three or 

four (depending on the model) input voltages that one varies over 

a ±5 volt range to provide endless polarization control in a robust, 

easy to operate package. The controller's rapid response speed 

easily handles changes in polarization caused by the external 

environment, and is highly suitable for polarization scrambling for 

either averaging PDL effects, or for making PMD or PDL 

measurements. Because the fiber within the device is continuous, 

all insertion losses, return losses, and PDL effects are limited only 

by the fiber itself. This makes it ideal for precise test and 

measurement applications. 

The polarization controller is available in either a three or four 

channel configuration. The three channel system is ideal for 

polarization scrambling applications such as for polarization 

averaging or PDL measurements. The added redundancy of the 

four channel version opens the way to continuous polarization 

control, without having to occasionally reset the device when a 

controller reaches its limit. 

The unique design of the OZ Optics Polarization Controller means 

that it does not require any dedicated driver circuitry. There are no 

internal voltage multipliers or high voltage signals to worry about. 

Thus operation is safe and simple. 

Note: All units are in inches. 

Figure 1: EPC Drawing 


1

Ordering Example For Standard Parts: 

A customer is building a polarization scrambler circuit for PDL testing at 1550 nm. He will use a three stage system with standard 

singlemode fiber, and FC connectors. 


13615 EPC-300-11-1300/1550-9/125-S-3U3U-1-1 

Three Channel Polarization Scrambler using standard Corning SMF-28 singlemode 

fiber. The input and output fibers are one meter long, with 900 micron diameter loose 

tube jacketing, terminated with Ultra FC/PC connectors. 


OZ Optics provides custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do 

take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need 

additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring 

engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a one piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in 

your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 

DESCRIPTION 

Controller and Scrambling Unit 

PART NUMBER 

EPC-A-11-W-a/b-S-XY-JD-L-(C) 

A = 300 for 3 stage scrambler 

400 for 4 stage controller 


Example: 1300/1550 for standard 

telecom wavelength range 


9/125 for Corning SMF-28 

Singlemode fiber. See standard tables 

for other standard fiber sizes 

XY = Connector code: 

X = No Connector 




8 = AT&T-ST 


1=900 micron OD hytrel jacket 

SC = SC 

SCU = Ultra SC 


LC = LC/PC 

See standard tables for other connectors 

(C) = Electrical interface connector 

Leave blank for DB-9 

PH = 5-pin header 

BNC = Female BNC 

L = Fiber Length in meters, on each side of the 

device. If they are different lengths, specify 

the input and output lengths separated by a 

comma. Example: To order 1 meter of the 

fiber at the input and 7 meters at the output, 

replace L with 1,7. 


1. Are you performing polarization scrambling or polarization 

controlling? 


3. What type and size of fiber do you want? 

4. What type of connectors do you need? 


6. What is the fiber jacket OD? 

7. What type of electrical interface do you need? 


A customer wants a 4-channel polarization controller for 1310 nm wavelength. He wants singlemode fibers, 1 meter long, 900 micron 

hytrel jacketing with FC/APC connectors and a 5-pin header electrical interface. He also wants an EPC driver with built-in RS232 for 

remote control. He needs to order the following part numbers: 


n/a 

EPC-400-11-1300/1550-9/125-S-3A3A-1-1-PH5 

Four Channel Polarization Controllers with Corning SMF-28 singlemode fiber. Input and 

output are 1 m long with 900 micron OD jacket terminated with angled FC connectors. 

16361 EPC-DRIVER-04-RS/232 

4 Channel EPC Driver/Controller Box featuring a dual mode operation: controller mode 

and scrambler mode. DC voltage ranging from -5 to +5V, frequency settable from 1 to 

100 Hz and maximum current of 100 mA per channel. Built-in RS-232 provided. 

3


PRELIMINARY 

DATA SHEET 

ENVIRONMENTAL OPTICAL TEST SYSTEM 

Features: 

• Long period testing capability for optical passive component reliability 

• Multiple wavelength configurations 

• Multiple channel configurations 

• Optional swept wavelength capability 

• Flexible and simple user interface 

• Statistical measurement analysis 

• Custom configuration designs available 

• Optional Optical Return Loss (ORL) capability 

• Optional Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) measurement capability 

• Low cost 

Environmental Optical Test System 

Applications: 

• DWDM channel testing 

• Long term reliability testing on optical passive components 

• Characterization of insertion loss versus wavelength dependence 

• Optical return loss measurement 

• Characterization of PDL dependence versus wavelength 

• Product qualification as per Telcordia 

• Quality Control 


OZ Optics has developed an environmental multi channel optical test system allowing fast, low cost, simple and flexible long-term reliability 

testing. The system integrates an optimized optoelectronic design (including sources, optical switches and photo-detectors) and robust 

system management software. This system allows optical manufacturers to perform automated and flexible long-term testing for compliance 

with industry standards such as Telcordia generic requirements (GR-326-CORE, GR-1209-CORE and GR-1221-CORE). The meter offers 

the capability of characterizing very low insertion loss (IL) drift. It also offers the optional capability of measuring return loss and polarization 

dependent loss variations. Measurement capability using tunable sources can also be offered. 

The system can be run through any computer operating Windows TM . The management software has a built in database for data 

processing and statistical analysis of multiple sets of measurements. Collected data can be graphically displayed for easy interpretation. 

Remote configuration and operation of the unit is possible with the unit via a parallel printer port, a standard serial communication port 

(RS232) or General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB). 

Ordering Information for Standard Parts: 


13598 EOTS-100-24-3U3U-1310-1550-9/125-S 24 channels, 1310 and 1550 nm dual source Environmental Optical 

Test System with Ultra FC/PC connector in both input and output ports 

13599 EOTS-100-12-3U3U-1310-1550-9/125-S 12 channels, 1310 and 1550 nm dual source Environmental Optical 

Test System with Ultra FC/PC connector in both input and output ports 

2736 Power Cord - UK Power Cord for the United Kingdom 

2737 Power Cord Europe European Power Cord 

Windows is a trade mark of Microsoft Corporation 


EOTS-100-AA-XY-W 1 -W 2 -9/125-S-(OPT) 

AA: Number of channels: 8, 12, 16, 24, 32 or 64 

X,Y: Input & Output Receptacle Code: 

3S = Super NTT-FC/PC connector 

3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC connector 


SC=SC 

SCA=Angled SC 

MU= MU type connector 

LC= LC type connector. 

OPT: -BR for optional measurement capability 

(for 60dB ORL measurements, the connectors have to be 

angled FC/PC) 

-BR/PDL for optional ORL and PDL capability 

-PDL for Optional PDL capability 

Add -T for tunable wavelength source option 

W1,W2: Built in sources: 1310, 1550, 1625. 

Specify 0000 for external sources 


A European optical passive component R&D facility wants to perform IL and PDL long-term reliability testing of Fiber Bragg 

Gratings across the C-band. Assuming they have their own programmable environmental chamber and a computer, they need 

to order these following parts: 


NA EOTS-100-24-3U3U-0000-1550-9/125-S-PDL 24 channels, Environmental Optical Test System with Ultra FC/PC 

connector in both input and output ports, with an external 

wavelength selectable source across the C-band, a built-in 1550nm 

source and PDL measurement capability 

2737 POWER CORD - Europe European power cord 

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) 

Q: How many channels can be ordered in a single unit? 

A: 8,12,16,24, 32 or 64. 

Q: Can I order a custom system? 

A: Yes, the design is customer oriented in both software and hardware. 

Q: Can I use the system without an external computer? 

A: No, an external computer with a suitable Windows operating system is required to operate with the unit 

Q: Can we export saved data to another computer for data analysis? 

A: Yes, the data can be saved in text format so that it can be easily imported to a standard spreadsheet or statistical software. 

Q: Can I test a 1 by 4 device using a 24 channel system without cycling through all ports? 

A: Yes, a flexible user interface allows the system to be configured for a variety of operating conditions. 

Q: Can I use the test system with polarization maintaining or multimode fibers? 

A: Yes the system can be used with polarization maintaining fibers although it will not maintain polarization itself, but not for multimode fiber 

because the inputs have singlemode fibers 

Q: Can I use my own source for testing? 

A: The standard system is provided with built-in sources. Ask OZ about custom configurations. 

Q: Can I monitor other parameters, such as external voltages, temperature, humidity, etc.? 

A: No, these parameters are external to our system. However, if the environmental chamber can provide such parameters, the 

application software can be configured to monitor those parameters during the test. 

3


ERBIUM-DOPED FIBER AMPLIFIER (EDFA) 

Features: 

• Up to 28 dBm (700 mW) output power 

• C-band, L-band and C+L-band models 

• Near quantum-limited noise figure preamplifiers 

• Wide selection of different type of amplifiers 

• Optional RS232 or USB interface 


• Multi-Output Option-up to 4 ports 


Preliminary 

Applications: 

• Analog and digital CATV optical transmission networks 

• Long-Haul transmission 

• Access Networks 

• Instrumentation 

• Research and Development 

Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier 


Erbium-doped Fiber Amplifiers (EDFA) are devices which provide 

amplification to low-level optical signals. The Rack Mount EDFA 

series of high performance, low noise and high output power 

amplifiers provide the perfect opportunity to build a flexible CATV 

network system. These units include a wide selection of Boosters, 

Pre-amplifiers, In-Line, Mid-Stage access and Gain-Flattened 

amplifiers. These EDFAs are available in both single channel and 

DWDM configurations. 

Amplifiers are available to cover the C-band, L-band, or both the C 

& L bands together. A range of output powers are available. EDFAs 

are available with either a flattened spectral output for stringent 

applications, or a non-flattened response for less demanding or 

cost-sensitive applications. The user can control the optical gain to 

suit the application. 

Fiber amplifiers are connected to the system through input and 

output female connector receptacles. A variety of standard 

connector types are offered. Custom connectors can also be 

accommodated. A built-in microprocessor can be included for 

applications that require the amplifier to operate under computer 

control. Either RS-232 or USB interfaces are offered. 


1

Ordering Information For Standard Parts 


TBD 

TBD 

Typical Specifications For C-band Amplifiers 

1 P in = -4 dBm for Booster, Pre-amplifier and In-Line amplifiers at 1550 nm. P in determined per customer request at 1550 nm for Mid-access and Gain 

Flattened amplifiers 

2 P in = -4 dBm for Booster, P in = -20 dBm for Pre-amplifier and In-Line amplifiers at 1550 nm. P in determined per customer request at 1550 nm for Mid-access 

and Gain Flattened amplifiers 

3 P in = -20 dBm for Booster, P in = -30dBm for Pre-amplifier and In-Line amplifiers at 1550 nm. P in determined per customer request at 1550 nm for Mid-access 

and Gain Flattened amplifiers 

4 Non-condensing 

OFA-1-B-12-1525/1570-1-N-3A-B-X 

OFA-1-B-28-1525/1570-1-N-3A-B-X 

Basic single output Optical Fiber Amplifier providing up to 12 dBm output power for the C band 

(1525 - 1570 nm), in a bench top unit with angled FC/PC receptacles. The spectral response is 

not flattened. Universal power supply with North American power cord included. Other types of 

power cords available separately. 

Basic single output Optical Fiber Amplifier providing up to 28 dBm output power for the C band 

(1525 - 1570 nm), in a bench top unit with FC receptacles. The spectral response is not flattened. 

Universal power supply with North American power cord included. Other types of power cords 

available separately. 

2737 POWER CORD - EUROPE Power cord for European 4mm round pin plug to IEC connection. 

2736 POWER CORD - UK Power cord for UK plug to IEC connection. 

Parameters Unit Booster amplifier Pre-amplifier In-Line amplifier 

Mid-access 

amplifier 

Gain-Flattened 

amplifier 

Saturated output power 1 dBm 14-28 14-17 14-20 14-24 12-24 

Operating wavelength range 

nm 

1525–1565 1525-1565 

1540-1565 

1525-1565 

1540-1565 

1528-1565 

1540-1565 

1528-1563 

1542-1561 

Noise figure 2 dB

Typical Specifications For C+L-band amplifiers 

Parameters Unit Booster amplifier In-Line amplifier 

Saturated output power 1 dBm 20 14 

Operating wavelength range nm 1525-1560 & 1570–1610 1525-1560 & 1570–1610 

Noise figure 2 dB

Questionnaire 

1. What gain do you require? 

2. How flat do you require the spectrum of the amplifier to be? 

3. Do you require that the amplifier be remotely controllable? If yes, what sort of interface do you prefer? 

4. What sort of amplifier do you need (booster, pre-amplifier, In-line amplifier or Mid-Span amplifier)? 


6. What style of fiber connectors do you use? 

7. Do you need more than one output? 

8. What sort of enclosure do you prefer? 

Description 

Optical Fiber Amplifier 

Part Number 

OFA-N-C-P-W-S-F-X-O-I 

N 

C 

P 

W 


Specify 1, 2 or 4. The input signal will 

be amplified and split amongst the 

output ports. 

Configuration: 

B = Booster 

P = Preamplifier 

L = In-line 

M = Mid-span 

Maximum Output Power in dBm: 

Specify a value between 12 and 28 , 

corresponding to 12 and 28 dBm 

respectively 

Wavelength range: 

1525/1570 = 1525 to 1570 nm 

1540/1560 = 1540 to 1560 nm 

1570/1605 = 1570 to 1605 nm 

1525/1605 = 1525 to 1560 and 1570 

to 1605 nm 

(Custom wavelength ranges are 

available. Contact OZ Optics with your 

specific requirements) 

I 

O 

X 

F 


R = RS232 

U = USB 



Options: 

A = Automatic gain control with 

microprocessor 


M = Microprocessor controlled. 




8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


LC = LC 

MU = MU 

Flatness: 


F = Flattened 

S 

Packaging style: 

1 = Bench top 





driver 

9 = Custom 

4


FARADAY ROTATORS AND MIRRORS – PIGTAIL STYLE 

Features 

• Singlemode,multimode and polarization maintaining 

versions available 

• Wide range of center wavelengths 

• Low loss 

• Low back reflection 

• Compact housing 

Applications 


• Interferometers sensors 

• Amplifiers 

• Circulators 


Faraday rotators change the polarization state of light traveling 

through it. The output polarization state is rotated by 45 degrees 

with respect to the input polarization. 

When combined with a mirror, the reflected light is rotated by 

another 45 degrees, resulting in a 90 degree rotation. In addition, 

the polarization handedness is reversed by the mirror. This results 

in a reflected polarization that is orthogonal to the original 

polarization. This is useful when used in interferometers, because 

polarization changes through the fiber are cancelled out on the 

return journey. 

Miniature Faraday Rotator Package 

For 1300-1550 nm 

Faraday Mirror Package for 1300-1550 nm 

1.93 [49] 

1.38 [35] 

0.91 [23] 

Faraday Rotator Package For 1300-1550 nm 

Ø 0.12 [3.1] 

Ø 0.19 [4.75] 

Ø 0.22 [5.5] 

Units are in inches [mm] 

Figure 1: Miniature Faraday Rotator Dimensions 


1.521 [38.6] 

0.787 [20] 

Ø0.216 [5.5] 


Figure 2: Miniature Faraday Mirror Dimensions 


DTS0013 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 19-Feb-05 

1

Standard Product Specifications (Faraday Rotator-Mirror Standard Parts) 

Parameter Condition Units Value 

Center Wavelength nm 633-850 980-1064 1310-1550 1310-1550 Faraday Mirror 

Insertion Loss 1 Maximum dB 1.0 1.0 0.8 0.75 

Typical dB 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.5 

Low Loss (- 60 Loss) dB N/A N/A 0.6 0.5 

Return Loss 1 dB 40 40 40, 60 40, 60 2 

Polarization 

Extinction Ratio 3 dB 20 20 20, 25, 30 20 

Rotation Angle At center wavelength degrees 45 

Rotation Tolerance At center wavelength,25°C degrees ±3 ±3 ±3 ±3 (±1) 

1 

2 

3 

Does not include insertion losses, return losses from connectors. 

For Faraday mirrors, return losses refers to reflections from points other than the mirror itself. 

When using polarization maintaining fibers. 

Wavelength[nm] 

Wavelength[nm] 

2

Ordering Example For Standard Parts 

A researcher is building a fiber interferometer wants a Faraday mirror for 1550 nm. She is using standard singlemode fiber with 3 mm 

cabling. To minimize losses and unwanted reflections, she requires the lowest loss units available. She will fusion splice the unit in her 

system so no connectors are required. 


23234 FOFM-11P-1550-8/125-P-60-XX-3-1 

Description 

Pigtail Style 

Faraday Rotator : 

Body sizes: 1 for standard size 

2 for miniature size (1300-1550 nm) 

Faraday Mirror for 1550 nm with 60dB return loss, and with a one meter long 3 mm OD kevlar 

reinforced PVC cabled 1550 nm 8/125 polarization maintaining fiber pigtail with no connector. 




particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases 

non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in 

your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 

Questionnaire 

1. Are you looking for a rotator or a Faraday mirror? 

2. What is the operating wavelength? 

3. Do you need single mode or polarization maintaining fiber? 

4. What is the minimum acceptable return loss? 

5. What is the maximum acceptable insertion loss? 

6. Do you need connectors on the fibers? If yes, what type? 

7. What type of fiber cabling do you prefer? 


Part Number 

FOR-11P-W-a/b-I-O-LB-XY-JD-L 




9/125 for 1300/1550 nm SMF 

See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables data 

sheet for other standard fiber sizes. 

Input Fiber: 

M = Multimode 



Output Fiber: M = Multimode 



Backreflection Level: 25, 40, 50, or 60dB 

60dB is available for 1300 nm and 1550 nm 

wavelengths only. Special charges apply for 

other wavelengths. 

Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the 

device. Example: to order 1 meter of fiber at 

the input and 7 meters at the output, replace L 

with 1,7. 

Fiber Jacket Type: 

1 = 900 Micron OD hytrel jacket 



for other jacket sizes. 




8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 



for other connectors. 

Pigtail Style 

Faraday Mirror: 

FOFM-11P-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L 



Fiber length in meters 


9/125 for 1300/1550 nm SMF 



Input Fiber: 

M = Multimode 



Backreflection Level: 25, 40, 50, or 60dB 

60dB is available for 1300 nm and 1550 nm 

wavelengths only. Special charges apply for 

other wavelengths. 









8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 



for other connectors. 

4


Features 


• Miniature packages 



• Low cross talk 

• Center wavelengths 1310,1480,1550 nm 

• Low return loss 


• High isolation 

• Singlemode and polarization maintaining fiber versions 

available 

Applications 

• DWDM networks 

• Chromatic dispersion compensation 

• Optical add drop modules (OADM) 

• Fiber amplifiers 

• Fiber sensors 


Fiber optic circulators act as signal routers, transmitting light from 

an input fiber to an output fiber, but directing light that returns 

along that output fiber to a third port. They perform a similar 

function as an isolator, protecting the input fiber from return 

power, but also allowing the rejected light to be employed. 

OZ Optics’ fiber optic circulators are manufactured with polarization 

maintaining fibers making them ideal for polarization maintaining 

applications such as 40 Gbit systems or Raman pump applications. 

They are also used in double pass amplifiers and in chromatic 

dispersion compensation modules. 

The standard fiber alignment is for all power to be transmitted 

along the slow axis of each fiber. With OZ Optics’ modular 

design and custom manufacturing capabilities, any of the three 

ports can be aligned for fast axis coupling. High extinction ratio 

connectors can also be installed. Regardless of the state of 

FIBER OPTIC CIRCULATORS 

Standard Polarization Maintaining Circulator 

In-line Fiber Optic Circulator 

polarization of the return beam, the input fiber will still be 

isolated from reflected light. 

OZ Optics now offers miniature devices for OEM applications. 

Polarization independent circulators using singlemode fibers are 

also now available. Additional connector and cable options and 

custom designs are also available. Please forward a detailed 

description of your application requirements to the OZ Optics 

Sales Department. 

Figure 1: Standard Circulator Dimensions 

DTS0070 

18-Oct-04


OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed 

products to meet your application needs. As with most 

manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort, so 

please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our 

standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to 

prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer 

than normal. In most cases, non-recurring engineering (NRE) 

charges, lot charges, and minimum order quantities will be 

necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your 

quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as posssible. 

We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 

Questionnaire For Custom Parts 

1. What is your operating wavelength, in nm? 

2. Do you prefer a standard or inline style package? 

3. Are you using singlemode or polarization maintaining fiber? 

4. What are the minimum return loss requirements? 

5. How long should the fibers be and what fiber type? 

6. Do you require connectors? If so, what type? 

7. How much power will be transmitted through the fiber? 

Description 

Fiber Optic Circulator 

Part Number 

FOC-12P-11-a/b-PPP-W-LB-XYZ-JD- L 

Circulator Type: 

P for standard style 

N for miniature inline style 

Fiber Core/Cladding Sizes, in microns 

7/125 for 1300 nm polarization maintaining fiber 

8/125 for 1550 nm polarization maintaining fiber 

9/125 for 1300/1550 nm singlemode fiber 

See Tables 1 and 2 of the Standard Tables for 


Fiber Length in meters 


0.25 = 250 Micron OD acrylate jacket 



See Table 7 of the Standard Tables for 


Fiber Type: 

S for singlemode 

P for polarization maintaining 



Backreflection Level: 40, 50 or 60dB 

Connector Code: 

3 = NTT - FC/PC 




8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


See Table 6 of the Standard 

Tables for other connectors. 


A customer is building a fiber laser, and is using a circulator to direct the input light and amplified return signal. The operating wavelength 

is 1550 nm, and uses polarization maintaining fiber. He wants a reconfigurable system, so he wants angled FC connectors on the fiber 

ends. He also wants 3 mm cable on the fibers as he wants rugged units that can withstand repeated handling. One meter long fibers 

are sufficient. 


XXXXX 

FOC-12P-111-8/125-PPP-1550-60-3A3A3A-3-1 


Polarization maintaining fiber optic circulator for 1550 nm with 60dB return loss, with 

1 meter long, 3 mm OD cabled 8/125 PM fiber pigtails, with FC/APC connectors on 

all ends. 

Q. Can I use a polarization maintaining circulator with 

singlemode fiber? 

A. Not without seeing high insertion losses. The transmission 

through polarization maintaining circulators is highly 

polarization dependent. Only the return output port can be 

made using singlemode fiber without affecting performance. 

One alternative is to use an all-fiber polarization controller 

on the inputs to control the polarization through the unit. 

Otherwise, we recommend the miniature units. 

Q. Why do I get high losses? 

A. Check to see that you are launching light through the proper 

polarization axis of the proper fiber port. 

Q. Can I get a higher isolation or extinction ratio? 

A. OZ Optics can supply circulators with 25dB and 30dB 

extinction ratios and can make design modifications for 

higher isolation values. Please forward you system 

requirements for a proposal. 

Q. What happens to light polarized along the wrong axis? 

A. Fast axis light in port T is absorbed internally, as is fast axis 

light returning into the circulator. 

3


FIBER OPTIC MEDIA CONVERTERS 

Features 

• Cost effective copper to fiber conversion 

• Complies with IEEE 802.3 and IEEE 802.3u 

• Extends network span up to 2 km for LED sources and 40 Km 

for laser sources 

• Diagnostic LEDs for troubleshooting and maintenance 

• Auto MDI/MDI-X on UTP port 

• 10/100 Mbps auto-negotiation 

• Far-end fault detection and link fault pass-through 

• Multiple power options, including AC/DC adaptor, USB power, 

or 5VDC 

• Rack mount chassis available for most versions 

• Plug and play for most versions 

Applications 

PRELIMINARY 

DATA SHEET 

• Short haul communications 

• High-speed data transfer 

• Transmitting data through electrically noisy environments 

• Secure optical links 

• Network testing 

Fiber Optic Media Converter 


The OZ family of media converters enables the transformation from copper UTP media to fiber media. The auto-negotiation feature of 

these units allows these plug-and-play devices to be connected to either 10 or 100 Mbps fast Ethernet on the electrical side 

(10/100Base-TX), and 100 Mbps fiber (100Base-FX) on the optical side. LEDs display the status of the unit to simplify diagnostics and 

maintenance. 

The units can be powered by a variety of means, including AC/DC adaptor, USB port, or 5VDC input. Data transfer is achieved by a 

combination of switching and store-and-forward techniques. Fault pass-through capability is incorporated into every unit. 

Each unit may be used as a stand-alone device, or mounted into a chassis for applications requiring multiple data links. 

DTS0101 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 29-Oct-04 

1

Questionnaire 

1. How long is the optical fiber for the data link? 

2. What type of fiber do you intend to use (core and cladding sizes)? 

3. What type of optical connector do you require? 

Ordering Information for Parts 

Description 

Media Converter 

Part Number 

MC-T-F-RJ45-X (-W) 

T Type: 

100 = Rack mountable, 1300 nm LED source 

110 = Single port 1300 nm LED source 

120 = Rack mountable, 1310 or 1550 nm laser 

W (option for T=120 only) 

-A = TX:1310 nm; RX:1550 nm 

-B = TX:1550 nm; RX:1310 nm 

F Fiber type: 

Description 

M = Multimode 


Media Converter Chassis 

Part Number 

MCC - Y 

X Optical connector: 

VF45 = VF-45 TM 

SC = Duplex SC for T=100 or 110, 

Single SC for T=120 

LC = Duplex LC 

ST = Duplex ST 

Y 

Number of channels 

Y = 

10 for 10-slot chassis 

16 for 16 slot chassis 

VF-45 is a trademark of 3M 


Q: Can I use the units with either singlemode or multimode fiber? 

A: Since most of the units use LEDs, it is difficult to couple a useful amount of light into singlemode fibers, which have a much smaller 

core than multimode fibers. The MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A/B, however, uses a laser diode as the light source, and can be used with 

either 9/125 micron singlemode fiber or 50/125 micron multimode fiber. 

Q: Why does the MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A/B have a much greater range than the other devices? 

A: The MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A/B uses a laser diode as the source. Laser diodes produce a more intense beam than the LEDs used in 

the other devices. In addition, a greater percentage of the laser light can be coupled into the fiber, compared to an LED source. These 

two factors combine to give a greater useable range for the device. 

Q: Does the same model of media converter need to be used at each end of the fiber? 

A: No. Since standard protocols are used, the media converters do not have to be identical. 

Q: I have a MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A connected to each end of my optical cable, but I cannot establish communications through the cable. 

What is the problem? 

A: If you have a MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A at one end of the cable, then you should be using a MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-B at the other end. The 

MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A transmits at 1310 and receives at 1550. Therefore the unit at the other end should transmit at 1550 and receive 

at 1310. 

4


FIBER PIGTAILED TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED LASER DIODE HOUSING 

FEATURES: 

• Highly stable power output 

• Highly stable wavelength 

• Good coupling efficiency 



• Singlemode, multimode, polarization maintaining fiber versions 

• Adjustable output power 

• Optional OEM laser diode and Peltier driver electronics 

• Receptacle and pigtail versions 

• Laser driver is externally TTL modulatable 

APPLICATIONS: 


• Wavelength and power stabilized laser diode sources 

• Long term stability measurements 


• Available Wavelengths: 

• Backreflection: 

• Connector Types: 

• Extinction Ratio: 

• Case Temperature Control 

Preset in the Factory: 

• Optical Coupling 

Efficiency: 

635 - 1625nm 

-25, -40, -50, and -60dB 

NTT-FC/PC, Super NTT-FC/PC, 

Ultra NTT-FC/PC, Angled SC, 

Angled NTT-FC/PC, SC, AT&T-ST, 

SMA905, SMA906 

20, 25, or 30dB for PM fiber 

From 15°C to 25°C to within ±0.1°C 

30% - 60% in SM fiber 

60% - 95% in MM fiber 

• Laser Diode Driver Electronics (OEM Version): 

CW: Currents up to 120mA can be sourced in constant 

optical power (CW) mode. 

TTL: Currents up to 250mA can be sourced at 

frequencies up to 20MHz. 

Higher power versions are available. Contact OZ Optics for 

further information. 

Figure 1 

• Peltier Driver Electronics (OEM Version): 

Matching requirements for the unit in Figure 1 is 3 Amp, 5 Volt. 

Higher power versions are available. Contact OZ Optics for further information. 


PRODUCT DESCRIPTION: 

The laser diode housing consists of an emitter (either a laser diode, LED, or SLED), a Peltier cooler, heatsink, and 

coupling optics into the fiber. The Peltier controller and laser diode driver electronics are external to the housing. A 

current source is required for the Peltier cooler. Upon request, OZ Optics can provide a complete OEM turnkey laser 

diode housing with a laser diode driver and Peltier cooler controller electronics. The control electronics for the Peltier 

include a temperature sensor on the laser diode side, and on the heat sink side. External control and modulation 

signals use pigtailed BNC connectors. 

A special version of the unit comes with a blocking screw to control the light output. This allows the user to control the 

ouput power from the source without adjusting the source current. This ensures that the output wavelength from the 

source is as stable as possible. 

The laser diode housing shown in Figure 1 is designed for diodes with less than 150mW of optical power. Oz Optics 

manufactures housings for diodes with more than 150mW of optical power. Contact OZ Optics for further information. 

OZ Optics can also design customer specified complete laser diode to fiber delivery systems, including optical 

coupling mechanisms, fibers, collimators/focusers, driver electronics, and software. Contact OZ Optics for further 

information. 


Receptacle Style Housing: 

HULD-TX-W-F-P-M 

Receptacle Code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 



5 = SMA905 & 906 

8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data 

sheet for other receptacle types 



Modulation Technique: 1 = CW operation only 

2 = TTL Modulation only 

3 = Both CW and TTL 

Optical Output Power, in mW, from the fiber 

Fiber type: M = Multimode 



Pigtail Style Housing: 

LDPC-T1-W-a/b-F-BL-X-JD-L-P-M 




9/125 for 1300/1550nm SMF 

See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables 





Backreflection level: 25, 40, 50, or 60dB. 

60dB version available for 1300nm and 

1550nm only 

Modulation Technique: 1 = CW operation only 

2 = TTL Modulation only 

3 = Both CW and TTL 

Optical Output Power, in mW, from the fiber 


Fiber jacket type: 1 = 900 OD Micron hytrel jacket 

3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced 

PVC cable 






5 = SMA905 

6 = SMA906 

8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 



for other connector types 

NOTES: Add “-DR” to the end of the part number to include Laser Diode Driver Electronics. 

Add “-PC” to the end of the part number to include Peltier Cooler Controller Electronics. 

Add “-PS” to the end of the part number to include a power supply. 

Add “-LD” to the end of the part number if the laser diode is to be supplied by OZ Optics. 

Add “-BL” to the end of the part number if a blocking screw is required. 

Contact OZ Optics for other versions.


FIBER TERMINATORS 

Features: 


• Compact size 

• High reliability 

• LOW COST! 

Applications: 

• Fiber optic telecommunications 


• CATV systems 

• Optical network equipment 

Fiber Terminators 


• Backreflection: > 50dB 

• Connector type: Ultra FC, SC, ST or LC 

• Wavelength range: 1300 nm to 1620 nm 

• Power handling: Up to 1W 

• Fiber type: Singlemode 9/125 

• Operating temperature: -20 ~ 75°C 

• Storage temperature: -40 ~ 85°C 

• Humidity: 95% RH 

Figure 1: SC Terminator 


Fiber Optic Terminators are recommended for any fiber optic system with unused ports. 

Non - terminated ports may create unwanted backreflections that can degrade overall 

system performance. These terminators can be easily installed into panel mount 

receptacles to significantly reduce reflections from the fiber face. Terminators are 

available for FC, SC, LC and ST style connectors with Ultra polish grade. 

Figure 2: FC Terminator 

Ordering Informations For Standard Parts: 


3324 TER-3U Fiber Terminator for FC/UPC connectors 

3325 TER-SCU Fiber Terminator for SC/UPC connectors 

13611 TER-LCU Fiber Terminator for LC/UPC connectors 

13612 TER-8U Fiber Terminator for ST/UPC connectors 

10.0mm 

29.4mm 

20.0mm10.0mm 

5.60mm 

Figure 3: LC Terminator 

20.0mm 

5.60mm 

DTS0029 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 21-Feb-05 1


FIBER TO PHOTODIODE COUPLERS 

OZ Optics provides packaging services of photodiodes at 

a low cost. Fiber to photodiode couplers are available for 

virtually any photodiode available, using either 

singlemode, multimode or polarization maintaining fiber. 

The coupler design is both rugged and flexible, allowing 

people to do their own alignment, if they desire. For OEM 

applications, miniature pigtail style fiber to photodiode 

couplers are available that do not use the tilt adjustment 

technique. These feature both a smaller size and lower 

cost. 

OZ Optics’ fiber to photodiode couplers come in three 

basic designs. The most common design consists of two 

baseplates, separated by a resilient O-ring. The 

photodiode is epoxied into one plate. The other plate 

contains the focusing optics and the connector for the input 

fiber. A focusing lens is used to focus the light from the 

fiber to a spot less than or equal to the size of the active 

area of the photodiode. Spot sizes of less than 10 microns 

in size can be achieved with this method, making it ideal 

for very high speed transmission rates. 

Utilizing Oz Optics patented tilt adjustment technique, the 

alignment between the photodiode and the coupling optics 

is adjusted until the maximum coupling efficiency is 

achieved. Typical coupling efficiency exceeds 80 percent 

for singlemode fibers, although this varies, depending on 

the fiber and photodiode characteristics. The tilt 

adjustment design is recommended for getting the best 

coupling efficiencies into very small surface area 

photodiodes. 

The second design does not have the tilt adjustment 

design built in. Instead, the fiber, lens and photodiode are 

glued into a single assembly. The third and final design 

uses no lens at all. The fiber is simply butted against the 

photodiode. Both of these designs are intended for OEM 

applications. 

For optimum coupling efficiency, stability, and minimum 

backreflection, we recommend using pigtail style fiber to 

photodiode couplers. These units have the fiber directly 

attached to the photodiode. A wide variety of fiber types 

are available from stock. They can be cabled with different 

cable sizes, and preterminated with different types of 

connectors. Metallized fibers and lenses, as well as 

soldering techniques, are available for photodiode 

couplers requiring hermetic sealing. 



Part Number 

FPD-0X-W-F 

PFPD-11-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L 

FPD-2X-W-F 


FPD-3X-W-F 


Description 

Lens style fiber to photodiode coupler with a receptacle and tilt adjustment design. 

Lens style fiber pigtailed photodiode coupler using the tilt adjustment design. 

Lens style miniature fiber to photodiode coupler with a receptacle, without tilt adjustment. 

Lens style miniature fiber pigtailed photodiode coupler without tilt adjustment. 

Miniature fiber to photodiode coupler with a receptacle, without tilt adjustment or lens. 

Miniature fiber pigtailed photodiode coupler without tilt adjustment or lens. 

When ordering, please fax us your photodiode and fiber specifications. 

Add “PD” to the end of the part number if the photodiode is to be provided with the coupler by OZ Optics. 

Add “PO” to the end of the part number for Parts Only - if the customer is to do the alignment him/herself. 

Where: 

X is the connector receptacle type. For pigtail style photodiode couplers it refers to the male connector on the end 

of the fiber. (3 for NTT-FC compatible, 3S for Super FC, 3A for Angled PC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for AT&T-ST, SC for 

SC connectors, X for unterminated fiber ends), 

W is the operating wavelength of the photodiode, in nm, 

a,b are the fiber core and cladding diameters respectively, in microns, 

F is the type of fiber being used (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fiber), 

LB is the desired backreflection level for pigtail style fiber to photodiode couplers. (25, 40 or 60dB typically), 

JD is the fiber jacket type (0.25 or 0.4 for unjacketed fiber, 1 for 900 micron OD nylon jacketing or loose tubing, 

3 for 3mm OD loose tube PVC cable), 

L is the length of fiber in meters. 

Example: A customer wants to pigtail a photodiode to a 9/125 singlemode fiber, to work at both 1300 and 1550nm. To 

minimize size he chooses the fiber to photodiode coupler without tilt adjustment, but including a lens to maximize 

coupling efficiency. The fiber is to be 0.5 meters long, with 900 micron nylon jacketing, and unterminated. OZ 

Optics part number: PFPD-21-1300/1550-9/125-S-40-X-1-0.5

219 Westbrook Rd, Carp, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: 1-800-361-5415 Tel:(613) 831-0981 Fax:(613) 836-5089 E-mail: sales@ozoptics.com 

FIXED ATTENUATORS AND ATTENUATING FIBER PATCHCORD 

Features: 




• Compact and rugged housings 

• Wide range of connectors/receptacles 

• Hybrid style attenuator uses attenuating fiber 

• Attenuating fiber patchcords utilize a new patent pending 

technique. Not fusion splice. 

• Mode independent multimode loopback attenuators 

• Designed to meet Telcordia requirements 

• Low cost 

Applications: 

• Optical power equalization 

• CATV, LAN, and telecommunications 

• Test and measurement 

• Channel balancing for WDM systems 

• Receiver padding 

• Optical transmission systems 


OZ Optics’ line of low cost fixed attenuators are available in four 

different configurations (hybrid male to female, attenuating fiber 

patchcord, bulkhead receptacle and loopback) to best suit your 

particular application. Each configuration has its own strengths. 

The hybrid type is ideal for reducing the intensity of a signal just 

prior to going into a receiver. They are also available with different 

connector types on the input and output. The attenuating fiber 

patchcord is ideal for high power applications and can be easily 

installed into fiber splice enclosures. The receptacle style is ideal 

when two male connectors need to be mated with a fixed 

attenuator. Finally, the loopback style attenuator is intended for 

patch panel installations. 

The Attenuating Fiber Advantage: OZ Optics has recently 

enhanced its fixed attenuator product line by developing a new 

technology to precisely attenuate signals in fibers. This patent 

pending, fully automatable technique allows one to create fixed 

attenuators within any standard fiber, with low polarization 

dependent loss (PDL) and high power handling. The resultant 

attenuating fiber is physically identical in appearance and 

behaviour to the original fiber, allowing it to be used to build 

patchcords or male-female hybrid attenuators. As the process 

used does not require the manufacture of special fiber, fixed 

attenuators can be constructed in small batch quantities 

economically. At the same time the automation aspect of the 

techniques allows large quantity orders to be manufactured at a 

cost as low as a dollar per unit. 

Attenuating fiber can be made from either singlemode and 

polarization maintaining (PM) fiber. PM attenuating fiber 

Hybrid Male-Female Fixed Attenuator 

Attenuating Fiber Patchcord 

Receptacle Style Attenuator 

Loopback Style Attenuator 


1

Example 2: 

A customer needs to reduce by 5dB the signal power from a polarization maintaining fiber that has an angle FC/PC connector before it 

enters a receiver, which also has an angle FC receptacle. The signal wavelength is 1550 nm, and the power is in excess of 1 Watt. The 

OZ Optics bar code number and description of the attenuator for this application is as follows: 


17771 PFA-3A3A-1550-8/125-3-0.5-P-5-HP 

High power inline 5dB fixed attenuator at 1550 nm with 0.5 meter long, 3 mm OD cabled, 

8/125 micron PM fiber with FC/Angle PC connectors on both ends. 



2. Are you using polarization maintaining fiber? What type? 

3. What level of attenuation do you require? 




7. What is the power level of your application? 



customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. 

In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases 

non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 25 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully 

explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 

Description 

Hybrid Style Fixed Attenuator: 

Part Number 

FA-300-XY-1300/1550-a/b-F-N-M1 

X Y = Connector Code 

(X for male, Y for female end): 



SCU = SC Ultra PC 


LC = LC 

8U = ST Ultra PC 

N = Patchcord Attenuation: 

1 for 1dB 

2 for 2dB 

... 

20 for 20dB 

25 for 25dB 


M=Multimode 

S=Singlemode 

a/b = Fiber core/cladding size in microns 

singlemode: 9/125 

multimode: 50/125, 62.5/125 

Note: Hybrid style attenuators with angled finishes must have matching style connectors one each end (i.e. Angled NTT-FC/PC to Angled 

NTT-FC/PC, not Angled NTT-FC/PC to Angled SC or Angled NTT-FC/PC to Ultra NTT-FC/PC 

Bulkhead Receptacle Style Fixed Attenuator: 

X = Receptacle Code: 


SCU = SC Ultra 

8U = ST Ultra 

Loopback Plug Style Fixed Attenuator: 

X = Connector Code: 


SCA = Angle SC 

3U = Ultra FC 

3A = Angled FC 

LC = Ultra 



a/b = Fiber core/cladding size in microns 

singlemode: 9/125 

multimode: 50/125, 62.5/125, or 100/140 

FA-500-X-1300/1500-9/125-S-N 

FA-400-X-W-a/b-F-N 

N = Attenuation: 

1 for 1dB 

2 for 2dB 

... 

20 for 20dB 

25 for 25dB 


M=Multimode 

S=Singlemode 

N = Attenuation: 

1 for 1dB 

2 for 2dB 

... 

20 for 20dB 

25 for 25dB 

4

Ordering Information For Custom Parts - continued 

Description 

Part Number 

Fiber Patchcord Inline Fixed Attenuator: 

PFA-XY-W-a/b-JD-L-F-N 




8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 






Fiber Core/Cladding size, in microns: 

9/125 for 1300/1550nm SMF 

See tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables for other 


Fiber Jacket Type: 1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket 

3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced 

PVC cable 



Patchcord Attenuation: 1 for 1dB 

2 for 2dB 

... 

20 for 20dB 

25 for 25dB 



Fiber length, in meters, on each side of 

the device. 

Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at 

the input and 7 meters at the output, 

replace “ L” with 1,7 

Note: Add -(HP) to the end of the part number for attenuated high power patchcord style. 

Ordering Examples for Custom Parts 

1. A customer needs a mode independent Loopback 10dB attenuator at 1300 nm for a multimode application. Core/cladding size 

should be 50/125: and requires SC connectors. OZ part number will be: FA-400-1300-50/125-M-10 

2. A 20dB inline fixed attenuator is required for 9/125 singlemode fiber, with an operating wavelength of 1300 nm. The input 

connector is to be a male angled FC connector, while the output connector is a male SC connector. Fiber length 2 meters on 

each side. OZ part number will be: PFA-3ASC-1300-9/125-3-2-S-20 

3. A customer needs 12dB attenuation between the patchcord and the receiver. This patchcord has an LC male connected while 

the receiver has a female LC receptacle. Working wavelength is C band. Then customer should order: PFA-300-LCLC- 

1300/1550-9/125-12-S-M1 


Q: Is the patchcord style attenuator a good choice for multimode applications? 

A: The plug type or loopback type are better choices. The patchcord style uses a high loss splice. It will attenuate high order 

modes more than low order modes. Therefore the attenuation will depend on the launch conditions. 

Q: Will I see the same attenuation with the patchcord attenuators at both 1300 nm and 1550 nm? 

A: No. Because the mode field diameter is different for the different wavelengths, there is over 10% variation in the attenuation in 

dB with the change in wavelength. 


Example 1: Power Equalization in Optical Networks: A network installer often has to lower system powers in a complex network so 

that each receiver sees the optimum signal strength without being overloaded. To do this properly, the optical power from each fiber 

should be measured just before entering the corresponding receiver. The required attenuation can then be calculated for each channel, 

and the corresponding attenuator can be selected and installed. For instance, if each receiver is designed to work with between 0.5 

mW (-3dBm) and 1 mW (0dBm) of optical power, and fiber one emits 20 mW (+13dBm), while fiber two emits 50 mW (+17dBm), then 

a 15dB attenuator can be used on fiber one, while a 20dB attenuator can be used for fiber two. The installer simply installs the matching 

plug style attenuator before each receiver. 

Example 2: Patch Panel Attenuator Arrays: Patch panels are ideal locations for installing attenuation fiber patchcords. Quite often 

one needs to attenuate the incoming signals from many fibers entering a hub, in order to equalize the signals. Attenuating fiber 

patchcords provide a convenient means of introducing a fixed attenuation level in a fiber line, neatly arranged in a patch panel 

enclosure. In contrast, using hybrid male-to-female fixed attenuators requires using an additional fiber patchcord as well, adding 

complexity to the system, and potentialy increasing the chances of failure at a node. 

Fiber 

Patchcord 

Hybrid 

Attenuator 

Attenuating 

Fiber 

Patchcord 

Replace This... 

With This 

5


FIXED FILTERS 

Features: 

• Narrow Line Widths 

• Rugged and Compact Size 

• Removable Filter Holder Designs 

• Wide Wavelength Range 

• Singlemode, Polarization Maintaining, and Multimode Fiber Versions 

• Expanded Beam Technology 

• LOW COST! 

Applications: 

• Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing 

• CATV, LAN and Telecommunications Use 

• Test and Measurement 

Pigtail Style Fixed Filter 


Fixed filters transmit or block specific wavelengths of light as they travel 

through the optical fiber. Light from the input fiber is first collimated and 

passed through the filter. The beam is then focused into the output fiber. 

Filter linewidths are normally defined in terms of Full Width at Half Maximum 

(FWHM). The standard filters used have a smooth, rounded transmission 

spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. A Fabry Perot 

cavity is simply made up of two reflectors separated by a fixed spacer of 

some thickness. Other filter designs are available. For instance, flat top 

bandpass filters are made by stacking multiple cavities together. By 

increasing the number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope 

therefore improving the out-of-band rejection level. Please contact OZ 

Optics for custom filter designs. 

Miniature Pigtail Style Fixed Filter 

Fixed filters using singlemode, multimode or Polarization Maintaining (PM) 

fibers are offered. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers 

based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining 

components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices 

using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in 

stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, 


Removable Filters 

Figure 1: Pigtail Style Fixed Filter (FF-11 Series) 

Figure 2: Pigtail Style Fixed Filter with (RFF-11 Series) 

Removable Filter 


Fixed Filter 

FF-1A-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-LW 

FF = Body Type: 

FF for fixed filters 

RFF for removable fixed filters 

A = Filter Size 

1 for standard size 

2 for miniature pigtail size 

a/b = Fiber core/cladding size, in µm 

9/125 for 1300/1550nm corning SMF-28 




F = 

M = Multimode 



LB=Backreflection level: 

40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or PM 

fibers only. (60dB for 1290 to 1620nm 

wavelength ranges only) 


LW =Filter line width in nanometers. For flat 

top filters add "F" to the line width. 


JD = 

X,Y = 

Fiber jacket type: 

1 = 900 µm OD Hytrel jacket 


PVC cable 




8=AT&T-ST 

SC=SC 

SCA=Angled SC 

LC=LC 

LCA=Angled LC 

MU=MU 

X=No Connector 

Notes: 

1 Only available for pigtail style non-removable filters 


A 0.8nm line width filter with a flat top profile is needed for 1570.4nm, to transmit light at a specific channel in the ITU grid, while blocking spurious 

noise in a neighboring channel. Size is critical, so the customer needs the miniature style fixed filters. Return loss is not critical. The customer 

wants to use standard singlemode fiber pigtails, 1 mm jacketing, no connectors, each one meter long. Part number and description are 

as follows: 

Part Number 

FF-12-1570.4-9/125-S-40-XX-1-1-0.8F 


Description 

Pigtail style fixed filter for 1570.4nm, with 1 meter long, 1mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 

40 dB return loss, no connectors and 0.8nm FWHM flat top profile filter. 

Q: What is a Fabry-Perot filter? Are there other types available? 

A: A Fabry-Perot filter has a smooth, rounded transmission spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. This shape is known 

as a Lorentz profile. A Fabry Perot cavity is simply made up of two reflectors separated by a fixed spacer of some thickness. By adjusting 

the spacer thickness one can adjust the pass bandwidth of the filter. Other shapes of filters are available. For instance, flat top bandpass 

filters are made by stacking multiple cavities together. By increasing the number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore 

improving the out-of-band rejection level. For more information on what custom filters are available please contact OZ Optics. 


A: Standard filters are specified by their Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM). This the transmitted linewidth at -3dB from the peak transmission. 

For custom filters linewidths such as the passband at -0.3dB and -25dB can be specified. 

Q: Is the shape of the transmission curve affected by polarization? 

A: No, OZ Optics tunable filters utilize an optical technique to control Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL). This design reduces PDL to 

minimal levels, while at the same time making the spectral response polarization insensitive. 

Q: How well does the filter block unwanted wavelengths? 

A: For standard single cavity Fabry Perot filters the typical linewidth at -20dB is roughly 10 times the FWHM linewidth. This type of filter is good 

for selecting specific channels in a DWDM system or cleaning up the ASE noise from a broadband source. The filter may transmit light at 

specific wavelengths significantly outside the operating wavelength range. For custom applications requiring different out-of-band isolation 

please contact OZ Optics. 

Q: What linewidth do I need in a 200GHz DWDM system? 100GHz? 50GHz? 

A: Typical linewidths associated with these frequencies are 1.2, 0.8 and 0.3nm respectively. This ultimately depends on the channel width and 

isolation levels required for the system in question. OZ Optics can work with you to build the filter that best suites your requirements. 

3


FIXED NEUTRAL DENSITY ATTENUATORS EXPANDED BEAM STYLE 

Features: 

• Mode Independent Attenuation Level 

• Rugged and Compact Size 

• Pigtail and Receptacle Styles 

• Removable Filter Versions 


• Singlemode, Polarization Maintaining, and Multimode Fiber Versions 

• Expanded Beam Technology for flexible design 

• Low Cost 

Applications: 

• CATV, LAN and Telecommunications use 

• Receiver Padding 

• Test and Measurement 

• Optical Power Equalization 

• Research & Design 


OZ Optics line of expanded beam style neutral density fixed attenuators are ideal 

for multimode applications and for applications where attenuating fibers are not 

available or usable. These attenuators provide mode independent fixed 

attenuation when used with multimode fibers. The insertion losses will not depend 

on how the light is launched into the fiber. This is a significant advantange over 

other attenuator designs. 

The attenuators consist of a set of collimating and focusing optics and a central 

baseplate containing the filter. They can be ordered in receptacle or pigtail styles. 

The expanded beam design permits higher power handling than plug style 

attenuators. The filters themselves can be either permanent or removable. This 

provides great flexibility for experimentation. 

Pigtail Style Fixed Attenuator 

Figure 1: Fiber Pigtailed Neutral Density Fixed 

Attenuators 

Removable Filter Style Attenuator 

Figure 2: Fiber Pigtailed Style Neutral Density 

Removable Filter Attenuators 

Figure 3: Receptacle Style Fixed Attenuators with 

Neutral Density Filter 


Standard Product Specification: 

Version Pigtail Style Receptacle Style 

Fixed Filter Removable Filter Fixed Filter Removable Filter 

Attenuation 

5dB to 30dB, 5dB increments 

Return Loss 40dB for Singlemode or PM Fibers, 35dB for 14dB (Multimode offered only) 

multimode 

Available 

440-1625nm 

Wavelengths 1 

Attenuator 

0.79” (20mm) 1.31” (33mm) 0.79”(20mm) 1.31”(33mm) 

Diameter 

Filter size for 

N/A 

12.7mm diameter x 

N/A 

12.7mm diameter x 

removable filters 

3mm thick 

3mm thick 

Questionnaire: 

1. What is the power level of your application? 


3. Do you need a removable filter? 

4. What fiber size are you using? 

Ordering Information Custom Parts: 

Receptacle Style: 

Body Type: ND for non-removable filters 

RND for removable filters 

Connector Code: 3 = Flat, Super or Ultra 

FC/PC 


8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


See Table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables for 


ND-200-XY-W-a/b-F-N 

Attenuation: 

5 for 5dB 

10 for 10dB 

15 for 15dB 

20 for 20dB 

25 for 25dB 



9/125 for 1300/1550nm SMF 

See Tables 1 to 5 of the OZ Standard Tables 

for other standard fiber sizes 



Pigtail Style: 

ND-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-N 

Body Type: ND for non-removable filters 

RND for removable filters 




9/125 for 1300/1550nm SMF 

See Tables 1 to 5 of the OZ Standard 

Tables for other standard fiber sizes 




Backreflection level (Return Loss): 

40 dB for Singlemode and PM 

35dB for multimode 

Attenuation: 

5 for 5dB 

10 for 10dB 

15 for 15dB 

20 for 20dB 

25 for 25dB 

Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the device 

Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at the input 

and 7 meters at the output, replace L with 1,7 

Fiber jacket type: 1 = 900 Micron OD hytrel jacket 


PVC cable 

See Table 7 of the OZ Standard Tables for other 

jacket sizes 

Fiber Connectors X = No Connector 




8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


LC = LC 

MU = MU 

See Table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables for other 

connectors 

2


FUSED COUPLERS – FIBER OPTIC 

Fused couplers are used to split optical signals between 

two fibers, or to combine optical signals from two fibers 

into one fiber. They are constructed by fusing and 

tapering two fibers together. This method provides a 

simple, rugged, and compact method of splitting and 

combining optical signals. Typical excess losses are as 

low as 0.2dB, while splitting ratios are accurate to within 

±5 percent at the design wavelength. The devices are bidirectional, 

and offer low backreflection. The technique is 

best suited to singlemode and multimode couplers. 

Fused couplers do suffer from some disadvantages. 

Multimode fused couplers are mode dependent. Certain 

modes within one fiber are transferred to the second 

fiber, while other modes are not. As a result, the splitting 

ratio will depend on what modes are excited within the 

fiber. The couplers are optimized for a uniform 

distribution of modes within the fiber known as an 

equilibrium mode field distribution, (EMD). 

This condition is met by using an incoherent source, such 

as an LED, or by using a mode scrambler, to mix up the 

modes traveling through the fiber. It is also achieved by 

sending the signal through a long length of fiber, before it 

enters the coupler. 

Singlemode fused couplers only transmit one mode, so 

they do not suffer from mode dependency. However, 

they are highly wavelength dependent. A difference in 

wavelength of only 10nm can cause a significant change 

in the splitting ratio. As a result it is important to specify 

the exact wavelength at which the fused coupler will be 

used. Finally, fused couplers made from polarization 

maintaining fiber do not maintain polarization well at the 

fusion point, making them sensitive to temperature or 

vibration. As a result they are not well suited for 

polarization applications. If any of the above problems 

are of concern to you, then you should instead consider 

using an OZ Optics Fiber Optic Beam Splitter/Combiner, 

which uses hybrid micro-optics. Refer to the data sheet 

entitled Fiber Optic Beam Splitters/Combiners. 

OZ Optics fused couplers are available in a range of 

wavelengths, fiber sizes, and splitting ratios. The fiber 

ends can be terminated with a variety of fiber connectors. 

Standard configurations are One-by-Two and Two-by- 

Two couplers. N by M fused couplers, such as one by 

three, or one-by 4, etc., are also available on request. 


Standard Wavelengths: 

488nm, 514nm, 633nm, 830nm, 1300-1350nm, and 1490-1550nm for single-mode fused 

couplers. Other wavelengths are available on request. Multimode couplers are broadband in 

nature. Their operating range is 400nm to 1600nm. 

Fiber Sizes: 

Singlemode: 3.5/125 for 488nm and 514nm couplers, 4/125 for 633nm, 5/125 for 830nm, and 

9/125 for 1300nm and 1550nm. 

Multimode: 50/125, 62.5/125 and 100/140 size fibers. 

Excess Loss: 


Part Number 

FUSED-12-W-a/b-S/R-XYZ-JD-L 

FUSED-22-W-a/b-S/R-XYZT-JD-L 

Description 

One-by-Two Fused Coupler 

Two-by-Two Fused Coupler 

Where: 

X,Y,Z,T are the input and output male connector types (3 for NTT-FC compatible, 3S for Super FC/PC, 3A for 

Angled PC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for AT&T-ST, SC for SC connectors, and X for unterminated fiber ends), 

W is the operating wavelength in nm (Standard wavelengths are 488nm, 514nm, 633nm, 830nm, 1300nm and 

1550nm), 

a,b are the fiber core and cladding diameters respectively, in microns, 

S/R is the desired splitting ratio (50/50 splitting is standard), 

JD is the fiber jacket type (3 for 3mm OD loose tube kevlar reinforced PVC cable is standard.), 

L is the fiber length in meters. The standard fiber length is 0.5m per side. Contact OZ Optics for availability on 

other lengths. 

Example: The customer requires a singlemode two-by-two 50/50 coupler for 633nm (fiber core size is 4/125 for 633nm 

singlemode fiber). All ends are to be 0.5 meters long, cabled, and terminated with FC style connectors. OZ Optics' part 

number: FUSED-22-633-4/125-50/50-3333-3-0.5 

Note: OZ Optics reserves the right to substitute a two-by-two coupler for the equivalent one-by two splitter, depending on 

availability. This will not affect the couplers performance or pricing. The only difference will be an extra input fiber on the 

coupler.


Features 

• Wide dynamic range 


• Interchangeable optical connectors available 

• Long battery lifetime, up to 300 hours 

• Powered by rechargeable battery or AC adaptor 

• RS-232 interface for computer control 

• Protective rubber boot 

• Built-in backlight 


• Low cost 

HAND HELD OPTICAL POWER METER 

Applications 

• Fiber optic assembling and testing 



• Component and system troubleshooting 

• Education 

• General optical power measurement 

POM-300 Optical Power Meter 


The OZ Optics POM-300 offers a high-resolution optical power 

meter with a wide dynamic range covering a broad spectrum of 

wavelengths. A user-friendly keypad and easy-to-read back-lit 

display makes it well suited to most user applications. 

Extremely low power consumption allows extended operation 

in the field. Alternatively, the AC adaptor may be used, either 

directly, or to recharge the internal battery. 

The POM-300 can accommodate a variety of standard, 

interchangeable screw-in receptacles. Power levels as high as 

+10 dBm or as low as -75 dBm can be easily measured, with 

the values displayed in watts or dBm. Relative measurements 

can be displayed in dB. The wavelength can be selected in 

increments of 10 nm, or set to a specific value, within 1 nm. 

Through the keypad and liquid crystal display, the user can 

configure various modes of operation and format the displayed 

measurements. Alternatively, using the RS232 serial interface, 

the POM-300 can be controlled by a host PC using a series of 

simple commands. 

DTS0103 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 14-Jan-2005 

1


1. What is the wavelength range that you need? 

2. What is the maximum power level that you need to measure? 

3. What is the minimum power level that you need to measure? 

4. What type of optical receptacle do you need? 

5. Do you need to be able to control the power meter from a computer? 

Ordering Information for Custom Parts 

Description 

Optical Power Meter 

Part Number 

POM-300-W 

W: 

Wavelength range: IR = infrared, 800 to 1650 nm 

VIS = visible, 440 to 900 nm 

Description 

Optical receptacle 

Part Number 

POM-300-R-X 

X: Receptacle style: 



8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


LC = LC 

MU = MU 

1.25U = Universal adaptor for 1.25 mm 

diameter ferrules 

2.5U = Universal adaptor for 2.5 mm 

diameter ferrules 


A customer needs to measure optical power from a system operating at 650 nm, which has an LC connector on the end of a fiber. He 

can do this by ordering the following parts: 

Part Number 

POM-300-VIS 

POM-300-R-LC 

Description 

Hand Held Optical Power Meter with silicon detector and battery, for 440nm - 900nm wavelengths, -65dBm to 

10dBm measurement range. Measurements are in watts/dBm/dB with 4 or 5-digit display. Receptacle is not 

included. 

Interchangeable LC/PC receptacle for POM-300 Optical Power Meter 


Q: I need to measure a noisy signal. Can I do this? 

A: Yes. The POM-300 allows the user to set the length of an averaging queue, which will filter much of the noise to provide a steady 

average reading. 

Q: I need to make measurements in a fairly dark room. Does the POM-300 have a backlit display? 

A: Yes. The backlight can be easily turned on or off. It can also be set to automatically turn off after a user-selectable time period has 

passed. 

Q: How long will the rechargeable battery last between charges? 

A: The POM-300 can be run for up to 300 hours on a single charge. Using the backlight continuously will increase the power 

consumption and drain the battery faster. For maximum battery life, the backlight should only be turned on when it is required. 

3


Features: 

• Unique connector design minimizes thermal damage 

• Multimode, singlemode, and polarization maintaining fiber types 

• Operating wavelengths from 200nm to 2000nm 

• 2 micron to 1500 micron diameter core sizes 

• Low and high numerical aperture fibers 

• Anti-reflection coatings available 

• Armored cabling for maximum safety 

HIGH POWER FIBER OPTIC PATCHCORDS 

Applications: 

• Materials processing 

• Laser cutting and welding 

• High power spectroscopy 

• Non-linear optics 

• Laser surgery 

• Light detection and ranging (LIDAR) 


OZ Optics produces fiber optic patchcords specifically for high power 

applications. These patchcords feature special high power fibers, carefully prepared 

fiber endfaces, and specially designed fiber optic connectors to ensure 

maximum power handling for your application. 

High Power Patchcords 

In standard connectors the fibers are glued into place, and the fiber is polished 

flush with the connector surface. When used with high power lasers, heat 

generated at the tip of the fiber causes the surrounding epoxy to break down 

and give off gases. These gases in turn burn onto the tip of the fiber, causing 

catastrophic damage to the fiber and perhaps the entire system. Our 

connectors feature an air-gap design, where the fiber extends into free space by 

1.1mm to 1.5mm, providing an epoxy-free region where thermal energy can be 

safely dissipated without burning the surrounding material. Standard connectors 

based on SMA 905 and FC connector designs are offered. 

A unique feature of the FC connector design is that it features Adjustable Focus. 

A special connector allows one to adjust the distance the ferrule and fiber 

protrudes from the FC connector housing. This allows one to precisely position 

the fiber tip in free space, making it ideal for laser to fiber coupling. 

High Power SMA Connector 

In addition to patchcords, OZ Optics features high power laser to fiber delivery 

systems, optimized to work with our patchcords for maximum laser coupling. 

Our engineers have extensive working knowledge with both continuous output 

(CW) and pulsed laser applications, and can help you select the best system for 

your application. Contact OZ Optics for further assistance. 

High Power Adjustable Focus FC Connector 

DTS0037 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 01-Oct-2004 1

Key 

Focus Adjustment 

Strain Relief 

Fiber 

Ferrule 

Motion 

Nut 

1.1mm 

Figure 1: High Power SMA Connector Design 

Protected 

Fiber 

Focus Lock 

Figure 2: High Power Adjustable Focus 

FC Connector Design 



16244 QMMJ-5HP5HP-IRVIS-200/240-3-2 2 meter long, 3mm OD PVC cabled, 200/240 high powered multimode IRVIS fiber patchcord, 

terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends. 

16974 QMMJ-5HP5HP-UVVIS-200/240-3AS-4 4 meter long, 3mm OD stainless steel armored cabled, 200/240 high powered multimode 

UVVIS fiber patchcord, terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends. 





9045 QMMJ-5HP5HP-UVVIS-550/600-3-3 3 meter long, 3mm OD PVC cabled, 400/430 high powered multimode UVVIS fiber patchcord, 


14989 QMMJ-5HP5HP-IRVIS-940/1000-3AS-1 1 meter long, 3mm OD stainless steel armored cabled, 940/1000 high powered multimode 

IRVIS fiber patchcord, terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends. 

17665 QMMJ-A3HP3S-UVVIS-25/125-3-2 2 meter long, 3mm OD PVC cabled, UVVIS 25/125 MM fiber patchcord, terminated with an 

adjustable high power air gap FC/PC connector on one end and with a super FC/PC connector 

on the other end. 


A customer needs a high power patchcord to transmit 150 Watts of light with a 1064nm wavelength. Reviewing table 5 of the standard tables 

shows that there is a fiber with a 550 micron core, 600 micron cladding that can handle up to 230 Watts of power. Because the fiber is a large 

core multimode fiber he elects to use high power SMA connectors. The patchcord can be any length or cable type. 


17449 QMMJ-5HP5HP-IRVIS-550/600-3-2 2 meter long, 3mm OD PVC cabled, 550/600 high powered multimode IRVIS fiber 

patchcord, terminated with High Power Air Gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends. 

2


1. What wavelength of light will you be transmitting through the fiber? 

2. Are you working with a pulsed or continuous source? 

3. If continuous, what is the output power from your source, in watts? 

4. If pulsed, what are the pulse energies (in mJ), pulse duration (in nsec), and repetition rate? 

5. Do you need multimode, singlemode, or polarization maintaining fiber? 

6. If multimode, do you need graded index or step index fiber? 

7. What fiber core/cladding size do you prefer? 

8. What should the numerical aperture of the fiber be? 

9. How long should the patchcord be, in meters? 

10. What type of connectors do you need on each end? 

11. What type of cabling do you need? 



products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will 

need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. These points will be carefully explained in 


Description 

High Power Fiber Optic Patchcord 

F = Fiber Type: 

QM = High power multimode fiber 

QS = High power singlemode fiber 

QP = High power polarization maintaining 

fiber 

X,Y = Input and Output Connector Types: 

5HP = High power SMA 905 

A3HP = High power adjustable FC 


See table 6 of the standard tables for 

other connector types 


See tables 1 and 2 of the standard tables 

for standard singlemode and PM fiber 

operating wavelengths. 

For multimode fibers specify either IRVIS 

for visible and infrared applications 

(400-2000nm), or UVVIS for 

ultraviolet and visible applications 

(200-700nm). 

Part Number 

FMJ - XY - W - a/b - JD - L-(A) 

A = Alignment (Polarization maintaining 

patchcords only) 

0 = unaligned and rotatable 

1 = slow axis of the fiber aligned with 

respect to the key and locked 

L = Patchcord length, in meters 









microns: See tables 1 to 5 of the 

standard tables for standard fiber sizes. 


A customer needs a high power patchcord to transmit 20 Watts of light at a 1064nm wavelength. He requires the smallest available fiber with a 

numerical aperture of 0.22 or lower that will transmit this much power. Reviewing table 5 of the standard tables shows that there is a fiber with 

a 200 micron core, 240 micron cladding that can handle up to 30 Watts of power. Because the fiber is a large core multimode fiber he elects to 

use high power SMA connectors. The patchcord needs to be 5 meters long, with 3mm diameter stainless steel armored cable for protection. 

Part Number 

QMMJ-5HP5HP-IRVIS-200/240-3AS-5 

Description 

5 meter long, 3mm OD stainless steel armored cabled 200/240 high powered multimode 

IRVIS fiber patchcord, terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both 

ends. 

3


HIGH POWER LASER TO FIBER COUPLERS WITH TEMPERATURE CONTROL 

FEATURES: 

• Very High Power Handling 

• High Resolution 

• Wide Range of Lenses 

• Rugged, Stable Design 

• Built-In Peltier Cooler and Fan 

• Temperature Sensor and Safety Interlock 

APPLICATIONS: 

• Laser Welding and Cutting And Marking 

• Medical, Chemical, and Pharmaceutical Sensors 

• High Power Laser Physics 

• High Power Spectroscopy 

• OEM Laser Systems 


• Coupling Efficiency: Typically >55% for singlemode 

and polarization maintaining 

fibers, >80% for multimode fibers 

• Backreflection: -14dB for receptacle style couplers 

using flat finish connectors 

-60dB for receptacle style couplers 

using angle finish connectors 

-40dB or -60dB for pigtailed source 

couplers 

• Polarization Extinction Ratio: >20dB 

25dB, 30dB versions are also 

available 

• Available Wavelengths: 180 - 2000nm 

• Power Handling: Up to 5 Watts CW for singlemode 

applications 

Over 100 Watts CW for multimode 

applications. Contact OZ for 

Pulsed Laser power handling 

specifications 


Receptacle Code: 

3 for FC, Super FC or Ultra FC 

3A for Angled FC/PC 

3AF for Flat Angled FC 

5 for SMA 905 

8 for AT&T-ST 

8U for Ultra AT&T-ST 

SC for SC 


connectors. 



Add - DR to the part number if a TE driver is required. 

Add - PS to the part number if a Power Supply is required. 

HPUC-2X-W-F-f-LH-TE 

Laser Head Adaptor: 

1 for 1”-32TPI Male Threaded Adaptor 

2 for Disk Adaptor with 4 holes on a 1” 

square 

11 for Post Mount Adaptor 


adaptors. 

Lens ID: See Lens Selection Guide 3 for Non- 

Contact couplers with receptacles in the Laser to 

Fiber Coupler Application Notes 

Fiber Type: 

M for Multimode 

S for Singlemode 

P for Polarization Maintaining 



HIGH POWER MULTI-MODE INDUSTRIAL DIODE LASERS 

Features 

• Up to 90 W output power 

• CW and pulsed operation 

• Top-hat output profile 

• Built-in red aiming beam option 

• Compact, air cooled package 

• Maintenance free operation 

• Pump laser diodes with lifetimes > 200,000 hours 

• High electrical-to-optical efficiency 

• RS232, USB, or analog control interfaces 

• Hight performance-to-cost ratio 


Applications 

• Heat treatment 

• Plastic welding 

• Cutting 

• Drilling and trimming 

• Soldering 

• Laser pumping 

• Medicine 

Preliminary 

High Power Multi-Mode Industrial Diode Laser 

Our Diode Laser Sources (DLS) consist of a series of single-emitter laser 

diodes combined into a single delivery fiber to provide up to 90 watts of 

CW laser light through a multimode fiber. Available as either a turnkey, 

stand-alone system, or as an OEM module, these sources deliver a beam 

directly to the work site through a metal-shielded multi-mode fiber cable 

terminated by a standard connector. Optional collimators and focuser 

accessories convert the output from the fiber into either a collimated 

beam or focused spot. Output beam diameters as large as 10 mm can be 

provided, while focuser spots as small as 100 microns can be produced 

with working distances as long as 100 mm for convenient use. A built-in 

red aiming laser diode can be added as an option, allowing one to easily 

aim the beam to the desired target. The output light immediately exiting 

the fiber has a round top-hat beam profile, which provides uniform heat 

distribution. 

The all-fiber configuration of these sources provides a 

robust, monolithic design with no optical parts to align or 

stabilize, no need for maintenance parts or materials, 

and the ability to operate under high shock, vibration 

and dusty conditions. These laser systems are 

completely sealed and will provide high performance 

and reliability. Systems include RS-232 or USB 

communication interfaces as well as analog signals to 

allow users to easily integrate the fiber laser into their 

setup. They require only standard wall plug power line 

and will operate immediately. OEM modules offer analog 

control of the laser power, pump laser diode currents 

and temperature. 

DTS0111 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 26-May-05 1


Mode of operation 1 

Parameters Unit Value 

Nominal output power W 4-90 

Peak wavelength nm 915±10 or 975±10 

Output power control % 10-100 

Long term output power stability 

1Can be 100% amplitude modulated up to 50 kHz, single shot, repetitively pulsed or externally TTL modulated 

2Lasers can be provided as either an OEM module, a bench-top unit or in a 19" rack-mountable case 

CW 

200,000 optional 

Output fiber type 

550/600 micron core/cladding, 0.22 NA standard. 

Other sizes, numerical apertures, available on request. 

Output fiber length m 0.5-50 

Operating voltage (AC) V 100/120 or 200/240 

50 or 60 Hz 

Dimensions 2 mm TBD 

Weight kg TBD 

Cooling 

forced air 

Operating Temperature °C +5 to +45 

Storage Temperature °C -30 to +70 

Humidity % 5 to 95, non-condensing 

Safety Features: 

Feature 

Error interlock input 

Remote stop 

Remote warning out 

Front panel key switch 

Power on indicator 

Emission indicator 

Error Indicator 

Description 

Disables the laser operation when open, requiring a restart to restore operation. 

Disables laser operation when open, without requiring a restart to restore operation. 

Normally closed, opens if either the error interlock or remote stop inputs are opened 

Key is required to turn on the laser 

Indicates that the source is turned on. 

Indicates laser light is being emitted by the unit. 

On when laser output has been disabled by any internal or external error condition. 

Ordering information: 

OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most 

manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our 

standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than 

normal. In certain cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and/or a minimum order will be necessary. These 

points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. 

2


1. What is your preferred operating wavelength? 

2. What are your minimum optical power requirements? 

3. What package style do you prefer? Rack mount or a bench top unit? 

4. What sort of connector do you want on the output fiber? 

5. What are your needs with respect to fiber type, length, and connector? 

6. What sort of control interface will you use? 

7. Do you need to collimate or focus the light from the fiber? 

Description 

Diode Laser Source 

Part Number 

DLS-N-W-a/b-M-X-JD-L-P-I 

N = Package style 

1 for Bench Top unit 

2 for 19" Rack mount 

3 for OEM Module 

W = Output Wavelength, in nm 

915 for 915 ± 10 nm 

975 for 975 ± 10 nm 

a/b = fiber size: Core/cladding diameters, in microns 

550/600 is standard 

200/240, 365/400, and 940/1000 options 

available 

X = Connector Type: 

5HP for High Power SMA Connector 

A5HPM for mechanically cleaved high 

power air-gap SMA Connector 

A5HPL for laser conditioned high power 

air-gap SMA Connector 

Note: Contact OZ for information on 

available collimator and focuser options. 

I = Control Interface 

R = RS232 

U = USB 

A = Analog Control 

P = Maximum output power, in Watts 


1 meter is standard 

JD = Jacket Size 

3AS (3mm OD stainless steel armored 

cable) standard. 


other jacket sizes. 

Standard Accessories: 

Bar Code Part Name Description 

2737 POWER CORD - EUROPE European power cord 

2736 POWER CORD - UK UK power cord 

3


HIGH POWER PULSED FIBER SOURCES 

Features 

• Peak powers up to 20 kW 

• Average output power from 20 mW to 2 W 

• Output wavelengths of 1.07 µm or 1.55 µm 

• Adjustable pulse durations, repetition rates 

• Gaussian beam profiles 







Applications 

• Spectroscopy 

• Lidar 

• Range finding 

• Nonlinear Optics 

• Free-Space communication 

• Material processing 

• R&D 

Preliminary 

Pulsed Fiber Source in OEM Module Package 

OZ Optics' Pulsed Fiber Sources (PFS) are a series of compact turnkey 

systems or OEM modules based on a highly reliable masteroscillator/power-amplifier 

(MOPA) design, to deliver multi-kilowatt level 

peak powers with average output powers of up to 2 W. The all-fiber 

configuration provides a robust, monolithic design with no optical parts to 

align or stabilize, and no need for maintenance parts or materials. The 

sources can operate under high shock, vibration, or dusty conditions. PFS 

systems have RS 232 or analog interfaces, to allow you to integrate them 

into your setup. 


1 Other output powers available 


Average output power 1 W 0.02 to 2 

Peak power kW Up to 20 

Wavelength range 2 nm 1025-1090 or 1530-1590 

Pulse width (FWHM) ns 5 to 100 

Repetition rate kHz Up to 100 

Data input 

2 Other wavelengths near 1 µm, 1.5 µm or 2 µm are available, with different specifications. 

Standard TTL level input 

Operating voltage: (AC or DC) V 100/120 or 200/240, 

50 or 60 Hz AC 

or +5 to +28 DC 

Dimensions mm TBD 

Weight kg TBD 

Cooling Method 

forced air 

Operating Temperature °C 0 to +50 


Operating Humidity % 5 to 95, non-condensing 



Feature 


Remote stop 






Packaging Options: 

All PFS units can be supplied in either a bench top unit, a 19" rack-mount case, or OEM module. Mil-Spec watertight electrical interface 

connectors are available for OEM modules. 




we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In certain cases non-recurring 

engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and/or a minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, 

so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. 




3. What requirements do you have with regards to pulse duration and repetition rate? 

4. What package style do you prefer? Rack mount or an OEM module? 



7. What is the available supply voltage? 

Description 

Pulsed Fiber Source 

Description 








Part Number 

PFS-N-W-a/b-F-X-JD-L-P-PW-R-I 





W = Output Wavelength, in microns 

1.0 for 1.03-1.09µm 

1.5 for 1.53-1.59µm 


6/125 for 1 micron wavelengths 

9/125 for singlemode fiber at 1.5µm 

wavelengths 

8/125 for PM fiber at 1.5µm wavelengths 


S = singlemode fiber 

P = Polarization Maintaining Fiber 


3S = Super FC/PC 


5 = SMA 905 

SC = SC 


E = E2000 

EA = Angled E2000 


other connector types. 






R = RS232 

U = USB 


R = Repetition rate in kHz 

PW = Pulse width in ns 

P = Maximum average output power, in milliwatts 




3AS (3mm OD stainless steel 

armored cable) standard. 

See table 7 of the standard tables 



available collimator and focuser 

options. 

2


HIGH POWER SINGLEMODE INDUSTRIAL Yb FIBER LASER 

Features 

• Up to 50 W output power 

• Nearly perfect Gaussian Beam quality 

• 1040 to 1100 nm fixed wavelength 



• Pump laser diodes feature lifetimes > 200,000 hours 



• Linear output polarization optional 



Applications 

• Marking 

• Micromachining 

• Precision cutting and welding 

• Drilling and trimming 

• High resolution soldering 

• Non-linear converter pumping 

• Graphic imaging 

Preliminary 

High Power Singlemode Fiber Laser Module 

OZ Optics offers a series of compact, diode-pumped single-mode 

Ytterbium Fiber Lasers (YFL) in either a turnkey system or as an 

OEM module, capable of providing up to 50 W of CW near 

diffraction limited (M 2 < 1.1) 1.08 um laser light. The YFL fiber 

laser delivers a beam directly to the work site through a metalshielded 

singlemode fiber cable terminated by a standard 

connector. Optional collimators and focuser accessories convert 

the output from the fiber into either a collimated beam or focused 

spot. Collimated beam diameters can range from 0.3 mm to over 

7.5 mm, while focusers can produce circular spots as small as a 

few microns in diameter, with long working distances to the work 

piece. 

The all-fiber configuration of these sources provides a robust, 

monolithic design with no optical parts to align or stabilize, no 

need for maintenance parts or materials, and the ability to 

operate under high shock, vibration and dusty conditions. The 

laser systems have a very high reliability which can not be 

achieved by other solid state or gas laser systems. YFL systems 

have RS-232, USB, or analog interfaces to allow you to 

integrate them easily into your setup. They require only standard 

wall plug electrical power and activate immediately. YFL 

modules provide analog outputs for monitoring laser power, 

pump laser diode currents, and operating temperature. 



Mode of operation 1 


Nominal output power W 1-50 

Peak wavelength 2 nm 1040-1100 

Output power control % 20-100 for 5 W modules 

Long term output power stability 

40,000 standard, 

>200,000 optional 

Output linewidth (FWHM) nm 1 

Output polarization Random 3 

Output fiber length m 1 standard 

0.5-20 custom 

Operating voltage (AC) V 100 to 120 or 200 to 240 

50/60 Hz 

Dimension mm TBD 4 

Weight kg TBD 

Cooling 

1Can be 100% amplitude modulated up to 50 kHz. Pulse mode emission available through TTL pulsed input. 

2Other wavelengths near 1 µm, 1.5 µm or 2 µm are available, with different specifications. 

3Linearly polarized versions using polarization maintaining fibers are available as an option. 

4Lasers can be provided as either a bench-top unit or in a 19" rack-mountable case 

CW 

forced air 

Operating Temperature °C +5 to +45 


Humidity % 5 to 95, non-condensing 


Feature 


Remote stop 






Description 














2




3. What package style do you prefer? Rack mount or a bench top unit? 


5. What are your needs with respect to fiber type, length, and connector? 


7. Do you need to collimate or focus the light from the fiber? 

Description 

Ytterbium Fiber Laser 

Part Number 

YFL-N-W-a/b-F-X-JD-L-P-I 





W = Output Wavelength, in microns 

1.0 for 1.04-1.10µm 


6/125 for 1 micron wavelengths 

9/125 for singlemode fiber at 1.5µm 

wavelengths 

8/125 for PM fiber at 1.5µm wavelengths 


S = singlemode fiber 



3HP for High Power FC Connector 

A3HPM for mechanically cleaved high 

power air-gap FC Connector 

A3HPL for laser conditioned high power 

air-gap FC Connector 


R = RS232 

U = USB 


P = Maximum output power, in watts 




3AS (3mm OD stainless steel armored 

cable) standard. 


other jacket sizes. 


available collimator or focuser options 





3


INTELLIGENT TUNABLE LASER DIODE SOURCE 

Features: 

• User tunable wavelength 

• User controllable power level 

• Excellent power and wavelength stability over wide operating temperature 

• Very short warm-up time 

• Serial port for computer control 

• Small size, low cost 

Applications: 

• DWDM network testing 

• Component testing 

• Instrument wavelength and power calibration 

• General lab use 

PRELIMINARY 

DATA SHEET 


The Tunable Laser Diode Source from OZ Optics is a compact optical source 

providing a user controllable wavelength and output power level. Using a unique 

temperature compensation system, the source is able to provide excellent stability in 

both wavelength and power. Unlike many sources that are accurate at only the 

calibration temperature, OZ Optics' tunable laser is designed to maintain high 

accuracy over a wide range of ambient temperatures. This makes it an ideal source 

for use in environments where the room temperature is not precisely controlled. 

Tunable Laser Diode Source 

Unlike conventional sources that may require half an hour to warm up, the unique 

design of this source allows the device to achieve stable operation within seconds of 

being turned on. This saves time and effort for technicians in the field or on the 

production floor. 

In DWDM applications, precise wavelength control is essential for obtaining accurate 

test measurements. With wavelength accuracy at the picometer level, the OZ tunable 

source is able to meet these demanding requirements. While the operating 

wavelength of most laser diodes is dependent on the current through the laser, the 

design of OZ Optics' tunable laser will automatically compensate for changes in 

output power to restore the wavelength to its desired value. 

DWDM applications for the metro marketplace require lasers operating at precise 

wavelengths in order to ensure that light intended for one channel does not interfere 

with adjacent channels. The precise wavelength control of the Intelligent Tunable 

Laser Diode Source allows one to replace an array of specific-wavelength sources 

with a single tunable source. By tuning the source, one can set the source to the 

specific channel required. OZ Optics also makes banks of 4 to 8 tunable laser 

modules for OEM applications. Each laser in a bank can be individually tuned to 

cover any of up to 10 channels (at 50 GHz spacing). 

Not only does the Tunable Source offer accurate wavelength control, it also provides 

excellent power level control and stability. Power level accuracy is better than 1%, 

over a wide range of temperatures and wavelengths, with stability of better than 0.01 

dB. With specifications like these, the Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source is well 

suited to countless applications where stability, accuracy, and reliability are required. 

For more information on tunable laser diode products, contact OZ Optics. 


Ordering Information For Standard Parts: 


20405 TL-100-3A-1550-2-1-D Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source with angled FC/APC connector, 

1550nm center wavelength, ± 2 nm tuning range using a DFB laser, with 1 mW 

output power. Universal 110/220 volt AC/DC adapter with removable North 

American power cord included. (Other power cords are available separately. 

See below.) 

4572 GPIB-RS232 RS232 to GPIB Adapter 

4571 GPIB-CABLE-2 GPIB Cable, 2m long. 

2736 POWER CORD - UK POWER CORD for UK 

2737 POWER CORD - EUROPE POWER CORD for Europe 

8122 SMJ-3A3A-1300/1550-9/125-3-1 1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 1300/1550nm 9/125 SM fiber patchcord, 

terminated with angled FC/PC connectors on both ends. 


Center Wavelength 1550 nm 

Wavelength Tuning Range ± 2 nm 

Wavelength Accuracy ± 0.004 nm 

Wavelength Resolution 0.001 nm 

Wavelength Response Time 30 (typical) Seconds, from minimum wavelength to maximum wavelength. 

Output Power 1 mW 

Power Dynamic Range 20 dB 

Power Stability ± 0.005 dB 

Power Accuracy 5 % 

Power Resolution 0.001 dB 

Power Response Time 2 (typical) Seconds, from minimum specified power to maximum specified 

power. 

Connector 

Angled FC\APC 

Remote Communications Interface 

RS232 

Power Requirements 120 to 240(@50 - 60 Hz) Volts. Universal AC/DC adaptor included. 

Operating Temperature Range 15 to 35 °C 

Storage Temperature Range -30 to 60 °C 

Warm up time 30 

15 

Seconds. Limited by slew rate of wavelength. 

Seconds to stable power. Limited by boot-up time 

Dimensions 60 x 90 x 190 mm, including protective boot. 

Weight 0.5 kg 

Storage Humidity


A customer in Europe wants to use a tunable laser in order to test the spectral characteristics of DWDM optical components at different 

wavelengths around 1550 nm. His test jig has an angled FC/PC connector. The power level must be adjustable over the range of 50 microwatts 

to 1 milliwatt. The customer would like to be able to use a tunable source directly, or operate it under computer control for automated testing. 

The standard Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source offered by OZ Optics will fulfill the requirements. In addition, the customer should order 

a power cord for use in Europe. He may also wish to order a patchcord to connect the source to his test jig. The complete list of parts that he 

would order is shown below: 


20405 TL-100-3A-1550-2-1-D Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source with angled FC/APC connector, 1550nm 

center wavelength, ± 2 nm tuning range using a DFB laser, with 1 mW output 

power. Universal 110/220 volt AC/DC adapter with removable North American 

power cord included. 

2737 POWER CORD - EUROPE POWER CORD for EUROPE 

8122 SMJ-3A3A-1300/1550-9/125-3-1 1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 1300/1550nm 9/125 SM fiber patchcord, 

terminated with angled FC/PC connectors on both ends. 


1. What is the desired center wavelength? 

2. What is the required tuning range? 

3. What is the maximum power required? 

4. What is the minimum power that you require? 

5. What type of optical receptacle do you need on the source? 

6. What type of laser diode do you need? 

Ordering Information for Custom Parts: 

Description 

Part Number 

Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source TL-100-X-W-R-P-L 

X: Output Connector Codes: 

3S=Super or Ultra NTT-FC/PC 


8=AT&T-ST 

SC=SC 

SCA=Angled SC 

LC=LC 

LCA=Angled LC 

W: Center Wavelength in nanometers: 


L 

P 

R 

Type of Laser Diode: 

F=Fabry-Perot 

D=DFB (Distributed Feedback) 

(Recommended) 

Maximum Optical Power in milliwatts: 

(Example: 10 for 10 milliwatts.) 

Tuning Range in nanometers from the 

center wavelength: 

(Example: 1 for ± 1 nm range.) 


A customer in North America needs to test the wavelength sensitivity of some DWDM components over the range of 1532 nm to 1536 nm, at 

a power level in the range of 500 microwatts to 5 milliwatts. He requires an angled FC connector on his source. He can meet these 

requirements with the following: 

Part Number 

TL-100-3A-1534-2-5-D 

Description 

Tunable Laser Diode Source with angled FC/APC connector, 1534 center wavelength, ± 2 nm tuning range, 

with 5 mW output power. Universal 110/220 volt AC/DC adapter with removable North American power cord 

included. 

3


FIBER OPTIC ISOLATORS 

Isolators are optical devices that allow light to be 

transmitted in one direction only. They are most often used 

to prevent any light reflected back down the fiber from 

entering the source, thus preventing any feedback 

problems from occurring. 

The simplest type of isolator consists of a polarizer 

followed by a quarter wave plate. Such a device will block 

any simple reflections provided that the output polarization 

from the quarter wave plate is not modified by other optical 

elements. Unfortunately, this is rarely the case in fiber 

optic systems. A much better type of isolator uses 

polarizers with a Faraday rotator to block the return light. 

This type of isolator blocks all types of polarization, and 

thus makes a much higher quality isolator. This is the type 

of isolator used by OZ Optics. With this type of isolator, 

isolation levels of 35dB can be achieved for 514 to 1064nm 

wavelengths, and 42dB for 1300 and 1550nm 

wavelengths. Furthermore, isolation levels of 60dB can be 

achieved for 1300nm and 1550nm by cascading two 

isolators together. 

By using a patented tilt alignment technique, OZ Optics 

has solved the problem of using isolators with fibers. Input 

light from a laser, laser diode, or optical fiber is first 

collimated (if necessary), then transmitted through the 

isolator. A focusing lens on the output end of the isolator 

then couples the light into the output fiber. 

Because Faraday isolators use polarizers on the input end 

as well as the output end, the transmission level through 

the isolator depends on the input polarization. For 

maximum transmission, the input light should be linearly 

polarized, with the polarization axis aligned with the 

transmission axis of the polarizers. If the source is 

randomly polarized, then at least fifty percent of the light 

will be lost at the input. 

Because the transmission level through the isolator is 

polarization sensitive, one has to be careful when using 

singlemode fibers on the input end of the isolator. 

Singlemode fibers do not maintain polarization. Instead, if 

linearly polarized light is launched into singlemode fiber, 

then any bends or stresses in the fiber will change the 

output polarization state. This may cause intensity 

changes in the isolator output. 

There are four basic techniques to avoid this stability 

problem. The simplest technique is to attach the isolator 

directly onto the polarized source. This technique is the 

most cost effective. By eliminating the need for an input 

fiber in the system, the overall coupling efficiency will be 

greatest. A second technique is to use a polarization 

maintaining (PM) fiber between the isolator and the source 

instead of an ordinary singlemode fiber. To work properly, 

the polarization axis of the PM fiber must be aligned with 

both the polarization axis of the source and the polarization 

axis of the isolator. A third method is to use a polarization 

controller on the input end of the fiber, and change the 

input polarization state entering the fiber until the output 

transmission is maximized. Finally, one could use a 

polarization insensitive isolator, now offered by OZ Optics. 

This type of isolator uses a beam splitter to divide the light 

into two orthogonal polarizations. Each polarization is then 

sent through a separate isolator. The two output beams 

from the isolators are then recombined, and focused into 

the output fiber. This type of isolator is much more 

expensive than a standard isolator. 

Since the whole purpose of an isolator is to prevent 

reflected light from re-entering the source, it is important to 

minimize backreflection from the input end of the isolator. 

For this reason, we strongly recommend against using 

isolators with a female receptacle on the input end. The 

receptacle itself is a common source of backreflection. 

Instead, use fiber pigtails or angled connectors such as 

APC connectors at the input end.. 

In fiber to fiber pigtailed isolators, backreflections are 

reduced by polishing the fiber ends at an angle, and 

positioning them off-center with respect to the collimating 

lens axis. In laser diode to fiber isolators, it is done by 

positioning the diode off-center with respect to the 

collimating lens axis. This will cause the collimated output 

beam from the laser diode to emerge at a slight angle 

before entering the isolator. In both cases, the tilt 

adjustment technique is used to compensate for the offset 

on the input ends, thus ensuring minimum losses. 


OZ Optics can provide completely packaged isolator 

systems for different wavelengths. In addition, OZ Optics 

can provide components to allow the customer to do his 

own laser or laser diode packaging with an isolator. If the 

customer wishes to do this, then it is recommended that 

the customer purchases an alignment kit. This kit includes 

a centering lens, multimode fiber, and video instructions on 

how to package an isolator. Part number: ALIGN-0X 


Isolation: 


Backreflection: 

Available Wavelengths: 

35dB for 514 to 1064nm wavelengths. 42dB or 60dB for 1300nm and 1550nm. 42dB for polarization 

independent isolators. 

Typically 0.6dB plus isolator loss. Total loss is typically 1.2dB for 514 to 1064nm isolators, 0.8dB 

for 42dB 1300 or 1550nm isolators, and 1.4dB for 60dB cascaded 1300 or 1550nm isolators. 

Typically 40dB for pigtail style 42dB isolators. 60dB for pigtail style 60dB isolators. 

500-1550 nm. 


Part Number 

Description 

FOI-01-1X-W-a/b-F-LB-Y-JD-L-I Fiber isolator with a pigtailed fiber on the input, and a female receptacle on the output. 

FOI-02-0X-W-F-I 

Laser to fiber coupler with an isolator and an output female connector receptacle. 

FOI-11-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-I Pigtail style fiber to fiber isolator. 

FOPI-11-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-I Pigtail style fiber to fiber polarization independent isolator, with -45dB backreflection. 

FOI-12-01-W-a/b-F-LB-Y-JD-L-I Pigtail style laser to fiber coupler with an isolator. 

ALIGN-0X 

Isolator alignment kit. It includes video instructions, centering lens, wrench, and a 

multimode jumper. 

Where: 

to 

X,Y are the connector receptacle types for connector style couplers with isolators. For pigtail style isolators, it refers 

the male connector on the fiber end (3 for NTT-FC, 3S for Super FC, 3A for Angled FC, 8 for AT&T-ST, etc.); 

W is the isolator operating wavelength in nm; 


I is the desired isolation level (35, 40, or 60dB. 60dB is available for 1300nm and 1550nm only); 

a/b are the fiber core and cladding diameters, respectively, in microns; 

JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3 for 3 mm OD loose tube kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, and 

5A for 5mm armored cable); 

L is the fiber length in meters; 

LB is the backreflection for pigtail style isolators (40 or 60dB typically. 60dB is available for 1300 or 1550nm only). 

Ordering example: A customer wants a pigtail style fiber to fiber isolator for 1550nm, with better than 60 dB backreflection. 

The input and output fibers are polarization maintaining fibers, cabled, and 1 meter long. The input fiber is terminated with an 

angled FC connector. The output fiber is terminated with a Super FC connector. 

OZ Optics part number: FOI-11-11-1550-9/125-P-60-3A3S-3-1-60.


LASER DIODE COLLIMATORS 

Laser diode collimators are used to collimate the highly 

divergent beam that is emitted by a laser diode. It consists 

of a laser diode holder, a collimating lens holder, and a 

high numerical aperture (NA) collimating lens, with a focal 

length f. The lens is housed in a threaded receptacle that 

is screwed into the collimating lens holder. By adjusting 

the distance between the laser diode and the collimating 

lens, one can collimate the laser diode output. 

The dimensions of the collimated beam is determined by 

two factors - the far field divergence angles θ ⊥ and θ || , of 

the laser diode being used, and the focal length of the 

collimating lens. The collimating beam dimensions are 

given by the equations 

BD ⊥ = 2 × f × sin(θ ⊥ /2) 

BD || = 2 × f × sin(θ || /2) 

Standard focal lengths include f = 1.6mm, 2.0mm, 2.6mm, 

3.9mm, and 6.2mm. For information on the diode 

characteristics, consult the diode manufacturer for 

specifications. 

The light from a laser diode is not circularly symmetric. 

Instead, the output diverges more in one direction than in 

the perpendicular direction. As a result the output beam 

from the collimating lens will be elliptical in shape rather 

than circular. There are two main methods to correct this 

problem. The first is to add a cylindrical lens or 

anamorphic prism in front of the diode before collimating it. 

A second technique is to couple the light from the laser 

diode into a singlemode fiber and then collimate the output 

from the fiber. The fiber acts as a spatial filter, providing a 

near perfect Gaussian output. Both methods are shown in 

the figures at the bottom of this page. Contact OZ Optics 

for further information about these techniques. 

Laser diode collimators are available in different 

diameters. The standard diameter package is 0.79 inches 

in diameter. This size fits most diode types. A larger, 1.3 

inch diameter housing, is used for large O.D. diodes, such 

as H1 packages. A 0.59" diameter housing is available for 

diode can sizes 9.0mm in diameter or smaller. Smaller 

housings with 10mm OD's are available for OEM 

applications. 


OZ Optics also offers special compact laser diode to 

fiber couplers for OEM applications. These packages 

have the diode and collimating lens permanently glued 

into the same housing. This package features a 

compact, rugged housing, at a significant reduction in 

cost. 

OZ Optics has in stock a selection of laser diodes. OZ 

Optics can also supply you with laser diode power 

supplies, that operate either from a battery or a DC 

voltage source. We can even provide you with 

complete miniaturized packaged systems. Contact 

OZ Optics for information on what is available. 


Note: When ordering, please specify what type of diode you wish to use, along with any diode characteristics that you 

know (Wavelength, output power, can size, emitter chip dimensions, divergence angles, distance between the chip and 

the window on the package, etc.) 

Part Number 

HULDO-11-W-f 

HULDO-31-W-f 

HULDO-41-W-f 

HULDO-51-W-f 

LDC-21 

LDC-21A 

Description 

Laser diode collimator with 1.3" diameter flange. 



10mm diameter single piece laser diode collimator. 

Collimating lens wrench for standard collimators. 

Collimating lens wrench for large lens collimators. 

Where: 

W is the operating wavelength in nm; 

f is the focal length of the collimating lens, in mm, and the lens type. GR denotes graded index lenses, 

while AS denotes aspheric lenses. Standard lenses are 1.6GR, 2.0AS, 2.6AS, 3.9AS and 6.2AS. 

Other focal lengths are available on request. Contact OZ Optics for details. 

Note: Add the term "-LD" to the part number if OZ Optics is to supply the laser diode. Add the term "-PS" to the end 

of the part number if OZ Optics is to also include a power supply. 

Example: A customer wants a laser diode collimator for a 670nm laser diode, using a 2mm focal length aspheric lens. 

The customer also wants the 0.79" package size. The customer is supplying the laser diode and the power supply. 

OZ Optics part number: HULDO-31-670-2.0AS


LASER DIODE POWER COMBINER 

OZ Optics introduces a new coupler designed to combine 

two polarized laser diode outputs into a single fiber. The 

output fiber can be singlemode, multimode or polarization 

maintaining fiber. Fiber-to-fiber polarization combiners / 

splitters are also available. 

The device utilizes a polarizing beam splitter in reverse, to 

act as a combiner. The laser diode outputs are collimated, 

and then attached onto the combiner. The collimated laser 

diode outputs are rotated until the maximum light comes 

out of the splitter / combiner output. The combined beam 

is then focused into the output fiber using OZ Optics' 

patented tilt adjustment technique. 

A second version of the power combiner utilizes a dichroic 

splitter instead of a polarization beam splitter to combine 

the diode beams. This method has the advantage that the 

polarization axes of the two diode beams can be oriented 

in the same direction. This is useful when one needs to 

launch the two input signals along the same axis of a 

polarization maintaining fiber. However, this method is 

only possible when the wavelengths of the two diodes differ 

by at least 40nm. 

Laser diode power combiners come in a small, rugged 

package and are available either with female receptacles 

to accept different connectors (NTT-FC, AT&T-ST, etc.), or 

pigtail style, with the fiber directly attached. Pigtail style 

combiners are recommended for optimum stability, minimum 

insertion losses, and low backreflection. Receptacle 

style systems are best suited for applications where the 

output coupler is used with a multimode fiber. If a receptacle 

style combiner is used with a singlemode fiber, then the 

user may have to adjust the alignment to maximize 

coupling efficiency. Receptacle style systems with better 

repeatability are available, but at the expense of lower 

coupling efficiencies. 

The coupling efficiency from each diode is about 75-90% 

for multimode fibers and 45%-55% for singlemode fibers. 

The typical backreflection level returning to the laser diode 

is -20dB. Backreflection levels of -25dB, -40dB, and -60dB 

are available for pigtail style combiners. This is 

accomplished by polishing the fibers at an angle and 

positioning the fiber off center with respect to the lens axis. 

For -60dB backreflection levels, the fiber ends are AR 

coated to reduce reflections. Applications include Erbium 

doped fiber amplifiers, coherent telecommunications and 

medical surgery. 

Oz Optics also supplies laser diode to fiber couplers with 

photodiodes. They are available in two configurations. In 

one setup, the photodiode acts as a monitor photodiode, 

measuring the reference power from the laser diode. The 

second setup instead uses the photodiode to detect light 

returning from the fiber. Such a setup is also known as an 

optical transceiver. 



Part Number 

ULBS-11X-F-W-PBS 

ULBS-11P-a/b-F-W-PBS-LB-X-JD-L 

ULBS-12P-a/b-FD-W-S/R-LB-X-JD-L 

TRBS-12P-a/b-FD-W-S/R-LB-X-JD-L 

WDM-11X-F-W1/W2 

WDM-11P-a/b-F-W1/W2-LB-X-JD-L 

Where: 

Description 

Laser diode polarization power combiner with an output connector receptacle. 

Pigtail style laser diode polarization power combiner. 

Laser diode to fiber coupler with a monitor photodiode. 

Laser diode transceiver module. 

Connector receptacle style laser diode power combiner with a dichroic splitter. 

Pigtail style laser diode power combiner using a dichroic splitter. 

X is the connector type for receptacle style combiners. For pigtail style combiners, they refer to the male connector 

on the fiber end (3 for NTT-FC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for AT&T-ST connectors, X for bare fiber, etc.), 

a,b are the fiber core and cladding diameters, respectively, in microns, 

W,W1,W2 are the diode wavelengths in nm, 

S/R is the desired split ratio (50/50 and 90/10 are standard) 

F is the output fiber type (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fiber), 

LB is the desired backreflection level (25dB, 40dB or 60dB for pigtail style systems only). 

JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3 for 3mm OD loose tube Kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, and 

5A for 5mm OD armored cable.), 

L is the fiber length in meters. 

Example: A customer requires a pigtail style power combiner to combine the light from two 670nm laser diodes. 

The customer wants low (-40dB) backreflection back into the diodes. The output fiber is a two meter long, 3.0mm O.D 

kevlar cabled, 4/125 singlemode fiber, terminated with a male NTT-FC connector. 

OZ Optics' part number: ULBS-11P-4/125-S-670-PBS-40-3-3-2. 

Example 2: A 90/10 beam splitter is used to split the signal from an 830nm laser diode. Ninety percent of the light is 

coupled into a 2 meter long, 3.0mm OD cabled PM fiber, terminated with an FC connector. The remaining 10 percent is 

reflected to a monitoring photodiode. The typical backreflection level is 25dB. In this manner, one can independently 

monitor the output power emmitted by the laser diode before it enters the fiber. 

Oz Optics part number: ULBS-12P-5/125-PD-830-90/10-25-3-3-2.


LASER DIODE SOURCE – FIBER OPTIC 

(SINGLE OR MULTI-WAVELENGTH) 

Features: 

• Single or multi-wavelength sources available 

• Continuous wave (CW) and waveform modulation 

• Wide range of connector receptacles available 

• Optional output power adjustment 

• Polarization-maintaining, singlemode, or multimode versions available 

• Low battery indicator 


• Low cost 

• User selectable auto turn off mode 

Applications: 

• Insertion loss measurement and attenuation measurement 

• Fiber identification using internal modulated mode 

• Splicing and connectorization testing 

• End-to-end short link testing 

• FTTX/PON 

• Quality Assurance 

Multi-Wavelength Laser Diode Source 


OZ Optics produces Fiber Optic Laser Diode Sources in a variety of wavelengths. 

The receptacle-style sources are offered with a wide range of receptacles, while the 

pigtail-style sources offer the choice of polarization maintaining, singlemode, or multimode 

fiber output. Each source has a low battery indicator on the front panel. 

In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber 

structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. 

However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do 

carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for 

availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build 

devices. 

The standard source provides continuous waveform output. It can also be pulse 

modulated internally at 270 Hz, 1 kHz and 2 kHz. 

As an option, OZ Optics can include a blocking-style optical attenuator to adjust the 

output power for the FOSS-01 and FOSS-11 models. This method of power 

control does not affect the spectral properties of the laser diode output. The FOSS-2N 

allows the user to select one of four preset power levels via the keypad. 

Single Wavelength Laser Diode Source 

with Patchcord 

OZ Optics recommends angled connectors for improved stability. For 1300nm and 

1550nm wavelengths, an isolator can be added for improved stability. OZ Optics also 

manufactures the Highly Stable Laser Diode Source (HIFOSS), which includes a temperature 

controller and an isolator. See the Highly Stable Laser Diode Source data 

sheet for more information on this product. 



Parameter 

Specifications 

Model FOSS-2N FOSS-01 and FOSS-11 

Available wavelengths1 

For single wavelength - without isolator 

For single wavelength - with isolator 

For multi-wavelength - without isolator 

Wavelength accuracy 2 

Linewidth2,3 

Available receptacles 

Optical power 4 

Optical power stability5 

Without isolator 

With isolator 

Internal modulation 

532, 635, 655, 670, 685, 780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm 

1310, 1550 nm 

1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm 

± 5 nm for 635 to 685 nm 

± 15 nm for 780 to 1064 nm 

± 20 nm for 1310 to 1625 nm 

1.5 nm (Typical for 1550 nm) 

Super, Ultra and angled NTT-FC/PC, SC, angled SC, AT&T-ST, LC, MU, 2.5 mm ID 

Universal, and 1.25 mm ID Universal 

0.8 to 1 mW (Standard, depending on wavelength and laser class) 

± 0.025 dB (Typical) 

± 0.05 dB (Typical) 

CW, 270 Hz, 1 kHz and 2 kHz square wave 

Power supply 

Two AA alkaline batteries. Optional 

universal 110/220 V AC/DC adapter 7 

9 V alkaline battery. Optional universal 

110/220 V AC/DC adapter 7 

Dimensions (W x L x H) 6 76 x 127 x 25.4 mm (3 x 5 x 1 in.) 72 x 110 x 25 mm (2.75 x 4.6 x 1 in.) 

Temperature Range 

Operating 

Storage 

-10 to +50 °C 

-20 to +60 °C 

Weight (including batteries) 225 g (0.5 lb.) 200 g (0.45 lb.) 

Laser classification based on IEC 60825-1 Class 1 Class 1, 2 or 3b 

-10 to +50 °C 

-30 to +60 °C, at 95% humidity, noncondensing 

Note: 

1Typical wavelengths shown. For other wavelengths, please contact OZ Optics. 

2Depends on Laser diode specification. 

3For narrow linewidth, please contact OZ Optics. 

4Higher power is available upon request. Please contact OZ Optics. 

5Over 6 hours, at 23 °C, after 30 minutes warm up, tested at 1550 nm with super FC/PC receptacle, 9/125 singlemode fiber. 

6Dimensions and weight may change for special order. Does not include pouch and connectors. 

7See Standard Parts for universal 110/220 V AC/DC adapter. 


1. A customer needs a 1550 nm laser diode source, with 1 mW output power, 9/125 µm core/cladding singlemode fiber with a super FC/PC 

receptacle. He wants an AC adaptor for North America as well. 


2836 FOSS-01-3S-9/125-1550-S-1 Fiber Optic Laser Diode Source with 1550 nm wavelength, 1 mW output, for 9/125 

core/cladding, singlemode fiber, with super FC/PC receptacle. 

8402 AC-9VDC-NA Universal 110/220 VAC to 9 VDC power supply adaptor, for North America. 

2. A customer wants a pigtail style 635 nm laser diode source, with 1mW output power . Fiber is 4/125 um core/cladding, singlemode, 3 mm 

OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable, 1 meter long with super FC/PC connector. 


8772 FOSS-11-4/125-635-S-1-3S-3-1 Pigtail-style Fiber Optic Laser Diode Source with 635 nm wavelength, 1 mW 

output. Fiber is singlemode, 4/125 core/cladding, 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced 

PVC cable, 1 m long, with super FC/PC connector. 

3





engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so 

your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 


1. What is the wavelength required for the laser diode source? 

2. What is required maximum output power of the laser diode source? 

3. What type of fiber are you using? (SMF, MMF or PMF) 

4. What model source do you need? If Receptacle style, what type? If Pigtail style, what it the fiber length, Jacket OD and connector type? 

Receptacle Style FOSS1 

FOSS-01-X-a/b-W- F-1(-BL2) (-ISOL3) 

F = M = Multimode 

X = Receptacle or connector code:4 


3S = Standard, Super, or Ultra 


NTT-FC/PC 


SC = SC 


W = Wavelength, in nm: 635, 650, 670, 685, 

780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 

1480, 1550,1625 

8 = AT&T-ST 

a/b4 = Fiber core/cladding size, in µm 

LC = LC 

MU = MU 


1.25U=Universal Receptacle for 


1.25mm OD ferrule (LC, MU, etc.) 




4 See Standard Tables data sheet for fiber sizes, jacket sizes, and other connectors. 

2.5mm OD ferrule (FC, ST, SC, etc.) 

Pigtail Style FOSS1 

FOSS-11-a/b-W-F-1-X-JD-L(-BL2) (-ISOL3) 

a/b 4 = Fiber core/cladding size, in µm 




JD = Fiber jacket type:4 





PVC cable 

X = Receptacle or connector code:4 

W =Wavelength, in nm: 635, 650, 670, 685, 


780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 


1480, 1550, 1625 



SC = SC 

M = Multimode 



8 = AT&T-ST 


LC = LC 

MU = MU 

Note: 

1 Standard unit. For Highly Stable Laser Diode Source (HIFOSS), which includes TE cooler and an isolator, please see the Highly Stable Laser 

Diode Source data sheet. 

2 Add -BL to the part number to add blocking style attenuator to the FOSS. 

3 Add -ISOL to the part number to add an isolator (1310nm or 1550nm only. For other wavelengths, order HIFOSS with isolator and TE cooler). 

4

Description 

Single/Multiwavelength Receptacle 

Style Laser Diode Source 

N = Number of channels: 

1 = Single Wavelength Source 

2 = Dual Wavelength Source 

3 = Triple Wavelength Source 

X = Connector type: 

3S = Standard, Super, or Ultra NTT-FC/PC 


SC = SC 


8 = AT&T-ST 

LC = LC 

MU = MU 

1.25U = Universal receptacle for 1.25 mm OD 

ferrule (LC, MU, etc.) 

2.5U = Universal receptacle for 2.5 mm OD 

ferrule (FC, ST, SC, etc.) 

Part Number 

FOSS-2N-X-a/b-W-F-P 

P = Output Power in mW: 

(0.2 mW, 0.5 mW and 0.9 mW are 

standard for infrared wavelengths.) 


M = Multimode 


P = Polarization Maintaining - Only available 

for single wavelength option. 

W = Wavelength, in nm: 

For single wavelength sources, the standard 

wavelengths are: 532, 635, 655, 670, 685, 780, 810, 

830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1490, 1550, and 1625 nm. 

For other wavelengths, please contact OZ Optics Ltd. 

For multi-wavelength sources, the options are: 

1310, 1490, 1550, and 1625 nm. For multiwavelength 

sources, specify each wavelength 

separated by a "/" (Example 1310/1550). Some 

combinations of wavelengths may not be available. 

a/b = Fiber core/cladding size in µm: 


8/125 for 1550 nm PANDA style PM fiber. 

7/125 for 1300 nm PANDA style PM fiber 

(See tables 1 to 5 in the Standard Tables data sheet for other values) 


A customer needs a 1550 nm laser diode source, with 1mW output power and isolator, for 9/125 µm core/cladding singlemode fiber with super 

FC/PC receptacle. He wants the output power to be adjustable. 

Part Number 

FOSS-01-3S-9/125-1550-S-1-BL-ISOL 

Description 

Fiber Optic Stable Laser Diode Source with 1550 nm wavelengths, 1 mW output, isolator and 

blocking attenuator, for 9/125 µm core/cladding singlemode fiber with super FC/PC receptacle. 


A customer needs to verify the integrity of an optical network using 9/125 SM fiber at 1310, 1480, and 1550 nm. The network uses FC connectors. 

The customer would like to carry out the tests using 0.5 mW sources. He can do this by ordering the following part: 

Part Number 

FOSS-23-3S-9/125-1310/1490/1550-S-0.5 

Description 

Triple Wavelength Fiber Optic Laser Diode Source with 1310, 1490, and 1550 nm wavelengths, 

0.5 mW output, for 9/125 µm core/cladding SM fiber with FC receptacle. Uses 2 AA batteries 

or optional AC adapter. 

5


LASER DIODE TO FIBER COUPLERS 

OZ Optics offers a complete line of laser diode to fiber 

couplers, offering optimum coupling in a small, rugged 

package. They may be purchased prealigned, with the 

diode already in place, or as a kit that can be assembled 

by the customer using their own diode. The complete 

assembly procedure is quite straightforward, and can be 

done in less than twenty minutes. Assembly and operating 

instructions are available in a video cassette, showing the 

alignment process. The video is available in both North 

America and European (PAL) versions. In addition, a 

complete alignment kit is available, which includes the 

collimating wrench, multimode fiber assembly, centering 

lens, and video instructions. 

Diode source couplers are available for a variety of diode 

case sizes, and for diode wavelengths from less than 

630nm to greater than 1550nm. These source couplers 

work with multimode, singlemode, and polarization 

maintaining fiber. Should the diode ever fail, it can be 

easily replaced while using the rest of the coupling optics. 

The source coupler can then be realigned for optimum 

coupling. This is one of the main advantages of using the 

OZ Optics tilt adjustment technique. 

There are two versions of tilt adjustable laser diode to fiber 

couplers; receptacle style couplers, and pigtail style 

couplers. Connector receptacle style couplers have a 

female receptacle, such as NTT-FC, or AT&T-ST, etc. at 

the output end. This allows the user to connect any optical 

fiber with a matching male connector to the diode. Pigtail 

style laser diode to fiber couplers are also offered, with the 

fiber pigtailed directly onto the coupler. Pigtail style laser 

diode to fiber couplers provide higher coupling efficiencies 

than receptacle style couplers, as well as better stability, 

and lower backreflection levels. The output fiber can also 

be terminated with different output connectors. 

Laser diode to fiber couplers are available in different 

diameters. The standard diameter package is 0.79 inches 

in diameter. This size fits most diode types, and is 

available for both receptacle style and pigtail style 

couplers. For the best coupling efficiencies choose the 

larger, 1.3 inch diameter housing, which supports larger 

and higher quality lenses. This housing size is also used 

with large diode case sizes, such as H1 package sizes. 

For pigtail style source couplers, a smaller 0.59" diameter 

housing is available for diode can sizes 9.0mm in diameter 

or smaller. For diodes with can diameters of 5.6mm or 

less, a miniature 0.5" diameter tilt adjustable housing is 

possible. 

One misconception about tilt adjustable laser diode 

couplers is the belief that the number of tilt and 

lockingscrews make the coupler sensitive to temperature 

1 


or vibration. In fact, tilt adjustable source couplers can be 

used over a temperature range of -25°C to 60°C, and have 

been vibration tested. Higher temperature versions are 

available on request. 

OZ Optics also offers a special, low cost, miniature 

pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers for OEM 

applications. These packages use just a single lens to 

couple light from the laser diode into the fiber. They do not 

use OZ Optics tilt adjustment technique. This package 

features a compact, rugged housing, at a significantly 

lower cost. The housing diameter is typically 10mm. 

Coupling efficiency into singlemode and multimode fibers is 

typically 10 percent and 35 percent, respectively. 

A variety of options are available for laser diode to fiber 

couplers. One such option is a coupler with a built in 

isolator. Isolators can reduce the effects of backreflection 

by up to 60dB. This is done by using coated optics and 

angled polished fibers. This is very useful for applications 

where the intensity and wavelength stability of the output 

light from the diode is critical. 

Self contained systems are available in both a pocket size 

casing, as well as a miniature pen size housing. Both 

receptacle style and pigtail style systems are available. OZ 

Optics can also provide fiber pigtailed collimators for your 

system. 

OZ Optics has in stock a selection of laser diodes. In 

addition we can package customer specified laser diodes. 

OZ Optics also provides laser diode power supplies and 

drivers, as well a thermoelectric Peltier coolers. Please 

refer to the Fiber Optic Stable Source & TE Cooled Laser 

Diode Housing Data Sheet. 

OPERATING PRINCIPLE 

Another option for laser diode to fiber couplers is a blocking 

screw to attenuate the output beam. This allows the user 

to precisely control the output power entering the fiber, 

without having to change the diode current. Another option 

is laser diode to fiber couplers with polarizer or polarization 

Rotator in the middle. 

Laser Diode to Fiber Coupler with 

Polarization Rotator in the middle 

LIGHT SOURCES 

OZ Optics also has available self contained laser diode to 

fiber delivery systems, with battery operated power 

supplies. AC to DC converters are also available. These 

systems provide a compact, portable source of light to 

attach to an optical fiber for test and measurement 

systems. They are used in a variety of applications, 

including fault detection, laser acupuncture, fluorescence 

measurements, etc. 

Laser diode to fiber couplers with tilt adjustment use a two 

stage process to couple light from the laser diode into the 

fiber. In the first stage, the output light from the diode is 

collimated with a collimating lens. The distance between 

the diode and the collimating lens is easily adjusted with a 

collimator wrench, then locked with a radial set screw. The 

collimated beam is then coupled into the fiber with a 

second lens, using OZ Optics' patented tilt alignment 

technique. The focal lengths of the collimating and 

coupling lenses are carefully selected to transform the 

optical properties of the laser diode light to match the mode 

field pattern of the fiber as closely as possible. Coupling 

efficiencies of over 50 percent into singlemode fiber, and 

80 percent into multimode fibers, can be achieved with 

certain diodes with the correct choice of lenses. Coupling 

efficiencies into singlemode fibers better than 80% are 

possible with certain diodes by correcting the diode 

astigmatism and the ellipticity of the diode output with a 

miniature cylindrical type lens. Contact OZ Optics for 

further information about this technique. 

Before building a laser diode to fiber coupler, OZ Optics 

has to choose an appropriate lens combination to 

maximize coupling efficiency. To do so, we need to know 

the following laser diode characteristics: (1) Diode 

wavelength (2) Output power (3) Diode can size (4) Emitter 

dimensions (5) Far field divergence angles (6) 

Astigmatism. In addition, the diode selected should exhibit 

good pointing stability over time. 

2

SPECIFICATIONS 

Coupling Efficiency: 

Backreflection levels: 


Operating temperature: 

Output extinction ratios: 

75% to 85% for multimode fibers, 35%-55% for singlemode (SM) or polarization maintaining (PM) 

fibers. Coupling efficiencies greater than 75% into SM or PM fibers are also possible for certain 

diodes. 

Typically -15dB for receptacle style versions, and either -25dB, -40dB, or -60dB for pigtail style 

versions. (-60dB is available for 1300nm and 1550nm only.) 

600nm to 1600nm. 

-20°C to +60°C. 

Typically greater than 20dB for PM fibers. 30dB versions are available on request for 1300 and 

1550nm only 


When ordering laser diode to fiber couplers, please specify the laser diode characteristics (diode type, angular beam profile, 

housing dimensions, etc.). If possible, please fax us the diode manufacturer's specification sheet before ordering. For pigtail 

style laser diode to PM fiber couplers please indicate whether you wish to align the slow axis or the fast axis of the PM fiber with 

respect to the diode output. The OZ Optics standard is to align the PM fiber such that the diode output is transmitted along the 

slow axis of the fiber. 

Part Number 

HULD-AX-W-F-C 

LDPC-0A-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L-C 

VIDEO-01-NTSC (or PAL) 

MMJ-X1-50/125-3-0-1 

LDC-21 (or LDC-21A) 

ALIGN-0X-NTSC (or PAL) 

Where: 

Description 

Laser diode to fiber source coupler with connector receptacle. 

Pigtail style laser diode to fiber source coupler. 

Video instructions for using OZ Optics' components. Please indicate whether an 

American (NTSC) or European (PAL) standard video is required. 

One meter long multimode jumper assembly for performing initial alignment of 

singlemode laser to fiber couplers. 

Alignment wrench for adjusting the laser diode collimation. 

Alignment kit for laser diode to singlemode fiber source couplers, containing a 

collimating wrench, a multimode jumper assembly, written instructions, and instructional 

video. Please indicate whether an American (NTSC) or European (PAL) standard video 

is required. 

A is the diameter of the diode package. (Use 1 for the standard 0.79" diameter package size, 2 for the higher 

performance 1.3" diameter package, 3 for compact 0.59" diameter, and 4 for the miniature 0.50" diameter. Note that 

due to limitations in the size of the diode being used, not all package sizes are available for every diode.) 

X is the receptacle type for connector style laser diode to fiber source couplers. For pigtail style laser diode to fiber 

couplers, it refers to the male connector on the fiber end (3 for FC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for AT&T-ST, SC for SC 

connectors, etc. Use X for unterminated fibers for pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers.) 

W is the laser diode wavelength in nm; 



C is the desired coupling efficiency (35%, 45% or 75% typical efficiencies for singlemode couplers, 75% typically for 

multimode fibers). Note that due to limitations in the diode optical characteristics, not all of the coupling efficiencies 

listed are possible with every diode. Contact OZ Optics for further technical help. 

LB is the desired backreflection level for pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers. (25, 40 or 60 dB typically); 

JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3 for 3 mm OD loose tube kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, and 

5A for 5mm armored cable); 

L is the fiber length in meters; 

Options: If OZ Optics is to supply the laser diode, then add the term "-LD" to the part number. If you require a power supply 

as well, then add the term "-PS" to the part number. For a blocking screw, add the term "-BL" to the part number. Add “-PO” 

to the part number for parts only, if customer wants to do the alignment. Add “-DR” to the part number for laser diode driver 

circuit. 

APPLICATION EXAMPLES 

1. A pigtail style laser diode to fiber coupler is needed to couple light from a 1300nm laser diode into a PM fiber. The output 

fiber is to be one meter long, cabled with 3.0mm kevlar cable, and with an NTT-FC connector on the end. The backreflection 

level is to be less than 40dB. A coupling efficiency of 45% is desired. The slow axis of the fiber is to be aligned with the 

polarization axis of the output light from the diode. The customer wants OZ Optics to supply the laser diode and a power supply 

for the diode. OZ Optics' part number: LDPC-01-1300-9/125-P-40-3-3.0-1-45-LD-PS. 3


LASER DIODE TO FIBER COUPLER – PIGTAIL STYLE 

Features: 

• Proven design and manufacture 

• Variety of standard packaging options 

• 400nm to 1625nm 

• Single mode, multimode or polarization maintaining fiber 

• Rugged design 

Applications: 

• Fiber Optic Communications 

• Optical Alignment Systems 

• Process Control 

• Optical Sensor Applications 

• Medical Apparatus 

• Imaging Systems 

• Test and measurement systems 


OZ Optics offers a complete line of laser diode to fiber couplers, offering optimum coupling in a small, 

rugged package. They may be purchased prealigned, with the diode already in place, or as a kit that 

can be assembled by the customer using their own diode. The complete assembly procedure is quite 

straightforward, and can be done in less than twenty minutes. A complete alignment kit, which includes 

tools and video instructions, is available seperately. 

Laser diode source couplers are available for a variety of diode case sizes, and for diode wavelengths 

from 400nm to greater than 1650nm. These source couplers work with multimode, singlemode, and 

polarization maintaining fiber. One advantage of the design is should the diode ever fail, it can easily 

be replaced while reusing the rest of the optics. The device can then be realigned for optimum 

coupling. There are two versions of tilt adjustable laser diode to fiber couplers - receptacle style 

couplers, and pigtail style couplers. Pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers are offered with the fiber 

pigtailed directly onto the coupler. The pigtail style laser diode to fiber coupler provides higher coupling 

efficiencies and lower backreflection levels than receptacle style couplers, as well as better stability. 

The output fiber can be terminated with different output connectors, as desired. 

Laser diode to fiber couplers are available in different diameters. The standard diameter package is 

0.79" in diameter. This size fits almost all standard laser diode packages. The larger 1.3" diameter 

housing provides best coupling efficiencies as it permits a wider selection of coupling optics. This 

housing size is also used with large diode case sizes, such as TO-3 (H1) package sizes. A smaller 

0.59" diameter housing is available for diode can sizes 9.0mm in diameter or smaller. For diodes with 

can diameters of 5.6mm or less, a miniature 0.5" diameter tilt adjustable housing is possible. 

LDPC-01 

LDPC-02 

LDPC-03 

LDPC-04 

One misconception about tilt adjustable laser diode couplers is the belief that the number of tilt and 

locking screws make the coupler sensitive to temperature or vibration. In fact, tilt adjustable source 

couplers can be used over a temperature range of -25°C to 60°C, and have been vibration tested. 

Higher temperature versions are available on request. 

OZ Optics also offers a special, low cost, miniature pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers for OEM 

applications. These packages use just a single lens to couple light from the laser diode into the fiber. 

They do not use OZ Optics tilt adjustment technique. This package features a compact, rugged 

housing, at a significantly lower cost. The housing diameter is typically 10mm. Coupling efficiency into 

singlemode and multimode fibers is typically 10 percent and 35 percent, respectively. 

LDPC-05 

A variety of options are available for laser diode to fiber couplers. One such option is a coupler with a 

built in isolator. Isolators can reduce the effects of backreflection by up to 60dB. This is very useful for 

applications where the intensity and wavelength stability of the output light from the diode are critical. 

Another option is a blocking screw to attenuate the output beam. This allows the user to precisely 

control the output power entering the fiber, without having to change the diode current. Laser diode to 

fiber couplers with polarizers or polarization rotators in the middle are also available. 

LDPC-06 




A customer needs to couple light from a 1310nm laser diode into a 9/125 SM fiber. They require 35% coupling and want to do the alignment 

themselves. 


XXXX LDPC-01-1310-9/125-S-40-3S-3-1-35-5LD 1310nm laser diode to SM fiber coupler (33mm OD housing) with a FC 

receptacle, 35% coupling efficiency from a 1310nm laser diode into a 9/125, 

singlemode fiber. 

9587 ALIGN-01/4-NTSC-IRVIS Alignment kit for laser diode to fiber couplers with 4mm OD pigtails. The kit 

includes a collimating wrench; 4mm OD lensed multimode fiber assembly, 

instruction manual and an instructional video (NTSC format). 





(NRE) charges, lot charges, and/or a 10 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, 

so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 


Please fill out the Laser Diode to Fiber Coupler Delivery System Questionnaire, available seperately. 

Pigtail Style Laser Diode to Fiber Coupler 

LDPC-0A-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L-C-(OPT) 

A = Package size 1 : 1 = 0.79" OD cylindrical housing 

2 = 1.31" OD cylindrical housing 



5 = OEM 10mm OD cylindrical housing 

6 = OEM Rt. Angle PCB mountable housing 

W =Wavelength 2 : 400, 635, 650, 670, 685, 750, 780, 810, 830, 

850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1480, 1550, 1625. 

a/b = Fiber core/cladding diameters (in µm) 

F = 

M = Multimode 



LB =Backreflection level: 25 = 25dB return loss 

40 = 40dB return loss 


C = Coupling Efficiency 3 : 30 = 30% 

45 = 45% 

75 = 75% 


JD = Jacket Diameter: 

0.25 = 250µm buffered fiber 

0.4 = 400µm buffered fiber 

1 = 900µm jacketed fiber 

3 = 3mm OD Kevlar etc. 

X = Connector Receptacle: 2.5U = 2.5mm 

universal receptacle (for FC, ST, or SC). 

3 = FC/PC 



5 = SMA905 

8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 

SCA = SCA 

1 Note that due to limitations in the size of the laser diode being used, not all package sizes are available for every laser diode. 

2 These are standard center wavelength values. The tolerance may vary depending on both wavelength and the laser diode manufacturers tolerance. 

(typically ±5nm to as high as ±30nm). 

3 Note that due to variations in the optical characteristics of the laser diode being used, not all coupling efficiencies are available for every laser 

diode for every fiber type. 

Options: Add "-ISOL" if the laser diode is to be coupled through an optical isolator. 

Add "-DR" If OZ Optics is to provide the laser diode driver circuit or module for the laser diode. 

Add "-PS" if OZ Optics is to provide the power supply to operate the laser diode driver. 

Add "-#LD" if OZ Optics is to provide the laser diode (where # is the LD output power, IE: -5LD). 

Add "-BL" If OZ Optics is to provide a manual blocking screw to control the laser diode output power. 

Add “-PO” if OZ Optics is to supply parts as a kit, for customer to install the laser diode. 

Add “-CSP” for customer supplied laser diodes 

4


LASER DIODE TO FIBER DELIVERY SYSTEMS FOR ACUPUNCTURE 

OZ Optics introduces a laser diode to fiber 

delivery system, housed in a compact, rugged 

pocket size housing. It can be either battery 

operated, or powered by an optional AC to DC 

converter. The system could be used for laser 

acupuncture treatments. Users must first 

comply with FDA regulations. 

The delivery system uses a 635nm visible laser 

diode, complete with a drive circuit and power 

supply, to couple light into a fiber. A fiber is 

attached to the diode, and the output end of the 

fiber has a collimating lens attached, to give a 

tightly collimated beam. Fiber splitters are also 

available, to divide the light from the diode into 

multiple output beams. 

The diode source comes in an attractive pocket 

size housing, complete with an optional belt clip, 

to give the operator maximum mobility during 

treatment. Delivery systems with up to 25mW 

of 635nm output power are available on 

request. Contact OZ Optics for further details. 


Part Number Description 

FODL-23-635-a/b-P Pocket size 635nm laser diode delivery system with Super FC/PC receptacle. 

PROBE-a/b-L Fiber probe with 0.4mm collimating lens. 

AC-9VDC 

Universal 110 or 220V AC to DC adaptor. 

Where: 

P is the output power of the diode source in milliwatts (mW). The standard output 

power is less than or equal to 1mW (CDRH class II rating). Delivery systems with 

up to 25mW output power are available. Contact OZ Optics for details. 

a,b are the fiber core and cladding diameters respectively, in microns Standard 

sizes are 4/125, 9/125, 25/125, etc. 


Note: We recommend the use of an AC adapter for units larger than 1mW. Proper eye protection is also 

required for units above 1mW. 

Example: A customer wants to order a 635nm, 12 mW laser diode source, with a 3 meter long 25/125 

multimode fiber probe. OZ Optics part number: FODL-23-635-25/125-12 for the diode source, 

PROBE-25/125-3 for the fiber with lens. 

WARNING: 

Laser diode sources emit visible laser radiation. Do not stare directly into the output beam. 

The FODL system is designed solely as an OEM component for incorporation into the customer's 

end products. Therefore it does not comply with the appropriate requirements of FDA 21 CFR, 

Sections 1040.10 and 1040.11 for complete laser products. 

The complete laser product manufacturer is responsible for complying with these requirements. 

These products are not to be used for clinical applications without first complying with FDA 

regulations. 

DTS0046 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. Oct-99


LASER TO FIBER COUPLER WITH ADJUSTABLE FOCUS 

Features: 

• Precision focus adjustment 

• Excellent coupling efficiency 

• Wide wavelength ranges 

• Rugged, simple design 

• Easy to install and adjust 

Applications: 


• Laboratory applications 

• Education and training 

• Visual laser alignment for manufacturing 

• Medical, pharmaceutical, and chemical sensors 

• Fluorescence measurements 

• OEM laser systems 

• Tunable lasers 

• Laser shows and entertainment 

Laser To Fiber Coupler With Adjustable Focus 


• Coupling Efficiency: Typically >70% for singlemode and 

polarization maintaining fibers, 

>90% for multimode fibers 

• Backreflection Levels: >40dB 

>60dB versions are also available 

• Polarization Extinction Ratios: >20dB 

25dB and 30dB versions are also 

available 


• Power Handling: >1 Watt CW for GRIN lenses 

>10 Watts CW for aspheric lenses 

>5 Watts CW for achromats 

>100 Watts CW for fused silica or 

sapphire plano-convex and biconvex 

lenses 

Patchcord With Adjustable Connector 


Adjustable focus source couplers are ideal for situations where optimum 

coupling efficiency is critical. A special connector allows the spacing 

between the fiber and lens to be precisely controlled without rotating the 

fiber. This allows one to compensate for any changes in wavelength or 

beam waist location, thus further optimizing the coupling efficiency. 

Adjustable focus couplers are available with a variety of lens types and 

fiber types. Internal surfaces are angle polished and/or AR coated to 

minimize backreflection. Typical backreflection levels are -40dB. -60dB is 

available for certain options. OZ Optics also sells fiber patchcords with 

adjustable FC/PC connectors only. Contact OZ Optics for details. 

Figure 1: Operating Principle Of Adjustable Focus 



A research lab in North America needs to launch light from a Argon-Ion laser, emitting light at 488 and 514nm, into a singlemode fiber. The laser 

beam diameter is 1mm. The laser does not have any provisions for mounting optics, so a post mount will be used in front of the laser. The 

patchcord needs to be at least, 2 meters long, and with an FC/PC connector on the other end. An alignment kit is ordered to help in aligning the 

optics. 


14160 HPUC-2A3A-400/700-S-6AC-11 Non-Contact style laser to SM fiber coupler for 400-700nm, with an adjustable angle FC 

compatible receptacle, f=6mm achromatic lens and post mount adapter 

12538 QSMJ-A3A,3S-488-3.5/125-3-2 2 meter long, 3mm OD PVC jacketed 3.5/125µm 488nm high power SM fiber patchcord, 

terminated with an adjustable FC/PC connector on one end, and a Super FC/PC connector on 

the other end. 

11671 START-0A3A-NTSC-IRVIS Alignment kit for laser to fiber couplers with adjustable angle FC/APC compatible receptacles. 

The kit includes a MM patchcord and a instructional video (NTSC format). For 400-1600nm 

applications. 

Ordering Information: 

Coupler With Adjustable Focus: 



A3 for adjustable FC 

A3A for adjustable FC/APC 



For achromats for wavelengths specify 

400/700 

Laser Head Adapter 

1 for 1”-32TPI Male Threaded Adapter 


square 



adapters 

Fiber Type: 




Lens ID: See Lens Selection Guide 3 for 

Non - Contact couplers with receptacles in the 

Laser to Fiber Coupler Application Notes 

Adjustable Patchcords: 

FMJ-X,Y-W-a/b-JD-L(-A) 

Fiber Type: 




QM for High Power Multimode 

QS for High Power Singlemode 

QP for High Power PM 


A3 = Adjustable Flat NTT-FC 

A3S = Adjustable Super NTT-FC/PC 

A3U = Adjustable Ultra NTT-FC/PC 

A3A = Adjustable Angled NTT-FC/PC 

X = Unterminated End 

See table 6 of the standard tables for other 

connectors 



For Multimode fibers specify either UVVIS for 

ultraviolet/visible wavelengths or IRVIS for 

visible/infrared wavelengths. 

A = Alignment (Polarization maintaining 

patchcords only) 

0 = unaligned and rotatable 

1 = slow axis of the fiber aligned with 

respect to the key and locked 


Fiber Jacket Type:1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket 


PVC cable 

See Table 7 of the Standard Tables for other jacket 

sizes 

Fiber Core/Cladding Sizes in Microns: 


See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables for other 

standard fiber sizes. 

NOTE: 

To determine the best laser to fiber source coupler for your application please complete a Laser to Fiber Delivery System 

Questionnaire. OZ Optics will then recommend a coupler system based on your response. 

Unit prices for couplers are approximately $450USD for typical applications with delivery being between 2 and 4 weeks after 

receiving your order (ARO). Unit prices for adjustable patchcords are $190USD for each adjustable connector plus the fiber 

price. Delivery is 2 - 4 weeks, ARO. Quantity discounting and blanket orders can be arranged. Contact OZ for more 

information. 

3


LASER TO FIBER COUPLER WITH ATTENUATOR OR SHUTTER 

FEATURES: 

• High Power Handling 


• Polarization Insensitive Attenuator/Shutter 

• Wide Attenuation Range 

• Manual and Electrically Controlled Versions 

• Different Connector Receptacles 

APPLICATIONS: 

• Power Setting 

• Safety Interlocks 

• Colour Balancing 


• Medical, Pharmaceutical, and Chemical Sensors 

• Interferometric Sensors 


• Laser Shows/Entertainment 


• Coupling Efficiency: 

• Backreflection: 

Typically >55% for singlemode and 



-14dB for receptacle style couplers using 

flat finish connectors 

-60dB for receptacle style couplers using 

angle finish connectors 

-25dB for LPSC-01 style pigtailed source 

couplers 

-40dB or -60dB for LPSC-03 style pigtailed 

source couplers 

• Polarization Extinction Ratio: >20dB 

25dB, 30 dB version are also available 

• Available Wavelengths: 

• Power Handling: 

• Attenuation Range: 

• Resolution: 

• Interface: 

180 - 2000nm 

Up to 3 Watts for singlemode applications 

Over 100 Watts for multimode applications 

0 to 60dB 

0.05dB 

Manual/Current Drive/RS-232/SPI/I 2 C 

LASER TO FIBER COUPLER WITH ELECTRICALLY 

CONTROLLED ATTENUATOR 

LASER TO FIBER COUPLER WITH ELECTRICALLY 

CONTROLLED SHUTTER 


OZ Optics offers source to fiber couplers with built in attenuators or 

shutters. These couplers provide a precise method to control the 

intensity of light through a fiber. They are available in both 

receptacle style and pigtail style. 

Source couplers are available with both manual and electrically 

controlled attenuators. In the manual version, the beam from the 

laser is partially blocked by a precision blocking screw. Adjusting 

the screw controls how much light reaches the fiber. In the 

electrically controlled version, a stepper motor controls the amount 

of attenuation. It includes a homing sensor to calibrate the 

attenuator against. 

The stepper motor is available with several options for control. The 

basic model provides direct access to the motor as well as logic 

level output for the HOME sensor. The -DR option adds a high 

speed driver circuit that accepts four logic level signals to control the 

motor. Finally, the -MC option features an embedded 

microcontroller. These units are addressable and accept RS232, 

SPI, and I 2 C protocols. 

The shutter accepts a +12V supply to block or transmit the beam. 

This shutter is normally closed until voltage is applied. This makes it 

ideal for safety interlocks. A manual switch is also on the shutter. 

The shutter response speed is under 20 milliseconds. Shutters with 

foot pedal control are also available. 

OZ Optics can also provide shutters with a safety interlock function 

on the fiber connection. If the fiber is disconnected from the coupler, 

the shutter will close automatically. Contact OZ Optics for more 

information. 



RECEPTACLE STYLE SOURCE COUPLERS: 

HPUC-2X-W-F-f-LH-B (-G-V-I) 


3 for FC, Super FC/PC, Ultra FC/PC 


3AF for Flat angled FC 

8 for AT&T-ST, Super ST, Ultra ST 

5 for SMA905, SMA906 

See Tables 6 of the Standard Tables for other 

connectors 



Fiber Type: 




Lens Focal Length and Type: 

See Lens Selection Guide 3 for Non-Contact 

Style Couplers in the Laser to Fiber Coupler 

Application Notes 

Laser Head Adaptor 



Square 


See Table 8 of the Standard Tables for Other 

Adapters 

PIGTAIL STYLE SOURCE COUPLERS: 

LPSC-0A-W-a/b-F-f-LB-LH-X-JD-L-B(-G-V-I) 

Interface (Motorized Attenuator only): 

PC for Base Model 

DR for High Speed Driver 

MC/SPI for Intelligent SPI Interface 

MC/IIC for Intelligent I 2 C Interface 


Stepper Motor Voltage 

(Motorized Attenuator only): 6 or 12 Volts 

Gear Ratio (Motorized Attenuator Only): 

485:1 Standard 

76:1 for Fast Speed 

Other ratios include 141:2, 

262:1, and 900:1 

Attenuation Technique: 

BL for Manual Blocking Screw 

SH for Electronicaly Controlled Shutter 

DD for Electronically Controlled Attenuator 

Coupler Type: 

1 for Contact Style 

3 for Non-Contact Style 





See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables for 


Fiber Type: 




Lens Focal Length and Type 

See Lens Selection Guide 1 for Pigtail Style 

Source Couplers in the Laser to Fiber 



25dB (Contact Style) 

40, 50, or 60dB (Non-contact style) 

60dB versions standard only for 1300 and 

1550nm wavelengths. Contact OZ before 

specifying other wavelengths 

Connector Code: 3S=Super NTT-FC/PC 



8=AT&T-ST 

SC=SC 

SCA=Angled SC 


Connectors 

Interface (Motorized Attenuator only): 

PC for Base Model 

DR for High Speed Driver 

MC/SPI for Intelligent SPI Interface 

MC/IIC for Intelligent I 2 C Interface 


Stepper Motor Voltage 

(Motorized Attenuator Only): 6 or 12 Volts 

Gear Ratio (Motorized Attenuator Only): 

485:1 Standard 

76:1 for Fast Speed 

Other ratios include 141:2, 

262:1, and 900:1 

Attenuation Technique: 

BL for Manual Blocking Screw 

SH for Electronicaly controlled Shutter 

DD for Electronically Controlled Attenuator 




3=3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC 

cable 


jacket sizes 

Note: 


Questionnaire. OZ Optics will then recommend a coupler based on your response. 

Unit prices range from $350USD to $1000USD for standard applications with delivery being between 4 and 8 weeks after 

receiving your order. Quantity discounting and blanket orders can be arranged. Contact OZ for more information.


LASER TO FIBER COUPLER WITH RECEPTACLE 

(NON-CONTACT STYLE) 

FEATURES: 

• Low Cost 

• High Power Handling 

• Wide Range of Lenses 

• Excellent Polarization Maintaining Capabilities 

• Different Connector Receptacle Versions 

• Wide Wavelength Ranges 

APPLICATIONS: 




• Fluorescence Measurements 




• Coupling Efficiency: Typically >60% into singlemode or 



• Backreflection Levels: Typically -14dB with standard 

connectors 

Typically 20dB 

25, 30dB versions are also available 

• Power Handling: >1 Watt CW for GRIN lenses, 

>10 Watt CW for aspheric lenses 


>100 Watts CW for fused silica or 

sapphire plano-convex and biconvex 

lenses 


In non-contact style source couplers, an air gap exists between the fiber 

and the lens. This design is more flexible, allowing a wide range of lens 

types and focal lengths to be used. The distance between the fiber and 

the lens can be adjusted to compensate the changes in the source 

wavelengths or to intentionally defocus the laser beam to prevent arcing 

in high power laser to multimode fiber applications. Couplers using 

GRIN lenses, achromats, aspheres, fused silica, plano-convex, and biconvex 

lenses have all been made utilizing this design. 

Non-contact style couplers can handle input powers of up to 100W CW, 

and even higher energies from pulsed sources. They are best suited for 

applications where either the input energy is higher than 400mW, or 

when more than one wavelength is to be coupled into the fiber, or for 

input beams that have unusually large beam diameters or divergence 

angles. They also have superior polarization maintaining capabilities 

compared to physical contact style couplers. However because of the 

09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 

CONNECTOR POLISH STYLES 

air gap between the fiber and the lens, the 

backreflection level for the endface of the fiber is about 

-14dB. This can be reduced to -40dB to -60dB by 

slant polishing both fiber ends to deflect the 

backreflected signal. 

There is a significant variation in the endface 

geometries of angled PC (APC) connectors. This 

effects the spacing between the endface of the fiber 

and the lens. To minimize this variation, OZ Optics 

offers an angled flat (AFC) connector. This connector 

features a beveled endface where the fiber itself is 

angled but the ferrule tip is flat. This geometry 

provides optimum repeatability between connections.



3 for FC, Super FC/PC, Ultra FC/PC 


3AF for Flat Angled FC 

5 for SMA 905 

8 for AT&T-ST 

8U for Ultra AT&T-ST 

SC for SC 


connectors 





1 for 1”-32TPI Male Threaded Adapter 


square 



adapters 

Lens ID: See Lens Selection Guide 3 for 

Non - Contact couplers with receptacles in the 

Laser to Fiber Coupler Application Notes 

Fiber Type: 




STANDARD COUPLERS: 

OZ OPTICS PART NUMBER BAR CODE NUMBER OZ OPTICS PART NUMBER BAR CODE NUMBER 

HPUC-23-400/700-S-3.5AC-1 3793 HPUC-23-400/700-S-3.5AC-2 3802 

HPUC-23-400/700-S-6AC-1 3794 HPUC-23-400/700-S-6AC-2 3803 

HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-10AC-1 3795 HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-10AC-2 3804 

HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-3.5AC-1 3796 HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-3.5AC-2 3082 

HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-6AC-1 3797 HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-6AC-2 3805 

HPUC-23-400/700-S-10AC-1 3798 HPUC-23-400/700-S-10AC-2 3806 

HPUC-23-325-S-5BQ-1 3799 HPUC-23-325-S-5BQ-2 3807 

HPUC-23-325-S-10BQ-1 3800 HPUC-23-325-S-10BQ-2 3808 

NOTE: 


Questionnaire. OZ Optics will then recommend a coupler based on your response.


FEATURES: 

• Low Cost 

• Easy to Install and Adjust 

• Rugged, Compact, Simple Design 

• Good Coupling Efficiency 

• Different Connector Receptacles 

• Adjustable Output Power 


APPLICATIONS: 


• Laboratory Applications 

• Education and Training 

• Visual Laser Alignment for Manufacturing 

• Medical, Pharmaceutical and Chemical Sensors 





• Coupling Efficiency: Typically >55% for singlemode 

and polarization maintaining 

fibers, 


• Backreflection Levels: Typically -25dB 

• Polarization Extinction Ratio: Typically 20dB 

LASER TO FIBER COUPLERS WITH RECEPTACLES 

(PHYSICAL CONTACT STYLE) 

• Available Wavelengths: Optimized for 488, 514, 532, 

543, 633, 830, 1300, 1550 and 

1625nm 

• Power Handling: Up to 250mW for 633-1550nm 

Up to 10mW for 488-543nm 


Physical contact source couplers are the most economical type of 

laser to fiber source couplers. A Graded Index (GRIN) lens is used 

to focus the light into the fiber. The fiber is butted directly against the 

endface of the lens thus ensuring that the laser beam is properly 

focused onto the end of the fiber. A special version is available for 

use with unterminated (bare) fibers. 

By using index matching gel on the end of the fiber, 

backreflection levels are reduced to -25dB. This 

technique should only be used for low power lasers 

and 633-1625nm wavelengths. Gel is not 

recommended for 488-543nm wavelengths. The 

couplers are optimized for a specific wavelength which 

is specified when ordering. Backreflection is 

approximately -15dB when gel is not used. 



HUC-1X-W-F-f-LH 


1 for Bare Fibers 

3 for FC, Super FC or Ultra FC 

8 for AT&T-ST, Super ST or Ultra ST 

5 for SMA 905 


receptacles. 



Fiber Type: 




Laser Head Adaptor: 

1 = 1”-32TPI Male Threaded Adaptor 

2 = Disk Adaptor with 4 holes on a 1” 

square 

11 = Post Mount Adaptor 


adaptors. 

Lens Type: 

1.8GR for beam sizes < 0.5mm 

2.6GR for beam sizes between 0.5mm and 1mm 

Use Non-contact style couplers for beam sizes 

larger than 1mm. 

Note: Add -BL to the part number if a manually adjustable attenuator is to be added. 

STANDARD COUPLERS: 

OZ Optics Part Number 

Bar Code Number 

HUC-13-633-S-1.8GR-1 3785 

HUC-13-633-S-1.8GR-2 3786 

HUC-13-633-S-2.6GR-1 3787 

HUC-13-633-S-2.6GR-2 3788 

HUC-15-633-M-2.6GR-1 3789 

HUC-15-633-M-2.6GR-2 3790 

HUC-18-633-S-2.6GR-1 3791 

HUC-18-633-S-2.6GR-2 3792 

RECEPTACLE STYLE PHYSICAL CONTACT SOURCE COUPLER 

BARE FIBER SOURCE COUPLER 

NOTE: 



Unit prices range from $100USD to $230USD for standard items with delivery being from stock to within 2 weeks of receiving 

your order. Quantity discounting and blanket orders can be arranged. Contact OZ for more information.


PIGTAIL STYLE LASER TO FIBER COUPLERS 

FEATURES: 

• Rugged, Compact, Stable Design 

• Low Backreflection 

• Low Cost 

• Environmentally Stable 

• Excellent Coupling Efficiency 

• Excellent Polarization Maintaining Capabilities 


• Adjustable Output Power 

APPLICATIONS: 








• Coupling Efficiency: Typically >60% into 

Singlemode or Polarization 

Maintaining fibers, 

>80% for Multimode fibers 

• Backreflection Levels: Typically -25dB for Physical 

Contact style, -40dB for Non- 

Contact style. -60dB versions 

are also available 

• Polarization Extinction Ratios: >20dB 

25dB and 30dB versions are 

also available 


• Power Handling: >1 Watt CW for GRIN lenses, 

>10 Watts CW for aspheric lenses 


>100 Watts CW for fused 

silica or sapphire plano-convex 

and biconvex lenses 


Pigtail style source couplers are recommended for permanent or semipermanent 

situations, where optimum coupling efficiency, output stability, and 

minimum backreflection are desired. In these couplers the fibers are 

permanently glued to the focusing lens. The fiber-lens assembly is then 

inserted into the tilt adjustment flange, and held in place with two radial set 

screws. 

Because the fiber is permanently attached to the lens, the fiber cannot be 

replaced without also replacing the coupling lens. 

Pigtail style couplers are manufactured in both contact (LPSC-01) 

model and non-contact (LPSC-03) model versions. For contact style 

pigtailed couplers, the backreflection level is typically -25dB. In the 

case of non-contact style couplers, the internal endface of the fiber 

is polished at an angle to reduce backreflection. Non-contact pigtail 

style couplers are available with up to -40dB or -60dB backreflection 

levels. 



LPSC-0A-W-a/b-F-f-LH-LB-X-JD-L 

Coupler Type: 



Fiber Type: 

1 for Contact Style 

3 for Non-Contact Style 



See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables for 





Lens Type: See the Lens Selection Guide 1 

for Pigtail Style Source Couplers in the Laser 

to Fiber Coupler Application Notes 




square 

11 Post Mount Adapter 


adapters 





3=3mm OD Kevlar reinforced 

PVC cable 

See Table 7of the Standard Tables for other jacket 

sizes 




8 = AT&T-ST 

8S = Super AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 



connectors 


40, 50, or 60dB 

60dB versions standard only for 1300 and 1550nm 

wavelengths. Contact OZ before specifying other 

wavelengths. 

Note: Add “ -ER=30” or “-ER=25” to the part number for 30dB or 25dB extinction ratios (For 1300nm and 1550nm only). 

Add “-BL” to the part number if a manually adjustable attenuator is to be added. 

NOTE: 



Unit prices range from $250USD to $400USD for typical applications with delivery being from stock to within 2 weeks of 

receiving your order. Quantity discounting and blanket orders can be arranged. Contact OZ for more information.


MANUALLY ADJUSTABLE POLARIZATION INSENSITIVE TUNABLE FILTERS 

Features: 

• Narrow linewidth 



• Singlemode, multimode, and polarization maintaining fiber versions 


Applications: 

• Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) 

• Tunable sources 

• Spectral analysis 





Manually Adjustable Tunable Filter 

Tunable filters consist of a collimating optical assembly, an adjustable narrow bandpass filter, and a focusing optical assembly to collect the light 

again. Tunable filters are available in three versions - a manually adjustable version, a motor driven version for OEM applications, and a digital 

version with a display and computer interface. 

The manual tunable filter is a pigtailed component with a rotating stage that allows for the manual adjustment of the angle of incidence between the 

beam and the filter. The filter works based on the principle that by adjusting the angle of incidence between the filter and the incident beam one 

controls the wavelength at which the filter transmits. 

Filter linewidths are normally defined in terms of Full Width at Half Maximum (FWHM). The standard filter used in tunable filters has a smooth, 

rounded transmission spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. A Fabry Perot cavity is simply made up of two reflectors 

separated by a fixed spacer of some thickness. Other filter designs are available. For instance, flat top bandpass filters are made by stacking 

multiple cavities together. By increasing the number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore improving the out-of-band rejection 

level. For more information on custom filters please contact OZ Optics. 

OZ Optics tunable filters now utilize a new optical technique to control Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL). This new design reduces PDL to 

below 0.3dB, while at the same time making the spectral response polarization insensitive. This feature makes it ideal for today's DWDM system 

applications. 

Tunable filters using singlemode, multimode and Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers are offered. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization 

maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can 

construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for 

availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. 

Figure 1: Manually Adjustable Tunable Filter 



A customer wants to use a broadband source as a manual tunable source in order to test the spectral characteristics of optical 

components at different wavelengths. Both the light source and components have FC/PC receptacles and the wavelength region 

of interest for the components is throughout the C-band. The broadband source is polarized randomly and therefore the tunable 

source required should be polarization insensitive. 

The component required for this application is a polarization insensitive manual tunable filter. With this filter connected to the 

broadband light source and by adjusting the angle at which the beam is incident on the filter the transmitted wavelength from the 

broadband source can be tuned from 1520 to 1570nm. 


13553 TF-11-11-1520/1570-9/125-S-40-3S3S-3-1-1.2 Polarization insensitive manual tunable filter in U-bracket for 1520-1570nm 

with 1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 40dB return loss, 

super FC/PC connectors and standard 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot filter. 






quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products 


1. What wavelength range are you interested in? 

2. What linewidth do you require? 

3. What type of fiber is being used? Singlemode, multimode or PM fiber? 

4. Are you using a polarized or randomly polarized light source? 

5. What return losses are acceptable in your system? 

6. What connector types are you using? 

7. What fiber length and jacket diameter do you need? 

TF-11-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-LW 

W: Wavelength range in nanometers: 

Example: 1520/1570 

a/b: Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns: 

9/125 for 1300/1550nm Corning SMF28 

fiber8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM 


F: Fiber type: 

M=Multimode 

S=Singlemode 


LB: Backreflection level: 40, 50 or 60dB for 

singlemode or PM fibers only. 

(60dB for 1290 to 1620nm wavelength 

ranges only) 


LW: FWHM linewidth in nm. Standard filter is a 

Fabry Perot. For a flat top profile filter, add the 

letter F to the end of the number 

L: Fiber length in meters 

JD: Fiber Jacket type: 


3=3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable 

X,Y: Input & Output Connector codes: 




8=AT&T-ST 

SC=SC 

SCA=Angled SC 

LC=LC 

LCA=Angled LC 

MU=MU 



Example 1: 

A customer wants to reduce the ASE noise and manually tune the transmitted wavelength for a special broadband light source between 

the C and L bands, 1550 to 1600nm, with a very narrow linewidth. 

A custom version of the manually tunable filter will meet this requirement with a narrow linewidth custom filter used in the component. 


N/A TF-11-11-1550/1600-9/125-S-50-3U3U-3-1-0.3 Polarization insensitive manual tunable filter for 1550-1600nm with 1 meter 

long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 50dB return loss and ultra 

FC/PC connectors. Custom 0.3nm FWHM Fabry Perot filter. 

3


MEMS VARIABLE OPTICAL ATTENUATORS SINGLE/MULTI-CHANNEL 

Features: 

• Small size, low cost 

• Single channel up to 8 channels per module for MEMS VOA arrays and up to 

40 channels for MEMS VOA with electronic drivers 

• Standard or custom arrays. 

• Continuous attenuation control for each channel. 

• Integrated output power monitoring (optional). 

• Fast response. 

• Low insertion loss. 

• High dynamic range. 

• Flat wavelength response. 

• SM or PM fiber versions are available 

• Low power consumption 

• Very low crosstalk 

• High attenuation acuracy 

Preliminary 

Applications: 

• Active gain equalization in DWDM systems 

• Local power monitoring and feedback control 

• Power control into receivers 

• Gain tilt control in EDFAs 

• Channel balancing for optimizing transmission performance in longhaul 

and metro networks 

• Power balancing before modulation and multiplexing 

• Dynamic optical power control and channel equalization in add/drop 

multiplexers 

MEMS Variable Optical Attenuator 


OZ Optics Ltd. introduces a MEMS based variable optical attenuator (VOA) in a fast, low cost miniature package. The attenuators are available 

either in individual units or as an integrated array of separate attenuators, each with independent continuous control. The attenuation is controlled 

by a simple analog voltage input signal. Up to 8 attenuators can be incorporated into one module. Integrated optical power monitoring of each 

channel is available as an option. The combination of ease of control with integrated power monitoring makes the unit an attractive choice for 

DWDM optical networks, where automated control is essential. 

MEMS based VOAs using either singlemode or Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers are available. An ingenious manufacturing technique ensures 

optimum alignment of PM fibers while keeping assembly costs to minimal levels. This reduces costs dramatically. 

MEMS VOAs can be provided in 4 configurations: single channel; multi channel VOA arrays without any electronics; multi channel VOA arrays with 

0-5V drive electronics; and multi channel VOA arrays with 0-5V drive electronics and serial port communication interface. 

Dimensions are in milimeters 

Figure 1: Single Channel MEMS VOA 

Figure 2: 8 Channel MEMS VOA Module 

DTS0078 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 17-Jan-2005 1

MEMS Multichannel VOA 

C = Number of Channels: 

1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, or 40 

W = Wavelength 

Specify in nm 1550 for 1470 - 1620nm 

operating range (C, L, and S bands) 




a/b = Fiber core/cladding size, in microns 

9/125 for standard Corning SMF-28 


8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM 


Note: 1 


Part Number 

MMVOA-C-W-F-a/b-XY -JD -L(-M) 1 

Add -M to the part number to have integrated power monitoring added 

Add -DR to the part number to have integrated 0-5V drive electronics 

Add -DR/RS232 or DR/I 2 C to the part number to have integrated 0-5V drive 

electronics with serial interface 

A customer needs an eight channel, 1550nm PM MEMS VOA. The fibers on each side are 1 meter long, with 900 micron loose tube hytrel 

jacketing. The ends of the fibers are to be terminated with FC/APC connectors. The customer wants built in power monitoring. The part number 

and description are as follows: 

Description 

L = Fiber length, in meters on each side of 

the device: 

1 meter is standard. If the inputs and 

outputs are different lengths, then specify 

the input and output lengths with a comma. 

Example: To order 1 meter on the input, 

and 7 meters on the output, enter 1,7 for L 

in the part number. 

JD = Fiber Jacket Size: 

0.25 = 250µ OD acrylate coating (standard) 

1 = 900µ OD Hytrel Buffer (optional) 

X,Y = Input and Output Connector types 

3S = FC connector, Super PC finish 

3U = FC connector, Ultra PC finish 

3A = FC connector, Angled PC (APC) finish 

8 = AT&T-ST connector 

SC = SC connector, Super PC finish 

SCA = SC connector, Angled PC (APC) finish 

LC = LC connector 

MU = MU connector 


Note: All fibers on one side are terminated 

with one connector type. 

MMVOA-8-1550-P-8/125-3A3A-1-1-M 


MEMS Multichannel VOA, with eight channels. Each channel uses PM fiber for 

1550nm, 1 meter long on both ends, 900 micron loose tube hytrel jacketing, with 

FC/APC connectors on each end. Integrated power monitoring is included. 

Q: How does the integrated power monitoring work? 

A: Integrated power monitoring is achieved through the use of a unique tapping process and a photodiode. The output signal from the photodiode 

can be measured by a feedback circuit to control the attenuation. 


Application example: Load balancing on a WDM network 

As illustrated in figure 2, an eight channel wavelength multiplexed signal from a trunk line is demultiplexed into individual signals. The signals are of 

different intensities, and have to be balanced to avoid saturating any of the receivers. To do so, each channel is sent through a corresponding port 

on an eight channel MEMS VOA. The signal strength through the attenuator outputs is monitored by a control circuit. If the output signal on one 

channel gets too high or too low, the corresponding attenuator is adjusted to bring the light level to the correct range. The complete module is very 

compact. 

Figure 3: Using A MEMS VOA To Balance Signal Strengths In A WDM Network 

3


Features: 

• Singlemode, multimode, or polarization maintaining fibers 

• Easy to solder 

• Cleaved enfaces available 

• Unplated (masked) ends available 

• Mid-span plating available 


• Large volume manufacturing capacity 

• Custom configurations available 

METALIZED FIBERS 

Applications: 

• Hermetic feed-throughs 

• Integrated optics packaging 

• Diode pigtailing 

Metalized Fiber 


OZ Optics metalized fibers are specifically designed for optoelectronic packaging. The fiber is first coated with a layer of nickel to provide 

superior adhesion and a stable soldering base. The fiber is then plated with an overcoat layer of gold to provide resistance to oxidization. The 

result is a strong, uniform coating capable of handling the rigors of soldering and hermetic sealing. OZ Optics metalized fibers are well suited 

for use in assemblies that must conform to Telcordia requirements. If required, OZ Optics metalized fibers can be manufactured with masked 

ends. This process provides a clean, non-metalized fiber end suitable for termination with ceramic ferrules, fusion splicing or direct connection 

to a device. This allows for an easy transformation of devices into hermetically sealed packages. Also available are custom mid-span 

metalization of optical fibers and metalized ribbon fibers. The mid-span configuration provides a solution for hermetically sealing in-fiber devices 

such as Fiber Bragg Gratings, optical isolators or optical filters, as well as allowing larger package devices that exceed the length restrictions of 

standard metalized fibers. Metalization of ribbon fibers allows for easy hermetic sealing of multiple fibers into hermetic packages that require 

many fibers or are being used with V-Groove assemblies. 

OZ Optics metalized fibers are available with Singlemode, Multimode or Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers. PM fibers offer a means to 

control polarization of optical signals throughout the system thus controlling Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL) and Polarization Mode 

Dispersion (PMD). This control is crucial in developing high speed, 10 Gbs, 40 Gbs, and faster systems. In general, OZ Optics uses 

polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining 

components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber 

types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build 

devices. 

Figure 1: Metalized Bare Fiber 








Questionaire For Custom Parts: 

1. What type of fiber is required for your application? 

2. Do you need the fiber to be protected with 0.9mm loose tubing? 

3. What length of metalization is required? 

4. Is the metalization needed at the end of the fiber or another location along the length? 

5. If this is an end plating, do you require a bare length of fiber (masked region) at the end? 

6. Do you need the end of the fiber to be cleaved? 

7. What is the overall length of the fiber needed? 

8. Do you need a connector on the opposite end? 

9. What is the application that this fiber is being used for? 

F = Fiber Type 

M = Multimode 

S = Single Mode 


X = Connector Code 3S = Super FC 

3U = Ultra FC 

3A = Angle FC 

8 = ST 

SC = Super SC 


SCA = Angle SC 

MU = Super MU 

LC = Super LC 

LCA = Angle LC 

W = Wavelength, in nanometers 



a/b = Fiber core/cladding 

9/125 for Corning SMF-28 Singlemode fiber 




* Note: 1 PANDA style 1300nm or 1550nm fiber only 

MEFMJ-X-W-a/b-JD-A-B-E-L-(OPT) 

L = Overall Length in Meters 

E = Fiber Endface Finish 

0 = 0° cleave (Flat) 

8 = 8° cleave (Angled) 

X = No cleave 

B = Metalized fiber length in millimeters (for 

assemblies with full metalization, this number 

should match "A") 

A = Stripped fiber length in millimeters 


0.25 = 250 micron acrylate coating 

(standard bare fiber) 

0.40 = 400 micron acrylate coating (PM bare fiber) 

1 = 900µm Hytrel loose tube buffered fiber 

(standard bare fiber) 

OPT = Options (add if required) 

M = Mid-span plating 

ER = 30 for >30dB extinction ratio 1 

Ordering Examples For Custom Parts 

A customer needs to hermetically seal a 2 meter long length of PANDA style 1550nm PM fiber into a package. To do so he will solder into 

place a metalized fiber. The metalized fiber length needs to be 30mm long with only 20mm metalized, leaving 10mm of exposed bare fiber for 

attachment to his device, No fiber end finish is required. There is also a requirement for the fiber to be jacketed to 900 micron with an FC/APC 

connector. 


NEW MEPMJ-3A-1550-8/125-1-30-20-X-2 2 meter long, 0.9mm OD Jacketed 1550nm 8/125 Polarization Maintaining 

fiber patchcord with metalized tip on one end, Angle FC/PC connector on the 

other end. Strip length is 30mm, metalized length is 20mm, no ferrule or 

cleave on the end 

3

Features 


• Very small size 

• Low cost 

• Interchangeable optical receptacles available 

• Powered by replaceable batteries 

• Auto-off 


Applications 

• Fiber optic assembling and testing 


• Component and system troubleshooting 

• Education 

• General optical power measurement 

MINI OPTICAL POWER METER 


The OZ Optics POM-400 is a pocket-sized optical power meter 

covering a range of popular wavelengths. The ultra-compact 

size and user-friendly keypad makes it well suited to many user 

applications. Low power consumption allows extended 

operation in the field. 

POM-400 Optical Power Meter 

The POM-400 can accommodate a number of standard, 

interchangeable screw-in receptacles. The dynamic range 

exeeds 63 dB. Power levels from +3 dBm to as low as -60 dBm 

can be easily measured, with the values displayed in watts or 

dBm. The user may select any of three pre-set calibrated 

wavelengths. 

Measurement range 

-60 to +3 dBm 

Calibrated wavelengths 1550, 1490, 1310 

Detector type 

Display resolution 

InGaAs 

0.01 dB 

Accuracy (@ 23°C) ± 5% 

Measurement units 

Watts, dBm 


Available optical receptacles 

Universal receptacle for FC/SC/ST. FC receptacle also included. 

Dimensions Bar Code (L x W Part x H) Number Description 90 x 55 x 16 mm 

Weight 22519 POM-400-IR Optical 90 g with Power battery Meter calibrated at infrared wavelengths 1310/1490/1550 nm, -60 to +3dBm 

Power supply 

measurement 3 AAA 1.5 volt range. batteries Measurement units are in watts and dBm. Universal adaptor for 

FC/SC/ST connectors. FC/PC receptacle is included. Battery operated. 

Battery operating lifetime 

360 hours 

Temperature range: 

Operating 

Storage 

-10 to +60 °C 

-25 to +70 °C 


1


MINIATURE INLINE POLARIZATION MAINTAINING SPLITTERS/ 

TAPS/COMBINERS 

Features: 

• Rugged compact design 

• Broad wavelength range 



• Low return losses 

• Low Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) 

• Low Wavelength Dependent Loss (WDL) 

Applications: 

• EDFA amplifiers 

• Raman amplifier combiners 


• Polarization extinction ratio measurements 




OZ Optics’ miniature fiber optic beam splitters are used to split the light 

traveling through a fiber into two fibers, or to split or combine orthogonally 

polarized light into separate fibers. These splitters feature a rugged 

miniature housing to fit into compact spaces in equipment and systems. 

Light from a fiber is first collimated, then sent through a beamsplitting optic 

to divide it into two beams by either a fixed ratio or into two orthogonal 

polarizations. The resultant output beams are then coupled back into the 

output fibers. This flexible design allows one to manufacture splitters with 

different fiber types on the input and output ports. 

Miniature inline splitters are sold in two different configurations - a polarization 

maintaining splitter, with a fixed splitting ratio, and a polarizing splitter, to 

split and combine orthogonal polarizations. Their operating principles are as 

follows: 

Polarization Maintaining Splitters: Also known as optical taps, these 

splitters use a partially reflecting mirror to transmit a portion of the light from 

the input fiber to the main output fiber, and reflect the remainder of the light 

to the second output fiber. All ports made using polarization maintaining fiber 

are aligned so that polarized light aligned parallel to the stress rods on the 

input fiber emerge from the output fibers in the same manner, maintaining 

the polarization state to a high degree. The top drawing in Figure 2 shows 

the arrangement of the input and output ports. 

Splitters that only split off a small portion of the input light are commonly 

known as taps. These splitters are often used for power monitoring 

applications. The small signal, typically between one and ten percent, is 

sent to a monitoring photodiode, while the majority of the signal goes on to 

the main destination. For a very low cost alternative configuration, 

combining the functions of a tap and monitor photodiode in a single unit, we 

invite you to review our Inline Optical Taps and Monitors data sheet. 

Polarizing Splitters: Polarizing Beam Splitters split incoming light into two 

orthogonal states. They can also be used to combine the light from two 

fibers into a single output fiber. When used as a beam combiner, each input 

signal will transmit along a different output polarization axis. 

By default the output fibers on a polarizing splitter are aligned so that the 

output polarization from each fiber is in line with the stress rods of the fibers. 

Ø 0.12 [3.1] 

Miniature Inline Splitter 

Ø 0.19 [4.75] 

1.93 [49] 

1.38 [35] 

0.91 [23] 

Ø 0.22 [5.5] 

Dimensions are in inches [mm] 

Figure 1: Inline Splitter Dimensions 

Input Fiber 

Output Fiber 2 

Input Fiber 1 

50/50 or 96/4 

PBS 




Figure 2: Polarization Maintaining And 

Polarizing Splitter Configurations 

If the input fiber is a polarization maintaining (PM) fiber, 

the input fiber is aligned such that light polarized parallel 

to the fiber’s stress rods is transmitted to port 1 of the 

splitter, while light polarized perpendicular to the stress 

rods is transmitted to port 2 of the splitter. The bottom 

drawing in Figure 2 illustrates this. Because of OZ Optics’ 

modular design, the PM fiber configuration can be changed 

to whatever suits your needs. 

Splitters can be manufactured with different fibers on the 

input and output ports. For example, light from a 

singlemode fiber could be split into its two orthogonal states 

and then launched into two polarization maintaining fibers. 

Standard products for 1550 nm applications are readily 

available, while custom items can be made with rapid 

turnaround at low cost. Products for other wavelengths, 

such as 980 nm, 1300 nm, or 1480 nm are offered. Contact 

OZ Optics for details and a quotation. 


1


A customer requires a polarization maintaining tap to monitor the output power from a 1550 nm DFB laser diode with a PM output. The 

tap ratio needs to be 5% or smaller. The coupler has to exhibit the lowest possible insertion losses and return losses. Connectors are 

not required. 

Bar 

Code Part Number Description 

20408 FOBS-12N-111-8/125-PPP-1550-96/4-60-XXX-1-1 Miniature inline polarization maintaining splitter for 1550 nm, with a 96/4 splitting 

ratio, 60 dB return loss. The fibers on all ports are 1 meter long, 900 micron loose 

tube cabled PM fibers, with no connectors. 




particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases 

non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in 




2. What is the intensity of your signal? 

3. What is the input fiber type? 

4. What is the first output fiber type? 

5. What is the second output fiber type? 

6. What splitting ratio do you desire? Do you require a fixed splitting ratio or a polarizing splitter? 

7. Do you intend to use the unit as a splitter or as a combiner? 

8. What are your insertion loss requirements? 

9. What are your return loss requirements? 

10. How long should the fibers be on each port? 

11. Do you require uncabled fibers, or fibers protected with a 900 micron diameter loose tube cable? 

12. Do you need any connectors on the fibers? If so, what type? 

Description 

Miniature Inline Splitter 

Part Number 

FOBS-12N-111-a/b-ABC-W-S/R-LB-XYZ-JD-L 

a/b = 

ABC = Fiber Types on each port 

(input, output 1, output 2) 

M = Multimode 



W = 

Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns 






Wavelength:Specify in nanometers 



50/50, 96/4 Standard 



A 980nm polarizing beamsplitter is needed to combine the signal from two polarization maintaining fibers into one singlemode fiber. The 

two polarization maintaining fibers are to be terminated with FC/APC connectors, while the singlemode fiber is left unterminated. 

Standard return losses, insertion losses and jacket materials are acceptable. 

Part Number 

L = 

JD = 

LB = 

Description 





XYZ = Connector codes for each port 




LC = LC 

SC = SC 





30, 40, 50, or 60 dB 


1550 nm only 



FOBS-12N-111-6/125-SPP-980-PBS-40-X3A3A-1-1 

Miniature inline polarizing splitter/combiner for 980 nm, with 40 dB return loss. The input fiber is 

980 nm singlemode fiber with no connector while the two output fibers are both 980 nm PM fibers 

with angled NTT-FC/PC connectors. The fibers on all ports are 1 meter long and 900 micron 

loose tube cabled. 

3


MOTOR DRIVEN TUNABLE FILTERS 

Features: 

• Narrow Linewidth 

• Polarization Insensitive 


• Singlemode, Multimode, and Polarization Maintaining Fiber Versions 


• Built in Computer RS232 Interface 

• GPIB/RS232 Converter 

Applications: 

• Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing 

• Tunable Sources 

• Spectral Analysis 

• Quality Control and Measurement 

• Product Development 

• Fiber Optic Component Manufacturing 

• Automated Testing 

Motor Driven Tunable Filter 


Tunable filters consist of a collimating optical assembly, an 

adjustable narrow bandpass filter, and a focusing optical 

assembly to collect the light again. Tunable filters are 

available in three versions - a manually adjustable version, 

a motor driven version for OEM applications, and a digital 

version with a display and computer interface. 

The motor driven tunable filter is a pigtailed unit with a 

computer interface which has options for different 

communication standards. The device works on the 

principle that by adjusting the angle of incidence between 

the filter and the incident beam one controls the 

wavelength at which the filter transmits. The motor driven 

version is calibrated such that the user directly enters the 

wavelength to transmit via the computer interface. An 

RS232 interface with cable is standard. 

Filter linewidths are normally defined in terms of Full Width 

at Half Maximum (FWHM). The standard filter used in 

tunable filters has a smooth, rounded transmission 

spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type 

Figure 1. Motor Driven Tunable Filter 

cavity. A Fabry Perot cavity is simply made up of two 

reflectors separated by a fixed spacer of some thickness. 

Other filter profiles are available. For instance, flat top bandpass filters are made by stacking multiple cavities together. By increasing the 

number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore improving the out-of-band rejection level. For more information on custom 

filters please contact OZ Optics. 

OZ Optics tunable filters now utilize a new optical technique to control Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL). This new design reduces PDL 

to below 0.3dB, while at the same time making the spectral response polarization insensitive. This feature makes it ideal for today's DWDM 

system applications. 

Tunable filters using singlemode, multimode and Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers are offered. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization 

maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However OZ 

Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales 

department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. 



Computer Interface: 

Resolution: 

Tuning Range: 

Linewidth: 

PDL: 


Standard Wavelength Ranges: 

Power Handling: 

Response Time: 

Dimensions: 

Weight: 

Power Requirements: 

Repeatability: 

RS232. Other available options include IIC and SPI. 

As low as 0.1nm 

50nm 

1.1 ± 0.1nm over full tuning range is standard. As low as 0.3nm as an option. 

Typically less than 0.3dB 

Typically less than 2.0dB for complete device over full tuning range. 

S, C and L bands: 1470-1520nm, 1520-1570nm and 1570-1620nm 

Up to 200mW for standard package. 

50nm change in less than 1 sec. 1nm change in less than 0.1 sec. 

0.75” x 1.5” x 3.25” (2.0 3.8 x 8.5cm), (not including fibers) 

0.2lb (100g) 

Voltage: 5.0 volts for logic, 5 to 12 volts for motor 

Current: 57mA for logic supply, 160mA for motor with +12V Supply 

Typically better than ±0.2nm 

SAMPLE TEST DATA FOR TUNABLE FILTERS 

Wavelength (nm) PDL (dB) 

1520.04 0.30 

1530.00 0.20 

1539.96 0.10 

1550.04 0.15 

1560.00 0.30 

1569.96 0.30 


Figure 2: Typical Transmission Curves Of 1.2nm C-band Tunable Filters 

Bar Code Part Number 

Description 

10528 TF-100-11-1520/1570-9/125-S-40-3S3S-3-1-1.2-MC/RS232 Polarization insensitive motorized tunable filter for 1520-1570nm with 

1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 40dB return 

loss, super FC/PC connectors, built-in microcontroller with RS232 

interface and 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot shape filter. 

13546 TF-100-11-1520/1570-9/125-S-50-3U3U-3-1-1.2-MC/RS232 Polarization insensitive motorized tunable filter for 1520-1570nm with 


loss, ultra FC/PC connectors, built-in microcontroller with RS232 


13547 TF-100-11-1520/1570-9/125-S-60-3A3A-3-1-1.2-MC/RS232 Polarization insensitive motorized tunable filter for 1520-1570nm with 


loss, angled FC/PC connectors, built-in microcontroller with RS232 


13548 TF-100-11-1570/1620-9/125-S-40-3S3S-3-1-1.2-MC/RS232 Polarization insensitive motorized tunable filter for 1570-1620nm with 


loss, super FC/PC connectors, built-in microcontroller with RS232 


2

Motor Driven Tunable Filter: 

TF-100-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-LW-MC/I 

W = 

Wavelength range in nanometers: 

Example: 1520/1570 

I = Computer Interface: 

RS232 for RS232 

IIC for IIC 

SPI for SPI 

a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns: 

for 1300/1550 SM fiber use 9/125 

for 1550 Panda Style PM fiber use 8/125 

LW = Linewidth in nm. For a flat-top profile 

add the suffix “F” to the line width 

Example: -15F=15nm Flat Top Filter 


M=Multimode 

S=Singlemode 


LB = 40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or 

polarization maintaining units only (60dB for 

1290 to 1620nm wavelength ranges only) 

35dB for multimode units 


Example 1: 

L = Fiber length in meters (each side) 

JD = Fiber Jacket type: 


3=3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable 

A customer wants to select between channels in the C-band for a metro Coarse WDM (CWDM) system. Typical channel width is 15nm and 

a flat top, low ripple, polarization insensitive tunable filter is needed. 

Part Number 

TF-100-11-1520/1570-9/125-S-50-3U3U-3-1-15F-MC/RS232 

Example 2: 

Description 

Polarization insensitive motorized tunable filter for 1520-1570nm with 1 meter 

long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 50dB return loss, ultra FC/PC 

connectors and built-in microcontroller with RS232 interface and 15nm 

passband flat top filter. 

A customer wants to reduce the out of band noise of a polarized light source and tune the transmitted wavelength using a 0.3nm linewidth 

tunable filter. The component required for this application is a polarization maintaining motorized tunable filter. 

Part Number 

Description 

X,Y = Connector code: 




8=AT&T-ST 

SC=SC 

SCA=Angled SC 

LC=LC 

LCA=Angled LC 

MU=MU 


TF-100-11-1520/1570-8/125-P-40-3S3S-3-1-MC/RS232-0.3 Polarization maintaining motorized tunable filter for 1520-1570nm with 1 

meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 8/125 PM fiber pigtails, 40dB return loss, super 

FC/PC connectors, built-in microcontroller with RS232 interface and 0.3nm 

FWHM Fabry Perot shape filter. 


Q: What is the filter linewidth? 

A: The standard filter is a 1.2nm FWHM Fabry-Perot filter. This can be customized to suit the customer's requirements. 


A: Standard filters are specified by their Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM). This is the transmitted line width at -3dB from the peak 

transmission. For custom filters linewidths such as the passband at -0.3dB and -25dB can be specified. 

Q: What is the largest tuning range available? 

A: The standard tuning range is 50nm. However the filter can be set to operate over a 100nm tuning range with some effects on the 

linewidth and insertion loss in the lower wavelength (high angle of incidence) region. 

Q: What is a Fabry-Perot filter? Are there other types available? 

A: A Fabry-Perot filter has a smooth, rounded transmission spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. A Fabry Perot 

cavity is simply made up of two reflectors separated by a fixed spacer of some thickness. By adjusting the spacer thickness one can 

adjust the pass bandwidth of the filter. Other shapes of filters are available, flat top bandpass filters are made by stacking multiple 

cavities together. By increasing the number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore improving the out-of-band rejection 

level. For more information on custom filters available please contact OZ Optics. 

4


OPTICAL DELAY LINES 

Features: 

• Low loss 

• Sub-picosecond resolution 


• Over 300 psec delay range 


• Singlemode and polarization maintaining fiber versions 

• Electrically controlled versions available 

Applications: 

• PMD compensation in high speed communications networks 


• Coherent telecommunications 

• Spectrum analyzers 

Delay Line With Lead Screw (ODL-100) 


Fiber Optic Delay Lines (ODL) consist of an input and output fiber collimator to 

project the light into free space and collect it again into a fiber. The distance the light 

travels in free space is precisely controlled, either by controlling the separation 

between the input and output optics, or by reflecting the light off a movable reflector. 

In either case, by varying the distance the light travels, one can control the delay time 

through the device. 

Delay lines are offered using singlemode, multimode or Polarization Maintaining (PM) 

fibers. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the 

PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and 

patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber 

structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our 

sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer 

supplied fibers to build devices. 

Delay Line With Micrometer (ODL-200) 

Delay lines are offered in both manual or electrically controlled versions. Manual 

delay lines utilize either a lead screw or a micrometer to adjust the spacing. 

Electrically controlled versions utilize a servo motor with encoders to monitor the 

motion. With this device submicron resolution (


A customer is building a polarization mode dispersion compensator using a polarization maintaining electrically controlled delay line and computer 

interface. The delays in their system are 50 picoseconds or less. His system is sensitive to both insertion losses and return losses, so a low 

return loss device is needed. 


13757 ODL-650-11-1550-8/125-P-60-3A3A-1-1-MC/RS232 Electrically Controlled Reflector Style Variable Fiber Optic 

Delay Line for 1550nm, with 60dB return loss. Pigtails are 1 

meter long, 8/125 PM fibers, protected with 0.9mm OD hytrel 

tubing, and with FC/APC connectors, RS232 Interface 


Model ODL-100 ODL-200 ODL-300 ODL-600 ODL-650 

Travel Mechanism 

Manual Lead 

Screw 

Manual Micrometer Servo Motor Manual Lead 

Screw, mirror 

Servo-motor, 

Mirror 

Travel Range (mm) 100 25 100 25x2=50mm 25x2=50mm 

Resolution (microns) 1 318 per turn 10 per division 1.4 per encoder 

pulse 

635 per turn 1 per encoder 

pulse 

Delay Range (psec) 330 83 330 167 167 

Delay Resolution (psec) 1 1 psec per turn 0.033 psec per 

division 

0.0047 psec per 

encoder pulse 

2 psec per turn 0.0033 psec per 

encoder pulse 

Max. Insertion Loss (dB) 2,3

ODL-A-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L(-I) 

A = Version: 

100 = Standard Style, with lead screw 

200 = Standard Style, with micrometer 

300 = Standard Style, with DC servo motor 

600 = Reflector Style, with lead screw 

650 = Reflector Style, with Servo motor 

I = Interface (ODL-300 & 650 models only) 


with built-in manual TTL control lines 

PC for direct connections to the motor, 

encoder and limit switches (no driver). 

W = Wavelength:Specify in nanometers 


a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns, 

9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber sizes 

8/125 for 1550nm PM fiber sizes 


sheet for other fiber sizes 

F = Fiber type: M=Multimode 

S=Singlemode 

P=Polarization maintaining 

LB = Backreflection level: 35, 40, 50, or 60dB 

60dB is available for 1300 and 1550nm only 

Multimode devices are only available with 

35dB 


A customer building an interferometer needs a manual delay line for 1300nm, using singlemode fiber. He needs pigtails 1 meter long on one 

side, and 10 meters long on the other side, and does not need connectors. Because he is fusion splicing, he prefers uncabled fiber. While 

he does not require to read the exact delay, he does need as long a travel range as possible. Return losses do need to be as low as possible, 

to prevent additional interference effects. 

Part Number 

ODL-100-11-1300-9/125-S-60-XX-1-1,10 


L = Fiber length, in meters, on each side of 

the device 

Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at the 

input and 7 meters at the output, replace the 

L with 1,7 

JD = Fiber Jacket type: 


3 = 3mm OD kevlar reinforced PVC 

cable 


jacket sizes 

X,Y = Input & Output Connector Codes: 





8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


LC = LC 


MU = MU 

Description 

Variable Fiber Optic Delay Line for 1300nm, with manual lead screw and 60dB return loss. 

Pigtails are 1 meter long on the input, 10 meters long on the output, 0.9mm OD tight buffered 

9/125 SM fibers, no connectors. 

Q: How do I convert travel in mm to delays in picoseconds? 

A: The delay is equal to the distance divided by the speed of light in air. 1mm corresponds to 3.33psec of delay. Note that in the ODL-600 

and ODL-650 models, the light travels the distance twice, so the delay is twice the motion of the optics. 

Q: Is the minimum delay zero picoseconds? 

A: No, there is a minimum delay, due to the minimum separation between the optics, and the length of the attached fibers. A one meter long 

fiber produces a 4.9nsec delay. The minimum separation of the optics induces between 30psec and 150psec delay, depending on the 

model. The delay range specified in the tables is for relative delay. 

Q: Are the units calibrated? 

A: The ODL-200 models have a micrometer, to give the direct readout of the motion, in mm. The ODL-300 with controller and ODL-650 also 

givea readout of the delay in picoseconds. The other models do not have any calibration. Note that these are relative readouts, not 

absolute (see the previous question). 

Q: What are the advantages and disadvantages of the inline version versus the reflector style? 

A: Generally the inline version gives the largest travel ranges versus the reflector style, and thus can produce the greatest delays. However 

the reflector style unit has the advantage that the fibers themselves do not move. This makes the reflector style the best choice for 

commercial applications as opposed to lab use. 

Q: Do I need special software to run the ODL-300 or ODL-650 delay lines? 

A: Both units are operated with simple text commands that can be sent via terminal programs such as Windows Hyperterminal. 

Active X control and Labview driver, as well as a direct Windows interface program are also provided. 

Q: What voltages and currents do the motor driven delay lines use? 

A: The ODL-300 requires an input voltage between 6 to 8 Volts, and can draw up to 400mA of current when the motor is turning. The ODL- 

650 also requires 6 to 8 Volts, and can draw up to 180mA of current when operating. If necessary, the ODL-650 can be set up to work with 

a 5V supply voltage. However, that will limit the speed. If necessary, OZ Optics can provide a 12V version of the ODL-650 style delay line, 

which will accept supply voltages from 6V to 12.25V. This option will provide slightly greater speed. However it will consume more current 

than the standard model, and would have to be custom built. 

6


Example Application: Polarization mode dispersion (PMD) is an important issue in the quest to build high speed (10GBs, 40GBs, and higher) 

communication networks. An input signal travelling along a single mode fiber normally has some distortion, due to polarization mode 

dispersion. The signal effectively has been split into two arbitrary, yet orthogonal polarizations, and one polarization is leading the other. A 

delay line is a crucial element in building compensators for PMD. 

The figure below shows how to use a delay line to compensate for polarization modes dispersion. The light from the singlemode input is split 

into two using a polarizing beam splitter. A polarization controller installed just before the splitter is used to convert the arbitrary polarizations 

that the signal has been split into S and P polarization. The faster S polarization is routed through the delay line while the slower P polarization 

is sent straight into the combiner. The combined signals then reach the receiver. A control system monitors the quality of the signal at the 

receiver, and dynamically adjusts the polarization and the delay to get the two signals to match up again. Thus the PMD is the system can 

be corrected in real time. 

Figure 6: PMD Compensation System Using a Variable Delay Line 

Mounting: The base of the delay lines have mounting holes for attachment to a rack or printed circuit board. For best results, the mounting 

surface should be rigid and free of vibration. Do not over-tighten the mounting screws and use screws that thread in no more than 

2mm. Tightening the mounting screws too much will warp the base and potentially increase losses either temporarily or permanently 

Electrical Connections: The ODL-650 unit has a Hirose DF11-16P-2DS16-pin connector. The pin designations are given below: 

Pin Name Function Comment 

1 GND Common Ground 

2 GND Common Ground 

3 Select Select TTL interface For TTL interface, Input Active Low 

4 Vin Input DC supply voltage; 

(Min +6V Max +8V) 

For ODL-300 Max 400mA 

For ODL-650 Max 180mA 

5 Reverse Move the motor in reveres For TTL interface, Input Active Low 

6 Rx RS232- Receive input line 

7 Forward Move the motor forward For TTL interface, Input Active low 

8 Tx RS232- Transmit output line 

9 N/A Do not connect Factory use 


11 Reset Hardware Reset line Active Low, Min 100mS 


13 End End limit switch TTL output, active low 


15 Home Home limit switch TTL output, active low 


(1) (3) (5) (7) (9) (11) (13) (15) 

(2) (4) (6) (8) (10) (12) (14) (16) 

Hirose 16-pin connector 

When you first connect the wire harness to the 16-pin port, make sure that the power is off. Before turning the power on, make sure that your 

connections have the correct voltage levels and polarity (given above). If you have ordered an RS-232 interface, the harness comes terminated 

with a DB9 connector that plugs directly into your computer's serial port. For special applications, the harness is left without a connector and 

must be terminated by the user for the communications type of their choice. 

7


OPTICAL FIBER AMPLIFIERS FOR CATV APPLICATIONS 

Features 

• Total output power from 25 mW to 5 W 

• Low noise figure 

• Up to 16 output ports 

• Low CSO and CTB 

• RS232, RS485, 10Base-T, and USB network interfaces 



Applications 

• Analog and digital HFC/CATV networks 

• SONET/SDH systems 

• Access Networks 

• Free space communications 

Preliminary 

OEM Module Version of Optical Fiber Amplifier 

The OFAC series of high performance, low noise and high output 

power amplifiers are specially designed for CATV network systems, 

where signal distortion must be minimized. These amplifiers feature 

a low noise figure, and feature very low Composite Second Order 

(CSO) and Composite Triple Beat (CTB) distortion levels while 

providing output powers from 25 mW up to 5 Watts. 

Amplifiers can be provided in either single or multiple output 

versions, with up to 16 output ports. They can be used in both 

single wavelength and DWDM systems, thus providing the 

perfect opportunity to build flexible CATV network systems. 

OFAC amplifiers have a flexible architecture and can be 

customized to meet special requirements for electrical 

connections, packaging and optical characteristics. The 

amplifiers can be supplied in either a 19" rack-mount case, an 

OEM module format or in a gain block. Contact an OZ Optics 

sales representative for more details. 

Typical Performance 


Total Output Power dBm 14 to 37 

Input Power dBm -4 to +6 Standard 

Number of Output Ports 1,2,4,8,12 or 16 

Port to Port Variation dB +/-0.4 Maximum 

Operating Wavelength nm 1540 - 1565 Standard 1 

Fiber core/cladding diameters µm 9/125 

Noise Figure (Pin = 0 dBm) dB Typically

Packaging 

All OFAC amplifiers can be supplied in either a 19" rack-mount case, an OEM module format or in a gain block. 













6. Do you need more than one output? 


Description 

Optical Fiber Amplifier for CATV 

Part Number 

OFAC-N-B-P-W-S-F-X-O-I 

N 

P 

W 

S 


Specify 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, or 16. The input 

signal will be amplified and split 

amongst the output ports. 

Maximum Output Power in dBm: 


corresponding to 14 and 37 dBm 

respectively 


1540/1565 for 1540 to 1565 nm 









driver 

9 = Custom 

I 

O 

X 

F 


R = RS232 

U = USB 



Options: 








8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


E = E2000/PC 

EA = E2000/APC 

See table 6 of the standard table for 

other connector types 

Flatness: 


F = Flattened 





2


Features 

OPTICAL FIBER AMPLIFIERS FOR SPECIAL APPLICATIONS 

• Total output power from 50 mW to 40 W 

• 1 µm and 2 µm operating wavelengths 

• Excellent beam quality 

• RS232, RS485, 10Base-T, and USB network interfaces 



Applications 

• IR spectroscopy 

• Medicine 

• IR imaging 

• Lidar 

• Pollution control 

• Research & Development 

Preliminary 

OEM Module Version of Optical Fiber Amplifier 

The OZ Optics optical fiber amplifier product line now includes the OFAS 

series of special optical amplifiers, designed to meet growing customer 

needs in IR spectroscopy, medicine, IR imaging, and other applications. 

These new optical fiber amplifiers provide output powers from 40 mW up 

to 40 W, at 1 micron and 2 micron wavelengths, with excellent beam 

quality. These amplifiers have a flexible architecture that can be 

customized to meet special demands with regards to electrical 

connections, packaging and optical characteristics. Contact an OZ Optics 

sales representative for more details. 

Bench Top Unit Version of Optical Fiber Amplifier 

Typical Performance 


Operating Wavelength nm 1050 - 1120 or 1900 -2100 Standard 1 

Total Output Power dBm 17 to 25 or 30 to 46 at 1.06 µm 

17 to 20 or 30 to 37 at 2.00 µm 

Input Power dBm -10 to +8 standard 

Operating Temperature Range °C -10 to +50 Standard 

-10 to +65 Extended 

Storage Temperature Range °C -40 to +80 

Humidity % 0 to 95 Non-condensing 

1Other wavelength ranges available upon request 


Packaging 

All OFAS amplifiers can be supplied in either a bench-top unit, a 19" rack-mount case, an OEM module format, or in a gain block. 











4. What sort of amplifier do you need (booster, pre-amplifier, In-line amplifier or Mid-Span amplifier)? 




Description 

Optical Fiber Amplifier for Special 

Applications 

Part Number 

OFAS-1-B-P-W-a/b-S-N-X-O-I 

P 

W 

a/b 

S 

Maximum output power in dBm: 


depending on wavelength 


1050/1120 = 1050 to 1120 nm 

1900/2100 = 1900 to 2100 nm 




Fiber size: core/cladding diameters, in 

microns 






driver 

9 = Custom 

I 

O 

X 


R = RS232 

U = USB 



Options: 






3 = Standard flat, Super, or Ultra 

FC/PC 


8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


E = E2000/PC 

EA = E2000/APC 

See table 6 of the standard table 






2



The OZ-FR-110 and OZ-FR-120 are compact, cost-effective 

portable singlemode fiber fault-event data loggers. They are light, 

easy to use, and hence ideal for fiber cable troubleshooting, 

repairing, and restoration. 

Just like an OTDR, the fiber ranger injects the laser pulse into the 

fiber under test and picks up scattered and reflected optical signals. 

However, the structure of the fiber ranger is highly simplified to 

make it a low cost, high performance fiber optical test instrument. 

Although the fiber ranger neither displays the trace of the fiber nor 

gives any information about the fiber and event losses, it can 

identify types and locations of both based on a set of predetermined 

threshold values, and goes throughout the entire 

length of the fiber under test. 

OPTICAL FIBER RANGER 

Features 

• Portable, compact, and low cost 

• Backlit LCD display 

• Membrane keypad ideal for fieldwork 

• LED indicators for battery charging, and LD lasing status 

• RS-232 port for data transmission 

• Built-in Ni-MH rechargeable batteries 

Applications 

• Fiber length measurements 

• Fiber break point locating 

• Fiber event identification 

• Acceptance testing 

• Fiber link supervision 

• Fiber identification 

Figure 1: Handheld Optical Fiber Ranger 

DTS0100 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 23-Sept-04 

1

Standard Product Specifications 

Model 

OZ-FR-110 

-13 -15 

OZ-FR-120 

Wavelength 1310±20nm 1550±20nm 1310±20nm 

Fiber Under Test 

9/125 um singlemode fiber 

Optical Connector FC/PC SC 

Detection InGaAs InGaAs 

Max. Detection Range 

Reflection Event 80 km 100 km 20 km 

Non-Reflection Event 40 km 50 km 10 km 

Reflection Event Dead Zone 50 m 5 m 

Non-reflection Event Dead Zone (3dB) 200 m 20 m 

Distance Accuracy (Reflective Event Detection) 

Dimensions (L x W x H) 

Weight 

±(2 m+ 3 x 10-5 x Distance) (Fiber refractive index error not included) 

196 x 100 x 40 mm (7.72 x 3.94 x 1.57 in.) not including bumper size 

600 g (1.32 lbs.) 

Temperature Operating: 0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F) Storage: -20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F) 

Humidity 

Memory 

0 to 95% (non-condensing) 

Up to 550 measurements 

Power Consumption Available Number of Tests for Fully Charged Battery: 10,000 

Power Supply 

OZ-FR-110: AC adapter or a 7.2 V NiMH Battery; OZ-FR-120: 4 AA Alkaline Batteries 

Notes: 

Measurements are made at 23 ± 2°C. 

2


OPTICAL POWER METER WITH SMART DETECTOR HEAD 

Features 

• High-speed response (over 1000 readouts/s) 

• Wavelengths: 440 to 900 nm for visible (VIS) and 800 to 1700 nm for infrared (IR) 

• NIST traceable 

• Built-in attenuator for 20 or 30 dB attenuation; automatically detects when the 

attenuator is engaged 

• Selectable sampling rate (from 7Hz to 1800Hz) 

• Optional POM-110 hand-held display unit for controlling one or two detector heads 

• Analog voltage output (optional) 

• Interchangeable optical receptacles 

• Mounting holes on sides and bottom 

• Low power consumption (

Ordering Information for Custom Parts: 

Smart Detector Head: 

W = Wavelength: 

IR = 800 to 1700 nm 

VIS = 440 to 900 nm 

SDH-W-Z 

Z = Other options: -ND=20 = Standard version with 20 dB attenuator 

-ND=30 = High power version with 30 dB attenuator 

-A-ND=20 = Standard version with 20 dB 

attenuator and analog voltage output 

-A-ND=30 = High power version with 30 dB 

attenuator and analog voltage output 

-NF = without attenuator filter 

Optical connector receptacle: 

SDHR-X 

X = Receptacle code: 

2.5U = Universal receptacle for 2.5 mm diameter ferrules 

3 = Standard flat, super, or ultra NTT-FC/PC 


8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 



Q: Is the hand-held display unit POM-110 necessary for 

operating the Smart Detector Heads? 

A: No. The Smart Detector Heads can be driven by a PC. 

Q: What software comes with the Smart Detector Head? 

A: Windows: interface software Active-X Control for Visual 

Basic and LabVIEW driver. 

Q: I need to format the measurement data into a report. How 

can I do this? 

A: Remote control of the Smart Detector Head via a computer 

allows direct output of the readings to a text file. The data 

can then be imported into a spreadsheet program to draft 

the report. 

Q: Is analog output a standard feature? 

A: No. It is an option. 


The Smart Detector Head provides optical power measurements 

with high resolution, high speed, and wide dynamic range. The 

SDH features high optical power measurement, programmable 

sampling rate, optional analog voltage output, and low power 

consumption. Several units can be used simultaneously to create 

a multi-channel measurement system. 

A PC can be used as a virtual instrument, with the Visual Basic 

and LabVIEW drivers, to make the SDH a reliable, flexible, and 

effective device for automatic fiber optical alignment and 

collimation, fiber optic assembling and testing, quality control and 

measurement, network installation, component and system 

troubleshooting, and general optical power measurement 

applications. 

Automatic fiber optical alignment 

In the manufacture of fiber optic components, it is often necessary 

to attach an optical fiber to a semiconductor device such as a 

laser diode, a semiconductor optical amplifier, an optical switch, 

or any of the other numerous types of opto-electronic devices. 

Coupling the light into the optical fiber is a very real problem in 

these applications. When the alignment tolerances are very tight, 

typically in the sub µm regime, auto alignment systems are 

required to achieve maximum coupling efficiency, and a power 

meter is needed to measure the optical power level. 

OZ Optics’ Smart Detector Head can communicate with a 

computer control system through an RS-232 or I²C interface. 

Optionally, a USB interface may be used. The high-speed 

sampling rate, of up to 1800 Hz, high resolution of 0.01 dB, high 

dynamic range of 85 dB, and analog voltage signal output make 

the SDH a good choice for rapid and accurate alignment. 

High-power measurement 

Except for preamplifiers, which are designed to generate a few 

mW at most, all optical amplifiers generate power levels that 

exceed the measurement range of conventional power meters. 

Today, the highest powers from EDFA exceed 1 W. When the 

output power is a key parameter, the question is: How can such 

large power levels be measured with good accuracy and good 

reliability? 

6


Features: 

• Controls Output Power to ±0.1dB 

• 35dB dynamic range 

• Millisecond Response Speed 

• Single and Multi-channel Versions 

• Singlemode and PM Fiber Versions 

• OEM, Rack Mountable, and Stand Alone Versions 

Applications: 

• Power Stabilization in DWDM Networks 

• Signal Conditioning in Test Equipment 

Optical Power Regulators 

Stand Alone Optical Power Regulator 


OZ Optics has successfully combined its expertise in variable attenuators 

with its optical power monitor technology to develop an optical power 

regulator. This product allows one to maintain the output optical power 

from a fiber optic system at a constant level, countering changes caused 

by PDL, reduced amplifier gain, or other sources. 

Preliminary 

The optical power regulator uses the output from an optical power 

monitor as feedback to control an attenuator. An analog feedback circuit 

uses the power monitor signal to control the attenuator behavior. Simple 

controls allow the user to enable or disable the feedback circuit, monitor 

the signal intensity, and control the output power through the fiber. The 

system can maintain output power levels constant to better than ±0.1 dB, 

with millisecond response speed. 

Optical power regulators are used wherever one has an unstable output 

from and optical fiber and one needs a more stable signal. They are ideal 

for power stabilization in DWDM networks, where changes in power can 

produce transmission errors. The complete unit is available either as a 

miniature module that can be integrated into other devices, a stand alone 

module for testing, or as a rack mountable unit for optical networks. 

Contact OZ Optics for further information. 


Minimum Insertion Loss 

1dB Typically 

Attenuation Range 

50dB 

Input power range 

-30dBm to +25dBm 

Wavelength Dependent Response ±0.25dB (over the wavelength range of 1510-1610nm) 1 

Polarization Dependence 

±0.1dB 

1 Results given for an optical power regulator for 1550nm. Responses for regulators for other wavelengths will vary. 


Questionnaire 

1. Do you need a stand alone unit, a rackmountable unit, or a miniature OEM unit? 


3. What type of fiber are you using (singlemode, multimode, or polarization maintaining (PM)? 

What are the core and cladding sizes? 

4. What type of connectors are you using? 

5. Is there a minimum return loss specification? 

Ordering Information: 

Optical Power Regulator 

OPR-A-W-a/b-F-XY-LB 

A model Type: 100 = Stand Alone Unit 

200 = Rack Mountable Unit 

300 = OEM unit 

LB = Backreflection level. 50dB for 

singlemode and polarization 

maintaining fibers, 


Example: 1300/1550 for standard telecom 

wavelength range 

a/b = Fiber Core/cladding sizes, in microns 


See standard tables data sheet for other 


X = Connector code : 

3S= Super NTT-FC/PC 

3U= Ultra NTT- FC/PC 

3A=Angled NTT-FC-PC 

8= AT&T-ST 

SC= SC 


See standard tables data sheet for other 


F = Fiber Type: 

S=Singlemode 



A customer needs a stand alone optical power regulator to control the power from his 980nm pump laser in a fiber amplifier unit. The 

customer is using singlemode fiber for that wavelength, which has a 6 micron core and a 125 micron cladding. He requires a unit with 

FC/APC connectors on both ends. The OZ Optics part number is as follows: OPR-100-980-6/125-S-3A3A-50 


Figure 1 show the basic concept behind the optical power regulator. Light from the source is sent through an electrically controlled 

variable optical attenuator. An optical power monitor is connected to the attenuator output. The monitor taps a small amount of light from 

the fiber and measures the signal intensity. This signal is fed into the feedback circuitry to control the attenuator. The user sets the 

desired output power from an external control knob. The feedback circuit can be enabled or disabled though an external switch. An 

analog output voltage allows external monitoring. 

Figure 1: Operating Principle of the Optical Power Regulator 

2


OPTICAL TIME-DOMAIN REFLECTOMETER 


OZ-OTDR is a compact, cost-effective portable Optical Timedomain 

Reflectometer (OTDR), designed for full-range fiber fault 

detection. It delivers the same features as a desktop model. 

Designed specifically with fieldwork in mind it is ideal for optical 

fiber installation/maintenance, field construction, and other on-site 

fault-locations analysis. Its outputs are formatted to ease planning 

and documentation efforts and to minimize time spent on-site. 

The OTDR encompasses two parts: a plug-in module (OZ-MMO) 

which performs all OTDR functions, and a Mainframe Interface 

(OZ-MFI) console which provides power, data interfaces, an LCD 

display, a touch-screen input, and a built-in thermal printer. 

On the OZ-MMO, a short laser pulse is injected into the fiber 

under test and an avalanche photodiode (APD) picks up any 

scattered and reflected optical signals. This process is repeated 

again and again and an integration process is also invoked to 

suppress the noise. The OZ-MFI Console (OZ-MFI-001) is a 

miniature 80486-based computer that is powered by four 

rechargeable Lithium Ion batteries or AC. The application program 

(AP) execution sequence is done automatically using the touchscreen 

commands, and the digitized waveform is displayed in 3 

seconds. 

The AP consists of two windows. The Event Handling window 

(default) allows for parameter setting, measurement data storage 

and event analysis processing. The Event Mapping window 

provides mapping of a measured trace to a predefined landmark 

table, and subsequently the actual fault location, instead of pure 

distance, can be shown. 

Applications 

• On-line monitoring 


• Fiber break point location 


• Fiber attenuation measurements 

• Splicing loss detection 

Features 

• Fault event analysis software 

• Real-time display 

• Touch LCD, high resolution screen 

• Mapping function with actual position display 

• Rugged, handheld and easy to use 

• RS-232 output port for a PC interface 

• Powered by either rechargeable Lithium Ion battery or AC 

• Emulation program for data analysis PC 

Figure 1: Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer 

Figure 2: Typical Operating Displays 


1

Standard Product Specifications: OZ-MFI-001 

Processor 

Memory 

Storage 

Display 

Pointing Device 

Printer 

Dimensions (L x W x H) 

Weight 

Battery Life 

Power supply 

Am486DX5 133MHz 

16 MB DRAM 

1. Compact Flash Card 32 Mbytes 

2. 3.5" Floppy disk 

10.4" TFT VGA (VRAM 1MB /256 Color) 

Touch screen 

Built-in 

320 x 240 x 60 mm 

3.6 kg 

3 hours 

Lithium Ion Battery (10.8 VDC) & AC charge adaptor (100~240 V. 50~60 Hz) 

Standard Product Specifications: OZ-MMO Modules 

Model OZ-MMO-320 OZ-MMO-321 

Wavelength 1310/1550 ± 20 nm 1550/1625 ± 20 nm 

Dynamic Range (dB) 


Optical Connector 

Pulse Width (ns) 

Event Dead Zone 

9/125 µm singlemode fiber 

FC/PC 

10, 30, 100, 300, 1000, 3000, 10000, 20000, Auto 

Effective 35/33 33/31 

SNR=1 38/36 36/34 

5 m 

Attenuation Dead Zone 

Sampling Resolution 

40 m 

0.25, 0.5, 1, 2 m 

Max. Sampling Points 128,000 

Distance Accuracy 

Linearity 

Return Loss Accuracy 

Max. Display Range 

±(2 m + 3 x 10-5 x distance + marker resolution) (Fiber refractive index error not included) 

± 0.05 dB/dB or 0.1 dB (whichever is greater) 

± 4 dB 

240 km (150 mile) 

Notes: 


All brands and product names are trademarks of their respective holders. 

Order Information 

OZ-FPL-320 OZ-MFI-001 x 1+ OZ-MMO-320 x 1+ all accessories x 1 

OZ-FPL-321 OZ-MFI-001 x 1+ OZ-MMO-321 x 1+ all accessories x 1 

2


PRELIMINARY 

DATA SHEET 

POLARIZATION DEPENDENT LOSS EMULATOR 

Features: 

• Fixed or manually controllable Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL) 


• Broad wavelength range 

• Wide range of connectors available 


• Low cost 

Applications: 

• PDL Compensation 

• Reference PDL source 

• Test Equipment PDL calibration 

Polarization Dependent Loss Emulator 


OZ Optics produces a Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) Emulator. The emulator produces a specific amount of polarization dependent loss by 

transmitting the light through a tiltable optical window. The orthogonal polarizations will have different transmission and reflection properties 

through the window, according to Fresnel's laws of reflection. This produces the PDL effect. Emulators are available with either a fixed PDL 

(between 0.05 and 1dB) or a variable PDL(between 0.05 and 0.5dB). 

The PDL emulator is used to simulate the PDL behavior of a passive component within an optical link. This includes devices like variable optical 

attenuators, optical modulators, array waveguides, fiber Bragg gratings, optical switches or fused couplers. One can thus examine the effects of 

PDL in a system, and work out a PDL budget for an optical link. OZ Optics also produces a polarization dependent loss meter, and polarized 

stable sources, and polarization controllers, to further help study the effect of polarization in optical systems. Please refer to the 

related data sheets for detailed information. 



13439 PDLE-11-1550-9/125-S-3U3U-3-1-0.5 1550nm, manually variable 0.5dB Polarization Dependent Loss Emulator with 

1m long, singlemode fiber with 3 mm OD jacket, terminated with Ultra FC/PC 

connectors. 

13377 PDL-100-333-1250/1650-9/125-S Polarization Dependent Loss meter with Ultra FC/PC receptacles for 

wavelengths from 1250nm to 1650nm 

2836 FOSS-01-3S-9/125-1550-S-1 Fiber Optic Stable Laser Diode Source with 1550 nm wavelength, 1 mW 

output, for 9/125 core/cladding singlemode fiber with super FC/PC receptacle. 


A research center wants to introduce varying amounts of PDL into a WDM fiber optic network link and evaluate the induced bit error rate. They 

need to order the following parts: 


13439 PDLE-11-1550-9/125-S-3U3U-3-1-0.5 1550nm, manually variable 0.5dB Polarization Dependent Loss Emulator with 

1m long, singlemode fiber with 3 mm OD jacket, terminated with Ultra FC/PC 

connectors 

13377 PDL-100-333-1250/1650-9/125-S Polarization Dependent Loss meter with Ultra FC/PC receptacle for 

wavelengths from 1250nm to 1650nm 


Standard Product Specifications 1 : 

Part number 

Wavelength range 2 

Fiber Type 

Connector Type 

PDL Dynamic Range 3 

Insertion Loss 

Optical Return Loss 

PDLE-11-1550-9/125-S-3U3U-3-1-0.5 

1510 nm to 1590 nm (for uniform PDL) 

9/125µm single mode fiber with 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC Jacket 

Ultra Polished Physical Contact NTT-FC connector 

0.05 dB to 0.5 dB 

< 2 dB 

> 50 dB 

Operating temperature 0 to 40 °C 

Storage temperature 

Max input Power 4 

-10 to +60 °C with < 80% none-condensing relative humidity 

200 mW 

1 Reference condition: 23°C measured with 1mw, 1550 nm fiber optic stable source after 30 minutes warm-up period 

2 Broader wavelength range can be provided upon request 

3 Fixed PDL value between 0.05 and 1dB can be ordered 

4 Higher power handling can be provided upon request 





(NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, 

so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 


1. Do you want a fixed PDL emulator or a variable one? 

2. What is the PDL level you require? 


4. What type of connectors are you using? 


6. What is the fiber core/cladding diameters and fiber jacket OD? 

Polarization Dependent Loss Emulator: 

PDLE-1A-W-a/b-S-XY-JD-L-V 

A = 0 for fixed PDL value 

1 for manually variable PDL value 


980,1064, 1310,1480,1550,1625 

a/b = Fiber core/cladding size, in microns. 

6/125 for 980, 1064nm wavelengths 

9/125 for 1310, 1480, 1550 or 1625nm 

wavelengths 

X,Y = Input & Output Connector Codes 



3A=Angled NTT- FC/PC 

SC=SC 

SCA=Angled SC 

8= AT&T-ST 


LC= LC type connector 

X=Unterminated 

V = 

PDL values in dB, between 0.05dB to 

1dB for fixed type 

0.5, for variable type with range 

from 0.05dB to 0.5dB 

L = Fiber length in meters 





A test equipment manufacturer needs a 0.25dB fixed PDL Emulator for 1550nm to use as a reference. As they intend to splice the device into 

their system, they want 2 meter long leads, no connectors, and 0.9mm cable. 

Part number is as follows: PDLE-10-1550-9/125-S-XX-1-2-0.25 


Q: Is the variable emulator calibrated? 

A: The current manual design has a scale but is not calibrated. Calibrated versions will be available shortly. 

Q: Does the insertion loss listed in the specifications include the PDL? 

A: Yes, it does. 

2

Features: 


• Fast PDL measurement (< 1sec) 

• Insensitive to external power drift 

• Very low variation in internal loss (

Standard Product Specifications 1 : 

Part number 

Measurement Method 

Wavelength range 

Fiber Type 

PDL Dynamic Range 

Accuracy 2 

Repeatability 

Insertion Loss 

Optical Return Loss 

Max input power 3 

Scan time 

PDL-100-333-1250/1650-9/125-S 

Random method as described in FOTP-157 (TIA/EIA-455-157) 

1250 nm to 1650 nm 

Corning SMF-28 Singlemode fiber 

0.015 to 30 dB 

±0.005dB + 5% of PDL 

±0.003dB + 2% of PDL 

< 4 dB 

< -50 dB 

1 mW 

< 1 s 

Operating temperature 10 to 40 °C 

Storage temperature -10 to 60 °C 

Dimensions (H-W-D) 

External Controls 

Weight 

Input voltage 4 

Display 

18 cm x 27 cm x 30 cm 

RS-232, RS-485 DB-9 type connector, or Parallel Printer Port 

5 kg 

100 to 240 V AC / 50 to 60 Hz 

Color touch screen 

Notes: 

1 For 1550nm and 1310nm +/-40nm and at reference condition: 23°C ambient temperature after 30 minutes warm-up period 

2 Measured at 1550nm and 1310nm with 0.5 mW pigtailed Fabry-Perot source up to 20dB. Lower accuracy will be obtained above 20dB 

3 Higher input power available upon request. 

4 Standard product comes with a North American power cord. Other power cords are available as accessories 

Ordering Example For Standard Parts: 

A North American Optical Passive component R&D facility wants to measure the PDL dependency versus wavelength of Fiber Bragg Gratings 

across the C-band. We assume they are using their own tunable optical source. They need to order these following parts: 


13377 PDL-100-333-1250/1650-9/125-S Polarization Dependent Loss Meter with Ultra FC/PC receptacles for wavelengths from 

1250nm to 1650nm 

8136 SMJ-3U3U-1300/1550-9/125-3-1 Ultra FC/PC to Ultra FC/PC, 9/125um singlemode jumper 1300/1550nm fiber, 3mm OD 

PVC jacketed, 1 meter long 








1. What is the output power of your source? 

2. What is the PDL range suitable for your application? 

3. Do you plan to test PDL dependency versus wavelength? 

4. What type of connector do you need? 

5. What is the dynamic range you require? 

Polarization Dependent Loss Meter: 

PDL-100-33X-1250/1650-9/125-S 

X 1 = Receptacle Code for detector: 

3= Standard, Super, Ultra NTT- 

FC/PC Receptacle 


SC=SC 

SCA=Angled SC 

8= AT&T-ST 

2.5U= Universal Receptacle 


LC= LC type connector 

Note: 1 Detector receptacle is replaceable. 

2


POLARIZATION EXTINCTION RATIO MEASUREMENT TEST SET FOR 

V-GROOVE ASSEMBLIES AND PM PATCHCORDS 

Features: 

• Measures up to 40dB extinction ratios 

• Complete kit for extinction ratio measurement 

• Simple operation 

Applications: 


• Automated alignment 




Polarization Extinction Ratio Measurement Test Set 


OZ Optics has bundled its polarized sources, polarization extinction ratio meters and master reference patchcords into one complete test set for 

rapid testing of the polarization maintaining properties of optical components. We offer systems for testing devices terminated with connectors, and 

now systems for testing the polarization properties of V-Groove arrays. 

For standard components, the extinction ratio measurement system includes a polarized source with a rotatable polarizer, a polarization extinction 

ratio meter, a quick connect adaptor for the extinction ratio meter, and a reference polarization maintaining patchcord. 

For V-Groove arrays, OZ Optics offers an OEM version of the polarization measurement system. A manual operated type and semi-automated type. 

The test set includes the polarized source with rotatable polarizer, an OEM version of the extinction ratio meter with external optics, a V-Groove 

mount with a three axis position system, with one axis motorized for semi-automated type, a reference V-Groove array with a single PM fiber, and 

an application software package for semi-automated type. The user only has to supply a Windows based computer to operate the system as a 

semi-automated test bed. 

Although extinction ratio measurement test sets are supplied as complete units, one may later need to purchase additional accessories, such as 

receptacles or reference patchcords for other connector types. These products are readily available. For further information, please refer to the 

following data sheets: 

Sources and Accessories 

Meters and Accessories 

Reference Patchcords 

Polarized Fiber Optic Source 

Fiber Optic Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter 

Fiber Optic Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter, 

Polarization Maintaining Patchcord, 

V-Groove Assemblies 

Polarizartion Extinction Ratio Measurement Test Set For V-Groove Assemblies 




products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need 

additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) 

charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will 

be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 


1. What wavelength are you using? 

2. What is the minimum acceptable polarization extinction ratio for the source? 

3. What should be the minimum extinction ratio rating of the polarization extinction ratio meter? 

4. What type of connector are you using on the source side? 

5. What type of connector are you using on the detector side? 

6. Do you need a custom mount? 

7. Do you need a manual system or semi-automated system? 

Polarization Extinction Ratio Measurement System: 

PER-KIT-XY-W-1(-ER=ZZ)¹ 

X = Source Connector Code: 

3 = Standard Flat, Super or Ultra NTT-FC/PC receptacle 


8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


LC = LC 

MU = MU 

Consult factory for special connector and ferrule adaptors. 

¹ ZZ: Extinction Ratio: None if 30dB is required. 

If an ER > 30dB is required, enter ER=35 or 

ER=40 respectively for ER=35dB or ER=40dB. 

W = Wavelength Range (in nm) 

Example: (1550 for 1550nm, 1310 for 1310nm, 

980 for 980nm) 

MAN: = Add to part number for manual type 

V-Groove measurement system 

Y = Meter Connector Code: 

3 = Standard Flat, Super or Ultra NTT-FC/PC receptacle 


8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


LC = LC 

MU = MU 

VGA = V-Groove array 


ER-Measurement Test System for V-Groove 

(Manual Type) 


PM V-Groove Array ER Measurements 

OZ Optics’ ER Meters for PM V-Groove arrays provide fast and accurate extinction ratio measurements of V-Groove assemblies manufactured 

with PM fiber. The semi-automated system is computer controlled for hassle free control and measurements. The system consists of a polarized 

light source, 3 axis measurement micro-stage with one axis motorized, an extinction ratio display set and PC software to control the system. The 

stage and meter display are connected to a PC using RS-232 cables. The system is capable of measuring extinction ratios up to 40dB with an 

accuracy of 1.5°. 

Operating The PM V-Groove Array ER Measurement Test Set 

The system works by first setting the software configurations for the appropriate V-Groove size and spacing. The V-Groove chip is then attached to 

the mounting stage and the opposite end of the fiber is attached to the polarized source. After adjusting the stage to roughly align the fiber to the 

meter, the software is started to take the ER measurement and automatically move the array to the next fiber position. Manual recording of the 

measured ER and angle is required at this point; optional software is available to log the measurements for later use. At the software prompt, the 

user must change the fiber on the polarized source so the next measurement can be taken. 

4


POLARIZATION EXTINCTION RATIO METER 

Features: 

• Measures up to 40dB extinction ratios (over specific wavelength 

ranges) 

• Built in RS232 Communications Interface 

• Wide wavelength range: 450 to 900 nm for visible; 850 to 1650 

nm for IR 

• 0.01dB resolution in ER and 0.3° resolution in angle 

• Accuracy in ER is 1dB, in angle is 0.5° 

• Measures up to 2 Watts CW input power 


• Logging mode for continuous measurement 

• Interchangeable connector adaptors 

• CE Compliant 

• LOW COST! 

Applications: 


• Automated alignment 




Fiber Optic Polarization 

Extinction Ratio Meter 


OZ Optics’ Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter allows one to quickly 

measure the output extinction ratio of light from a fiber. A rotating 

polarizer measures the extinction ratio and the orientation of the 

transmission axis with respect to the key on the connector. As an 

option, neutral density filters can be added to the Extinction Ratio 

Meter, to extend the maximum power range. These filters can be easily 

inserted and removed, without disturbing your setup. These filters allow 

power levels up to 2 Watts to be measured. 

The meter operates in several modes. In real time mode, the meter 

gives the extinction ratio and alignment. In logging mode, the meter 

gives the worst case extinction ratio over a given time span. This mode 

is ideal for QA measurements. 

In addition the meter can provide a relative power readout, proportional 

to the input power in dB. This readout is updated at up to 650 times per 

second. The computer interface allows the unit to be used with 

computer control units, for alignment purposes. The combination of 

polarization and relative power functions allows the unit to be used for 

complete auto-alignment of polarization maintaining components. 

DTS0067 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 2-Sept-04 1


1) What is your application? 

2) Will you be using the device at a specific wavelength? 

3) What is the maximum extinction ratio that you will need to measure? 

4) Do you require external control from a computer? 

5) What type of computer interface do you require? 

6) What is the maximum power level that you will be using? 

7) What type of connector will you be using? 

X = Connector Code: 3 = Standard Flat, Super or 

Ultra NTT-FC/PC receptacle 


8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


LC = LC 

MU = MU 

2.5U = Universal adaptor for 

2.5 mm diameter ferrules 

1.25U = Universal adaptor for 

1.25 mm diameter ferrules 

Consult factory for special connector and ferrule 

adaptors. 

P = Attenuation Level: 10dB, 20dB, 30dB or 35dB 

Note: For attenuations over 20dB, specify the 

wavelength in nm 

Description 

Extinction Ratio Meter: 

Connector Adaptors: 

Attenuators: 

Part Number 

ER-100-W 

ER-2X-W 

ER-ND-P-W 

W = Wavelength Range (in nm) IR for 850-1650 nm 

VIS for 450-900 nm 

Note: If an ER of 40dB is required then specify either 

980/1060 or 1290/1650 for the wavelength, and add 

“-ER=40” to the part number. ER>40 dB is only 

achieved on IR models over 980 to 1060 nm, and 

1290 to 1650 nm wavelength ranges. 

Reference Patchcords: 

PMJ-XY-W-a/b-1-1-1-ER=30-G 

X,Y = Connector Code: 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 

3S = Super NTT-FC/PC connector 

3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC connector 

8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


LC = LC 

MU = MU 


W = Wavelength (in nm): 

Example: (1550 for 1550 nm, 1300 for 1300 nm, 980 for 980 nm) 

a/b = Fiber core and cladding sizes, in microns: 

(6/125 for 980 nm PM fiber, 7/125 for 1300 nm PM fiber, 8/125 for 

1550 nm PM fiber) 

Ordering Example for Custom Parts: 

A Canadian manufacturer of high power WDM for EDFA applications wants to do incoming extinction ratio qualification, at 980 nm, of 

any purchased optical components prior to using them in his systems. They need to order these following parts: 


n/a HIPFOSS-02-3A-980-10-BL-ER=40 

980 nm, 10 mW Highly Stable Polarized Fiber Optic Source with an angled FC receptacle, 

rotatable polarizer, achieving over 40dB extinction ratio. BL= blocking style attenuator 

13485 ER-100-980/1060-ER=40 980 nm, Fiber Optic Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter. ER = 40dB. Receptacle is not included. 

13488 ER-23A-980/1060-ER=40 980 nm, Angled FC Removable Receptacle for ER Meter. ER = 40dB 

8704 ER-ND-20-IR 20 dB attenuator for ER Meter for wavelengths from 850 nm to 1650 nm 

n/a PMJ-3A3A-980-6/125-1-1-1-ER=30-G 

Master patchcord, angled FC/PC to angled FC/PC, 6/125 um PM 980 nm fiber, 0.9 mm OD 

jacketed, 1 meter long with connectors aligned and locked to the slow axis, ER=30dB minimum 

4


FEATURES: 

· High Extinction Ratios 

· Broad Wavelength Range 

· High Power Handling up to 2 Watt 

· Small, Rugged Packages 

· Low Insertion Losses 

· Large Volume Manufacturing Capacity 

· Low Cost! 

POLARIZATION MAINTAINING AND POLARIZING 

SPLITTERS/COMBINERS 

APPLICATIONS 

· Polarization Mode Dispersion Compensation 

· EDFA Amplifiers 

· Coherent Telecommunication Systems 

· Fiber Optic Sensors 

SPECIFICATIONS 

Splitting Ratio: 50/50 to 95/5 for polarization maintaining splitters 

Insertion Loss: Typically 0.6dB 

Return Losses: -40, -50 and -60dB versions 

Cross Talk: Typically less than -40dB 

Wavelengths: 400 - 1625nm 

Extinction Ratios: >20dB, 25dB and 30dB versions for polarizing splitters 

Miniature In-Line Style 

Miniature T-Branch Style 

Power Rating: 

Operating Temp: 

Up to 2W CW at 1550nm 

-20°C to +60°C 

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 

OZ Optics’ beam splitters are used to divide and couple light 

into two or more fibers. Light from one or two input fibers is 

first collimated, then sent through a beamsplitting surface to 

divide it in two. The resultant output beams are then focused 

back into the output fibers. By utilizing OZ Optics' patented 

tilt alignment technique, both one-by-two and two-by-two 

splitters can be constructed with both low insertion losses 

and low backreflection levels. Furthermore, splitters can be 

built with different types of fiber on the input and output sides. 

For example, a polarizing splitter could be built using a normal 

singlemode fiber as an input, and two polarization preserving 

fibers as outputs. 

Polarizing beam splitters take an input beam of light and 

divide it into two orthogonal polarizations. The output is typically 

polarized to greater than 20 dB extinction ratio from the 

splitter outputs. A polarizing beam splitter can also be used 

in the reverse direction to combine two polarized beams into 

a single output fiber. 

Broadband polarizing splitters are also available, operating at 

both 1300nm and 1550nm, with only a 0.3dB variation in the 

T 

2 

Standard Pigtail Style 

insertion losses over the wavelength range. Versions are 

also available for 400 to 700nm, and for 700 to 1100nm wavelengths. 

Non-polarizing splitters will split an input beam of light at a 

fixed splitting ratio independent of the input polarization state, 

and without modifying the light's polarization. These splitters 

are polarization insensitive over a wavelength range of 

±30nm from the specified central wavelength. One-by-two 

and two-by-two polarization maintaining splitters are made in 

this fashion. All input and output ports will maintain polarization 

to greater than 20dB with this technique. Splitters that 

maintain 30dB extinction ratios and lower than 40dB cross 

talk are available on request. 

R 

1 

DTS0069 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. March-01 

1

APPLICATIONS 

Because of the inherent flexibility of the OZ Optics splitter design, an almost limitless set of configurations are possible. The 

following set of examples show only a few of the possible applications. 

1. Polarizing splitter / polarization combiner: A 1×2 

splitter is required to split the light from a 1300nm singlemode 

fiber into two orthogonal polarizations, and then 

transmit the two signals along two PM fibers. This splitter 

could also be used in the reverse direction to combine 

the light from two PM fibers into one singlemode fiber. 

The two PM fibers are aligned such that for either output 

port the light is transmitted along the slow axis of the 

fiber. The output extinction ratios from the PM fibers must 

be at least 30dB, while the typical backreflection will be 

25dB. The singlemode input fiber is terminated with a 

male FC connector, while the two output fibers are unterminated. 

All three fibers are cabled using 3mm O.D. 

kevlar cabling, and are one meter long. OZ Optics' part 

number:FOBS-12P-111-9/125-SPP-1300-PBS-25-3XX-3-1-ER=30 

3. Polarization Analyzer: The output from a 1300nm singlemode 

fiber is connected to the input of a connector 

receptacle style one-by-two splitter. The analyzer consists 

of a polarizing splitter, an input collimator, and two 

focusing lenses. The output from each port of the splitter 

is then connected to a multimode fiber, and the resultant 

output powers monitored. In this manner one can study 

the output polarization of light from the fiber. For 1300nm 

fibers, terminated with ST connectors, the part number 

for the analyzer with corresponding receptacles is: FOBS- 

12-888-SMM-1300-PBS. 

2. Polarization preserving splitter: A two-by-two 50/50 

splitter is required to combine the light from two 1550nm 

PM fibers and split the combined light into two other PM 

fibers. The input and output fibers must all maintain 

polarization to at least 20 dB, and the backreflection level 

should be around -60dB. All four fibers are one meter 

long, in 1mm O.D. tubing, and unterminated. OZ part 

number: FOBS-22P-1111-10/125-PPPP-1550-50/50-60-XXXX-1-1. 

An alternative setup for an analyzer is available with photodiodes 

attached directly to the output ports rather than 

using focusing optics and multimode fibers. Such a system 

can reduce costs and improve coupling efficiency. 

OZ Optics' part number: FOBS-12-8XX-SDD-1300-PBS. 

2

4. Backreflection Monitor: A customer wishes to monitor 

fluorescence from a sample by analyzing the signal 

being backreflected along a fiber. The input signal is 

488nm light transmitted along a singlemode fiber. The 

input goes into port T of a receptacle style beam splitter, 

and goes out through port 1 into a second singlemode 

fiber. Half of the light is coupled into a multimode fiber at 

port 2 in order to monitor the source power. Port R is 

then aligned to couple as much of the backreflected signal 

from port 1 as possible into a singlemode fiber, while 

simultaneously rejecting any light reflected from port 2. 

Ports T, R, and 1 have FC receptacles, while port 2 has 

an AT&T--ST connector. OZ Optics part number: FOBS- 

22-3338-SSSM-488-50/50 

5. Collimated source to fiber splitter with variable 

splitting ratio: A customer wants to couple light from a 

polarized 488/514nm Ar-Ion laser with 1 - 32 TPI female 

receptacle into two PM fibers. Both fibers have FC connectors. 

By using a broadband polarizing splitter to 

divide the light from the laser, one can rotate the splitter 

to adjust the splitting ratio between the two fibers to any 

desired ratio. Achromat lenses are then used to couple 

the light with equal efficiency for the 488nm and 514nm 

Ar-Ion laser lines. 

OZ Optics part number:ULBS-133-PP-488/514-PBS- 

3.5AC-1. A similar system is available for non-collimated 

sources, such as laser diodes. For these items a lens is 

used to initially collimate the source. Add BL to the part # 

if blocking attenuator is required for each output end. 

6. Laser diode to fiber coupler with monitoring photodiode: A 90/10 beam splitter is used to split the signal from an 

830nm laser diode. Ninety percent of the light is coupled into a 2 meter long, 3.0mm O.D. cabled PM fiber, terminated with 

an FC connector. The remaining ten percent is reflected to a monitoring photodiode. The typical backreflection level is 25dB. 

In this manner, one can independently monitor the output power emitted by the laser diode before it enters the fiber. 

OZ Optics part number: ULBS-12P-5/125-PD-830-90/10-25-3X-3-2. 

3

One unique property of OZ Optics two-by-two splitters is their directionality. Normally OZ Optics splitters are designed to be bi-directional. 

The coupling efficiencies from ports 1 and 2 into port R are similar to those from port T into ports 1 and 2. In some cases 

however, it is desirable to couple light from only one port into port R. An example would be a backreflection monitoring system. Light 

is coupled from port T into ports 1 and 2. Port 1 is used as a sensor, while port 2 is used to monitor the source power. The splitter 

can be factory adjusted so that only light from port 1 is reflected back into port R, not port 2. 


One by Two Pigtail Style Splitter 

FOBS-12P-111-a/b-ABC-W-S/R-LB-XYZ-JD-L 

Package Size: 

P for standard pigtail style 

T for miniature T shape style 

N for miniature Inline style 


9/125 for 1300/1550nm singlemode fiber. 

See tables 1 to 5 for other standard fiber sizes 

Fiber Type: 

Wavelength: 

Splitting ratio: 50/50 to 95/5 


M = Multimode 



Specify in nanometers 


Backreflection level:40, 50, or 60dB. 

60dB version available for 1300nm and 1550nm 

only 


Fiber Jacket 0.25 = 250 Micron OD acrylate 

jacket 

Type: 


3 = 3mm OD kevlar reinforced 

PVC cable 


sheet for other jacket sizes 


3 = NTT-FC/PC 




LC = LC 

SC = SC 



sheet for other connectors 

Two by Two Pigtail Style Splitter 

FOBS-22P-111-a/b-ABCD-W-S/R-LB-XYZT-JD-L 

Package Size: 


T for miniature T shape style 

N for miniature Inline style 


9/125 for 1300/1550nm singlemode fiber. 

See tables 1 to 5 for other standard fiber sizes 

Fiber Type: 

Wavelength: 

M = Multimode 

Splitting ratio: 50/50 to 95/5 






Backreflection level:40, 50, or 60dB. 

60dB version available for 1300nm and 1550nm 

only 


Fiber Jacket 0.25 = 250 Micron OD acrylate 

jacket 

Type: 


3 = 3mm OD kevlar reinforced 

PVC cable 


sheet for other jacket sizes 


3 = NTT-FC/PC 




LC = LC 

SC = SC 



sheet for other connectors 

NOTE 1: For extinction ratios higher than 30dB, add the term “-ER=30” to the end of the part number for 1300nm and 

1550nm 1x2 splitter only. For other wavelengths, 2x2 splitters, and 1300nm - 1550nm broadband splitters, add “- 

ER=25” to the end of the part number for extinction ratios higher than 25dB. 

NOTE 2: When ordering fiber splitters, please indicate how you wish to align the polarization axis of each PM fiber. 

The OZ Optics standard is to align all PM fibers such that output light is transmitted along the slow axis of the fiber. 

4


POLARIZATION MAINTAINING FIBER PATCHCORDS AND CONNECTORS 

Features: 

• High extinction ratios of 20dB to 30dB 

• Low insertion losses, typically

Ø8.5 

M8P0.75 

1.5 

Ø2.498 ± 0.001 

2-Ø2.3 

13.4 

19 

NOTCH 

KEY 

TIGHT 

TOLERANCE 

NOTCH 

Figure 2. PM FC Connector Construction 

LOCKING 

NUT 

PIN 

KEYWAY 

TIGHT 

TOLERANCE 

7.4 

15 

12.5 

ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm. 

Figure 3. FC Sleeve Thru Connector 

Dimensions 

3.9 

29 

25 

3.9 

29 

Ø10.0 

JD = 0.25 or 0.4 

0.9 mm OD 

Hytrel Tubing, 

(for strain relief) 

0.25mm 

or 0.4mm 

coated fiber 

Ø10.0 

JD = 1 

0.9 mm OD Jacketed 

or Loose Buffered Fiber 

3.9 

42 

3.9 

41 

Ø10.0 

Ø8 

JD = 3 or JD = 3A 

3mm PVC or 

Armor Cable 

Ø10.0 

Ø7 

JD = 3AS 

3mm OD Stainless 

Steel Armor Cable 

3.9 

41 

3.9 

41 

Ø10.0 

Ø8 

JD = 5A 

Figure 4. PM FC Connector Dimensions For Various Cable Sizes 

5mm Reinforced 

Armor Cable 

Ø10.0 

Ø7 

JD = 5AS 

5mm OD Stainless 

Steel Armor Cable 

Figure 5. Narrow Key Versus Wide Key Connectors 

Three holes120° apart 

on a 17.3mm bolt circle 

3.7° 

Three holes120° apart 

on a 17.3mm bolt circle 

M8P0.75 Thread 

Ø2.4 

M8P0.75 Thread 

Ø2.4 

0.8 

K 

0.8 

K 

3.0 

7.7 

K: 2.03/2.07mm for BC#19 , HPLC-NTT/FC-PM 

2.15/2.20mm for BC#21, HPLC-NTT/FC-SM 

ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm 

3.7 

8.4 

K: 2.03/2.07mm for BC#1812 , HPLC-NTT/FC-PM-SL3.7 

2.15/2.20mm for BC#5200, HPLC-NTT/FC-SM-SL3.7 

ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm 

Figure 6. Bulkhead FC/PC Receptacle 

Figure 7. Bulkhead Angled FC Receptacle 

2


Design Wavelength 1550nm 1300nm 980nm 850nm 633nm 488nm 

Operating Wavelength Range 1460-1625 1290-1550 980-1300 810-980 620-820 480-630 

Cutoff Wavelength

Polarization Maintaining Patchcords: 

P = PM fiber type 

QP for pure fused silica core PM fibers 

(488nm only). P for standard doped core 

PM fibers 

X,Y = 

Connector Code (Side A, SideB) 

3S = Super FC/PC (


POLARIZATION MAINTAINING FUSED FIBER COUPLERS / SPLITTERS 

Applications 

• Optical amplifiers 



• Fiber gyroscopes 

• Coherent communications 

Key Features 

• Low loss 

• Broad bandwidth 

• Good uniformity 

• Small package 

• High directivity 

Fused couplers are used to split optical signals between two (or 

more) fibers or to combine optical signals from two (or more) fibers 

into one fiber. They are constructed by fusing and tapering the 

fibers together. This method creates a simple, rugged, compact 

method of splitting or combining optical signals. Typical excess 

losses are as low as 0.2 dB, while split ratio tolerances range from 

±5% to ±0.5% at design wavelengths depending upon the splitting 

ratio. These devices are bidirectional and offer low backreflection 

and insertion losses. 

OZ Optics’ fused PM Splitters exhibit a broad operating wavelength 

range of up to ±20 nm for 1550 nm region devices. For operation 

within the standard bandwidth of a splitter, it is best to order a 

standard center wavelength for lowest price and quickest delivery. 

Fused PM splitters are also available on smaller core fibers for 

1064 nm, 980 nm and other wavelengths. (Nonstandard center 

wavelengths may require minimum order quantities or set up 

charges. Please contact OZ Optics for assistance). 

A wide variety of options are available for fused PM splitters. 

Standard configurations are 1x2, 2x2, 1x3 (monolithic) and 1x4 

(compact cascaded). A monolithic structure means that all fibers are 

fused together, while a cascaded device combines several 2x2 

splitters to create a greater split count. NOTE – OZ Optics may 

substitute a 2x2 in place of an ordered 1x2 based on availability. If a 

1x2 is required, please inform your sales contact when placing your 

request for quote or order. OZ Optics can design and construct 

larger split counts or different split ratios upon request. 

OZ Optics has the capability to connectorize the fibers of fused 

splitters with all standard connectors such as FC, SC, ST, LC etc. 

and finishes (Super PC, Ultra PC, Angled PC [APC] etc.). As a 

component integrator, OZ Optics can construct additional 

components directly onto the coupler fibers. Examples include 

tunable filters, variable attenuators, or collimators. By building these 

devices directly onto the coupler fibers, OZ Optics saves the 

customer the added cost and insertion loss of intermediate 

connectors and adapters, or the time and cost of fusion splicing. 

Directly built devices are also the best way to maintain the highest 

possible Polarization Extinction Ratios. 

As with any device, there are drawbacks to using PM fused splitters 

Fused Splitter With 900 Micron Jacket 

Fused Splitter With 3 mm Cable 

Figure 1: Dimensions Of Fused Splitter 

With 250 and 900 Micron Jacketed Fibers 

Figure 2: Dimensions Of Fused Splitter 

With 3 mm Cabled Fibers 

Figure 3: PM Splitter Fiber Geometry 

DTS0092 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 25-Oct-04 

1


OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed and manufactured components to its valued customers. As with most 

manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in pricing compared to our standard 

parts. In particular, we may need additional detailed specifications or a drawing from the customer and extra time to prepare a 

comprehensive quotation. Lead times may also be longer for delivery. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) or setup charges, 

lot charges and/or a minimum order quantity may be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation so your 

decision will be as well-informed as possible. Please contact OZ immediately if any part of your quote needs explanation. We strongly 

recommend you purchase our standard parts. 

Questionnaire For Custom Parts 

1. What is your center wavelength and operating bandwidth? 

2. What is the desired port configuration (i.e., 2x2, 1x3) 

3. What split ratio is required? Are other ratios acceptable for initial trial? 

4. What, if any, connectors are required for each port? 

5. What fiber length is required? 

6. Are there package size restrictions (important for 1x4 splitters) 

7. Do you need additional components mounted to the input or output fiber ends? 

8. What are your extinction ratio requirements on the through and tap ports? 

Description 

Part Number 

One-by-Two Fused Splitter/Coupler FUSED-12-W-a/b-S/R-XYZ-JD-L-PM 

Two-by-Two Fused Splitter/Coupler FUSED-22-W-a/b-S/R-TXYZ-JD-L-PM 

W = 

Wavelength in nm 

(Standard 1310, 1480 and 1550 nm) 

L = 

Fiber length in meters on all ports 

(standard is 1 meter) 

a/b = 

Fiber core/cladding (7/125 for 1310 nm, 

8/125 for 1480 & 1550 nm) 

JD = 

Jacket Diameter in mm 

(1 is standard for 900um jacketing) 

S/R = Split Ratio in % 

(50/50, 90/10 and 95/5 are standard) 

TXYZ = 

Input and Output Male Connectors 

(T,X are inputs,Y,Z are outputs) 





SC = SC 


LC = LC/PC 





A customer wants a 1x2 fused coupler for 1480nm, with a 95/5 split ratio, to use as a tap to monitor the signal intensity through his 

system. He requires angled FC/APC connectors on the input port and the main output port, while on the 5% port he does not want a 

connector. He wants 0.5 meter long leads on all three ports, with 900 micron cabling. 

Part Number 

FUSED-12-1480-8/125-95/5-3A3AX-1-0.5-PM 

Description 

Fused PM splitter with 0.5 meter long 900 micron OD jacketed 1480 nm 8/125 PM fiber pigtails and 

1x2 95/5 split ratio, with Angled NTT-FC/PC connectors on the input and through ports, and no 

connector on the tap port. 

3


POLARIZATION ROTATORS/CONTROLLERS/ANALYZERS 

Features 

• User friendly lab package or compact package for inside 

systems 

• Singlemode, multimode, and polarization maintaining (PM) 

fiber versions available 

• Removable/replaceable optics (interchangeable) 


• High Polarization Extinction Ratio 

• Convert any polarization state to any other polarization 

state 

• Compatible with standard detector housings 

Applications 

• Laser to fiber coupling 

• Polarization dependent component or PM fiber testing 


• Coherent communications 

• Polarization ER measurements 

• PM fiber axis conversion 

Standard Receptacle Package - 1 Element 


OZ Optics supplies a complete line of polarization rotators, 

controllers and analyzers to manipulate and control the state of 

polarization of an input beam of light and couple the adjusted light 

into an output fiber or detector. These systems typically consist of 

an input with fiber pigtail or connector receptacle, from 1 to 

3 polarization optic components and an output coupler with fiber 

pigtail, or connector receptacle. The FPR product line uses bulk 

waveplates and polarizing glass to accomplish the polarization 

control. 

Each polarization optic stage can be removed without loss of 

coupling. These stages may be replaced or interchanged as the 

application requires. Separate stages with polarization optics 

mounted in a rotary platform may be purchased to allow using 

only one fiber optic assembly for multiple applications. 

Small Receptacle Package - 1 Element 

Standard Pigtailed Package - 3 Element 

Small Pigtailed Package - 2 Element 


1

Ordering Information 




normal. In some cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, or minimum order will be necessary. These points will 

be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our 

standard products. 

Questionnaire 

1. What is the operating wavelength for your system? 

2. What type of fiber are you using on the input and output? 

3. What combination of polarizers, halfwave plate, and quarterwave plates do you need? 

4. Which of the following statements apply? 

a. I need a miniature device. A readout of the angle is not required. 

b. I need to record the alignment of the optical elements. Size is not required. 

5. Do you need a device with receptacles, or a unit with the fibers? 

6. Is return loss an issue with your application? 

7. What connectors are you using on the fiber ends? 

8. What is the intensity of your signal? 

9. What is the input signal polarization, and the desired output polarization? 

Receptacle Style Fiber to 

Fiber Polarization Rotator: 

Size: 

1 = Standard housing 

2 = Miniature housing 

Pigtail Style Fiber to Fiber 

Polarization Rotator: 

FPR-0A-XY-W-I-O-R 

Input and Output Receptacle Codes: 

3 = Super, Ultra, or Standard FC/PC 

3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC † 

8 = AT&T-ST 

Output Fiber type: M = Multimode 

SC = SC 

SCA = Angled SC † 

Input Fiber type: S = Singlemode 

See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheets for other 

P = Polarization 

receptacles 

maintaining 

† Only available in standard housing. Wavelength: Specify in nanometers 

Size: 

1 = Standard housing 

2 = Miniature housing 




See Tables 1 - 5 of the Standard Tables data 

sheet for other standard fiber sizes 

(I) Input Fiber type: M = Multimode 

(O) Output Fiber type: S = Singlemode 


Polarization Optics Installed 

1 = Plate Polarizer 

1G = Glan-Thompson polarizer 

2 = Half wave plate 

3 = Quarter wave plate 

FPR-1A-11-W-a/b-I-O-R-LB-XY-JD-L 

Backreflection level: 25, 40, 50, or 60dB 

60dB for 1300 and 1550 nm only 


1 = Plate polarizer 



Fiber Length, in meters, on each side of the 

device Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at the 

input and 7 meters at the output, replace “L” 

with 1,7 




See Table 7 of the Standard Tables data sheets 

for other jacket types 

Input and Output Connector Codes: 




8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 




Add “-ER=25”, “-ER=30” to the part number for 25dB and 30dB extinction ratios. Use 1 & 2 & 3 for multiple polarization optics. 

Replacement Polarization Optics 

with Rotary Platform: 

Replacement Polarization Optics 

without Rotary Platform: 

Size: 

1 = Standard rotary platform 

2 = Small rotary platform 


ROT-0A-W-R 

ROT-W-R 


1 = Plate polarizer 



4


Features: 

• High polarization extinction ratio (up to 40 dB) 

• Stable output 



• Wide range of connector receptacles available 

• Optional high power versions 

• Optional adjustable output power 

Applications: 

• Extinction ratio measurements 

• Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) measurements 

• Product manufacturing and quality control 


POLARIZED FIBER OPTIC SOURCE 

Receptacle Style Polarized Fiber Optic Source With 

Rotatable Polarizer 

OZ Optics produces Polarized Fiber Optic Sources (PFOSS) in a variety of wavelengths. Sources are available in three versions. A receptacle 

version is available with the polarization axis aligned with the keyway on the receptacle. A second receptacle style version is available with a rotatable 

polarizer, allowing one to adjust the polarization axis to any desired angle. Finally, a pigtail style version has a polarization maintaining fiber attached, 

with the output polarization aligned with the slow axis of the fiber (see the Fiber Optic Laser Diode Source data sheet for details). 

As an option, OZ Optics can include a blocking style optical attenuator to manually change the output. Unlike electrical systems, this method of 

power control does not affect the spectral properties of the laser diode output. This ensures more repeatable results. 

While the PFOSS design is quite stable for standard measurements, sometimes reflections or temperature changes can affect the output power and 

wavelength for applications where stability is critical. OZ Optics recommends using angled connectors and receptacles for optimum stability. Highly 

Stable Polarized Fiber Optic Laser Sources (HIPFOSS), using Peltier coolers and isolators are also available. See the Highly Stable Polarized 

Source data sheet for details. 

Figure 1: Receptacle Style Polarized Fiber Optic Source With Rotatable Polarizer 



A European fiber optic manufacturer wants to test the quality of their polarization maintaining jumpers at 1550nm and 1310nm. They need to order 

the following parts: 


13507 PFOSS-02-3-1310-1-ER=40 1310 nm, 1 mW Polarized Fiber Optic Source with a Super/Ultra FC/PC 

receptacle and rotatable polarizer achieving up to 40 dB extinction ratio 

8695 PFOSS-02-3-1550-1-ER=40 1550 nm, 1 mW Polarized Fiber Optics Source with a Super/Ultra FC/PC 

receptacle and rotatable polarizer achieving up to 40 dB extinction ratio 

11998 ER-100-1290/1650-ER=40 Fiber Optic Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter. ER= 40dB for 1290 nm to 1650 

nm and ER = 30dB for 850 nm to 1290 nm 

13440 ER-23-1230/1650-ER-40 Super/Ultra FC removable receptacle for ER meter for wavelengths from 1280 

nm to 1650 nm. ER=40. 

13390 PMJ-3U3U-1550-8/125-1-1-1-ER=30-G Master Patchcord, Ultra FC/PC to Ultra FC/PC, 8/125um PM 1550nm fiber, 

0.9mm OD jacketed, 1 meter long with connectors aligned and locked to the slow 

axis ER=30dB minimum 

2737 POWER CORD - EUROPE European power cord (order one cord for each source, and for the ER meter 

(Total = 3 pieces) 





engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, 

so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 


1. What wavelength do you need? 

2. What connector type are you using? 

3. How much optical power do you need launched into your fiber? 

4. What should be the minimum polarization extinction ratio of the source? 

5. Do you want a fixed or rotatable polarizer? 

Receptacle Style PFOSS: 

A = Source type: 1 for fixed polarization 

2 for Rotable Polarization 

X = Connector code : 

3= Standard, Super or Ultra 

NTT-FC/PC receptacle 


SC=SC 

SCA=Angled SC 

8=AT&T-ST 

MU=MU type connector 

LC=LC type connector 

1.25U=Universal Receptacle for 1.25mm OD 

connector ferrules (LC, MU) 


2.5mm OD connector ferrules (ST, FC, SC) 

Notes: 


PFOSS-0A-X-W-P (-ER=YY) 

YY = Extinction ratio. Add this only for 

ER>30dB. Specify 35 or 40dB. 

If not specified, the extinction ratio is 

greater than or equal to 30dB. 

ER=35dB or 40dB is only available for 

980nm, 1064nm, 1290-1625nm. 

P = Output power, in mW 

1mW is standard 

1. For Highly Stable Polarized Sources (HIPFOSS) which include an isolator and Peltier cooler circuit please refer to the 

Highly Stable Polarized Source data sheet 

2. Add -BL to the part number to have blocking style attenuator added to the PFOSS 

3. Add -ISOL to the part number for an isolator. For wavelengths less than 1290nm, order a HIPFOSS instead 

W = Wavelength in nm: 635, 650, 685, 

780, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 

1310,1480,1550,1625 

A European manufacturer of fiber optic circulators wants to test the extinction ratio of their polarization maintaining jumpers at 980nm prior to 

pigtailing them to their integrated waveguides. They need to order the following parts: 


N/A PFOSS-02-3A-980-2- ER=40 980 nm, 2 mW Polarized Fiber Optic Source with an angled FC receptacle, 

rotatable polarizer, achieving over 40dB extinction ratio. 

N/A ER-100-980-ER=40 980 nm, Fiber Optic Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter. ER = 40dB 

N/A ER-23A-980-ER=40 980nm, Angled FC Removable Receptacle for ER Meter. ER = 40dB 

N/A PMJ-3A3A-980-6/125-1-1-1-ER=30-G Master patchcord, Angle FC/PC to Angle FC/PC, 6/125um PM 980nm 

fiber, 0.9 mm OD jacketed, 1 meter long with connectors aligned and 

locked to the slow axis ER=30dB minimum 

2737 POWER CORD - EUROPE European power cord. Order one for the source and one for the meter 

3


POLARIZERS – FIBER OPTIC 

Features 

• Rugged & compact housing 

• SM, MM, PM and fiber combinations available 

• Miniature sizes available 



• Low loss 

• Low back reflection 

• Low cost 

Applications 


• System polarization extinction ratio conditioning 

• Measuring polarization extinction ratio 

• Sensors 

• Integrated optics 



Fiber Optic Polarizers are designed to polarize the output from a 

light source or fiber and launch it into an output fiber. These 

polarizers typically consist of input and output collimators with a 

plate polarizer in between. Broadband polarizers are used, so the 

power extinction ratio is maintained for up to several hundreds of 

nanometers. The same polarizer, for example, may be used for 

1300 nm to 1600 nm. The power extinction ratio is the ratio 

between maximum and minimum output power as the input 

polarization state is changed. This is different from the output 

polarization extinction ratio, which is a measure of the ratio 

between the power in the two axes of polarization maintaining 

fiber. This value is dependent upon the extinction ratio of the 

polarizer, the alignment of the output fiber axes to the polarizer 

and the extinction ratio of the output fiber. When an output 

extinction ratio is specified, it is the polarization extinction ratio. 

This value is only applicable when the output fiber is polarization 

maintaining fiber. The power extinction ratio will always equal 

exceed the polarization extinction ratio. 

OZ Optics offers fiber optic polarizers in three sizes. The 20 mm 

diameter standard size can be used for prototyping and bench top 

work. The 5.5 mm diameter miniature size is for OEM applications 

and the smallest size (4 mm diameter) is for low cost systems 

where reduced output extinction ratio is acceptable. 

Pigtail Style Polarizer 

Miniature (5.5 mm OD) Pigtail Style Polarizer 

Low Cost Miniature (4 mm OD) Polarizer 


1

Ordering Information 

Pigtail Style: 

Polarizer size: 

1 for Standard 20 mm size 

2 for miniature 5.5 mm OD size 

3 for low cost 4 mm OD size 

Wavelength: 





See Tables 1 to 5 for other standard fiber sizes 

Input Fiber: 

Output Fiber: 

M = Multimode 



M = Multimode 



Backreflection level: 25, 40, 50, or 60dB 

60dB version available for 1300 and 1550 nm 

wavelengths only 

FOP-A1-11-W-a/b-I-O-LB-XY-JD-L 

Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the 

device. 

Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at the input 

and 7 meters at the output, replace L with 1,7 

Fiber Jacket Type: 1 = 900 Micron OD hytrel jacket 


PVC cable 

See Table 7 for other jacket sizes 




8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


See Table 6 for other connectors 

NOTE: For extinction ratios greater than 25dB or 30dB, add the term “-ER=25” or “-ER=30” to the end of the part number. 


A customer has a tunable laser for 1520-1570 nm, pigtailed with singlemode fiber with a Super PC finish FC connector on it. She wants 

to polarize the signal as much as possible, and transmit it through a polarization maintaining fiber, achieving over 30dB extinction ratios. 

The output fiber also needs to have a Super PC finish FC connector on the end. Return losses and insertion losses are not critical. 


XXXX 

FOP-11-11-1520/1570-9/125-S-P- 

40-3S3S-3-1-ER=30 

Fiber optic polarizer for 1520 nm to 1570 nm, with 60dB return loss, 30dB extinction ratio, and 

with 1 meter long, 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cabled Corning SMF-28 singlemode fiber on 

the input, 8/125 PM fiber on the output, with Super FC/PC connectors on both ends. 


Upgrading System Output Extinction Ratio 

When several PM fiber pigtailed components are connected, 

there is the possibility that the accumulated extinction ratio will 

degrade. Each time two PM fibers are joined, any offset of their 

stress axes can cause the extinction ratio to get a little lower. For 

example, two 30dB fibers offset by 3 degrees can have a net 

extinction ratio of only 25dB. Add a couple more interfaces with 

similar angles and the value gets even worse. In order to have the 

final output extinction ratio be high, one can insert a pigtailed 

polarizer as the least component. This can drastically improve the 

output extinction ratio of the system with only a minor impact on 

system loss. For example, upgrading from a 15dB ER signal to a 

25dB ER signal would only incur 0.125dB loss (plus device loss). 

A small price to pay for a 10dB ER gain. 

Basic equation is Log (1 - (inv log original ER - inv log new ER)) 

Ex 15dB upgraded to 25dB is 0.125dB loss (plus device loss) 


Q. Why is output power so low? 

A. Check orientation and/or state of input polarization. If input 

fiber is PM, check to make sure light is launched along 

correct axis. 

Q. Why is output extinction ratio low? 

A. Check you are using it in correct direction. Polarizer 

alignment is optimized to the output fiber for best output 

extinction ratio. The input fiber is oriented for transmission. 

These two placements are very similar, but may be slightly 

different. 

Q. Why is output power fluctuation? 

A. Check stability of input fiber and polarization states. If there 

are large backreflections coming from further down the fiber 

optic system, an isolator may be required to protect the 

source or defeat an etalon effect. 

4


REFLECTORS – FIBER OPTIC 

(FIXED OR VARIABLE) 

Fiber optic reflectors are used to reflect the light emerging 

from a fiber back in the reverse direction. They are used 

to build fiber interferometers, or with fiber fused splitters to 

measure backreflection within fiber optic components. 

They can also be used to measure the sensitivity of 

sources to backreflection from other devices, by providing 

reference reflection levels. This is very useful for deriving 

backreflection specifications for transmitters. 

Fiber optic reflectors consist of a fiber optic collimator and 

a mirror. The fiber output is first collimated, then it strikes 

the mirror and is reflected back into the collimator. The 

angle between the collimator and the mirror is adjusted 

using OZ Optics Optics' patented tilt adjustment technique, 

until as much light as possible is reflected back into the 

fiber. Using this technique, reflectors with typical losses of 

only 0.6 dB can be constructed. A variable reflector is 

available that includes a blocking screw, to obtain variable 

reflection levels. This is achieved by partially blocking the 

collimated beam between the lens and the mirror. 

Both connector receptacle style and pigtail style reflectors 

are available. Connector receptacle style reflectors come 

with a female connector receptacle to allow the fibers to be 

easily changed. 

Pigtail style reflectors come with a fiber of your choice 

permanently attached to the collimating lens. This type of 

reflector is recommended for optimum coupling efficiency 

and stability. The other end of the fiber can be terminated 

with your choice of connector. 

OZ Optics also sells fibers with coated ends. Gold 

coatings are used to provide excellent broadband 

reflection for infrared wavelengths. Other coating 

materials are available for other wavelengths. The ends 

can have either 100% reflecting, or partial reflecting/partial 

transmitting coatings. Contact OZ Optics for further 

information. 

Reflectors are available for wavelengths from 400nm to 

1600nm. Reflectors that operate at both 1300 and 

1550nm are available, with only a slight difference in 

insertion losses at both wavelengths. Broadband 

reflectors using achromatic lenses to collimate light at 

different wavelengths are available. Partially reflecting 

mirrors are also available, to partly transmit the light. The 

transmitted light can be coupled into an output fiber as an 

option, thus forming an in-line reflector. Contact OZ Optics 

for further details. Laser diodes or lasers with long 

coherence lengths can cause etalon effects in fiber optic 

reflectors. 



Part Number 

Description 

FORF-1X-W-F 

Connector receptacle style fiber optic total reflector. 

FORF-XY-W-F-R 

Connector receptacle style partial reflector with output fiber focuser. 

FORF-11P-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L Pigtail style fiber optic total reflector. 

FORF-21P-W-a/b-F-LB-R-XY-JD-L Pigtail style partial reflector with output fiber focuser. Consult Factory for partial 

reflectors without output fiber. 

FORF-31P-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L Gold tipped fiber total reflector. 

Where: 

mirror. 

W is the operating wavelength in nm. (If the reflector is to work over a range of wavelengths, then give both the 

shortest and longest wavelength to be coupled into the fiber.); 

X,Y are the connector receptacle types for connector style reflectors. For pigtail style reflectors, it refers to the male 

connector on the fiber ends (3 for NTT-FC, 3S for Super FC, 3A for angled FC, 8 for AT&T-ST, SC for SC 

connectors, etc.); 



R is the percent reflectance for a partially reflecting mirror; 

JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3.0 for 3 mm OD loose tube kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, 

and 5A for 5mm armored cable); 


LB is the desired backreflection level (25dB, 40dB, 50dB, or 60dB) from reflective surfaces other than the 

Note: Add the term "-BL" to the end of the part number to add a blocking screw to achieve variable reflection. 

Example: A customer requires a pigtail style fiber reflector for 1300nm, with a blocking screw for variable reflection. The fiber 

is 9/125 singlemode fiber, one meter long, cabled, and terminated with an angled FC connector. OZ Optics part number: 

FORF-11P-1300-9/125-S-60-3A-3-1-BL.


RGB (RED/GREEN/BLUE) COMBINER AND DELIVERY SYSTEMS 

Features: 

• Modular design for easy installation and maintenance 

• Two, three, and four wavelength versions 

• Singlemode, multimode and polarization maintaining fiber versions. 

• High power versions 

• A variety of wavelengths available 

• Low noise, stable output. 


Applications: 

• White light displays 

• Confocal microscopy 

• Laser spectroscopy 

• Fluorescence microscopy 

• Color Holography 

Preliminary 

RGB Delivery System 


A common application today is the combination of visible laser light of different 

wavelengths into a single fiber. Such systems are used in a variety of applications 

where one wants to produce full color images. By combining red, green and blue 

light and varying the intensities of the signals, one can reproduce practically any color 

desired. 

In order to achieve this, wavelength division multiplexers (WDMs) are used to 

combine light of different wavelengths into a single fiber. The light from each fiber is 

first collimated. The collimated beams are then combined using a dichroic filter, with 

typically the longer wavelength transmitted from port T, the shorter wavelength 

reflected from port R. The combined beams are then focused into the output fiber at 

Port 1. OZ Optics uses this technique to build WDMs for combining visible 

wavelengths. Our RGB multiplexers combine light at red, green and blue 

wavelengths into singlemode or polarization maintaining fiber. OZ Optics also offers 

source to fiber wavelength division multiplexers, where the sources are mounted 

directly onto the device. This improves the overall system efficiency, and reduces 

costs. 

Complementing our line of RGB WDM’s are our OZ-1000 and OZ-2000 Turnkey 

OEM sources. They are temperature stabilized fiber coupled, laser diode sources. 

The compact housings contain both the laser diode and the temperature control, and 

are powered by a single 5 volt DC supply. The sources have an operating temperature 

range of 15 - 45°C, and hold the temperature variation of the laser diode to 

within 0.1°C. This maintains the wavelength variation to better than 0.1nm and also 

reduces the tendency of the laser diode to mode hop. 

The output power from each source can be adjusted using a 0 to 5 volt control 

voltage. Standard sources can be modulated at low frequencies (a few kHz), and 

devices can be configured at the factory for modulation capability up to 100 kHz, if 

requested. This is ideal for generating full color displays. Special versions are 

available from OZ Optics to cover even higher modulation frequencies, up to 50 MHz. 

Contact OZ Optics with your requirements. 

Used together, the OZ sources and RGB multiplexors provide a complete method to 

deliver full color output from a singlemode or polarization maintaining fiber. The light 

from the output fiber can be collimated using an optional achromatic collimator to 

give near ideal Gaussian beams ranging from 0.6mm to 10mm in diameter. 

Alternatively the achromatic focusers can be supplied to focus the light to spots only 

a few microns in diameter. 

Sources and combiners can be provided either as individual components or as 

complete integrated systems. See the figure on page 2 showing the layout for such 

OZ Sources for UV Blue, Green, Red and IR 

RGB Wavelength Division Multiplexor 

a system. Integrated systems provide the greatest 

throughput and final output power possible. This is 

because it eliminates the fiber-to-fiber connections 

normaly present when connecting sources and 

combiners together. Such connections introduce as 

much as 1.5dB additional losses at 405nm wavelengths, 

because the fiber core sizes are so small (as small as 3 

microns at 405nm). At this size even a one micron offset 

will cause significant losses. Thus an integrated system 

can deliver 25% more power than connected components. 

DTS0105 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 10-Jun-2005 1

For those who wish to use their own laser sources, OZ Optics also 

provides a full line of laser to fiber couplers and laser diode to fiber 

couplers. Systems can be custom built to provide optimum coupling 

to your source. We work extensively with various laser manufactures, 

designing optics and adaptors to fit their lasers. 

OZ Optics also offers a complete line of fiber optic collimators and 

focusers, to take the output from a fiber and deliver it precisely to 

where it is required. We stock a broad array of achromat lenses, 

perfect for RGB applications. Further details on these products can be 

found in our catalog and on our website under Laser To Fiber Delivery 

Systems. Contact a sales representative for additional details. 

For more detailed information on both wavelength division multiplexers 

and sources, please refer to our detailed product data sheets 

Wavelength Division Multiplexers, and Turnkey, Ultra Stable, OEM 

Laser Diode Sources - OZ-1000 & OZ-2000 Series. 

Units are in inches 

Figure 1: Pigtail Style OZ-1000 Dimensions 

Figure 2: Standard Wave Division Multiplexor Dimensions 

Figure 3: Integrated RGB System, With Optional Collimator 

2




particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases nonrecurring 

engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in 

your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 


1) What wavelengths are you interested in? 

2) What type of fiber is being used? Singlemode, Multimode or PM? 

3) What power levels are being used in your system? 

4) What coupling efficiency do you require? 

5) Are you using a polarized or randomly polarized light source? 

6) What return losses are acceptable in your system? 

7) What connector type are you using? 

8) How do you intend to use this product? 

9) How long should the fibers be? 

10) Do you wish OZ Optics to provide the sources? 

11) Do you need a collimated output beam? 

12) If a collimated beam is required, what is the desired beam 

diameter? 

13) If a focused spot is required, what is the desired spot size and 

working distance? 

Note concerning part numbers: Depending on the configuration of the desired design, the fiber types, lengths, and connectors may be 

different on each channel. Therefore it is important to correctly identify each port in the proper order. When specifying wavelengths, list them 

from shortest to longest. When identifying fiber types, start from the shortest wavelength to the longest wavelength, and identify the 

combined port last. This rule is also used when specifying the connector types and fiber lengths. 

Description 

Wavelength Division Multiplexer: 

Part Number 

WDM-1NP-111-Wi/Wo-a/b-ABC-LB-XYZ-JD-L 

N = 

Wi/Wo = 


9/125 for 1300/1550nm Corning SMF-28 




for other sizes 

ABC, 

Number of wavelengths to combine 

(2, 3, 4, etc.) 

Operating Wavelengths in 

nanometers 

Fiber types: on each port 

M = Multimode 




JD = 

X,Y,Z = 




PVC cable 

Connector type on each end 




8=AT&T-ST 

SC=SC 

SCA=Angled SC 

LC=LC 

LCA=Angled LC 

MU=MU 


LB =Backreflection level: 





5

Description: 

Pigtail Style Source 

Part Number 

OZ-N000-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L-P 

N = 1000 for electrical & optical connections in same 

front panel 

2000 for electrical connection on rear panel & 

optical connection on front panel 

W = Wavelength 1 : 405, 440, 635, 650, 670, 685, 750, 

780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1480, 1550, 1625. 

a/b = Fiber size: core/cladding diameters (in µm): 

(see tables 1 to 5 in the Standard Tables data sheet) 


M = Multimode Fiber 

S = Singlemode Fiber 


LB = Backreflection level 2 : 

35 = 35dB return loss (MM only) 

40 = 40dB return loss (SM & PM) 


(SM & PM - 1300/1550nm only) 

P = Output power available from the fiber end, 

in mW 3 

L = Fiber length (in meters) 



3 = 3mm OD Kevlar jacketed fiber 

3A = 3mm OD black armored cable 

3AS = 3mm OD Stainless Steel 

armored cable 



armored cable 

X = Connector type: 3 = FC/PC 


3A = Angled FC/APC 

5 = SMA905 

8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC or ultra SC 


Description: 

Receptacle Style Source 

Part Number 

OZ-N000-X-a/b-W-F-P 


front panel 



X = Connector Receptacle: 

2.5U = 2.5mm universal receptacle 

(for FC, ST, or SC). 



5 = SMA905 

8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


P = Output power 3 : 

Output power available from the receptacle, in mW 

F = Fiber type: M = Multimode Fiber 



W = Wavelength 1 : 405, 440, 635, 650, 670, 685, 

750, 780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 

1480, 1550, 1625 


(see tables 1 to 5 in the Standard Tables data 

sheet) 

1 These are standard center wavelength values. The tolerance may vary depending on both wavelength and the laser diode manufacturers’ 

tolerances. (Typical tolerances vary from ±5nm to as high as ±30nm). 

2 The backreflection specification refers to the reflected signal strength relative to the output power seen by the laser diode from internal 

reflections. It does not include external sources of reflection, including those from the connector at the end of the fiber. To minimize external 

reflections, OZ Optics recommends using angle polished FC/APC or SC/APC connectors. Backreflection values are limited by the wavelength 

and fiber type selected. Other backreflection levels may be possible. Please contact OZ for further information. 

3 Note that due to variations in the optical characteristics of the laser diodes available, not all output powers are available at every wavelength 

for every fiber type. For wavelengths below 750nm, we recommend pigtail style to eliminate connection loss at the receptacle interface. 

Options: Add "-ISOL" if an optical isolator is required (Please note that this option is only available for the 1300 to 1625nm wavelength range). 

Add "-BL" if OZ Optics is to provide a manual blocking screw to control the output power. 

6


Features: 

• Up to 48 channel V-Groove arrays 

• High accuracy V-Grooves using etched silicon 

• High capacity using automated batch processing 

• Compatible with 125/250 micron diameter singlemode, multimode and 

polarization maintaining fibers 

• 0.5 micron channel spacing accuracy 


SILICON V-GROOVE CHIPS 

Applications: 

• Pigtailing of integrated optical devices 

• Connection to planar waveguide devices 

• Attachment to an array of active devices 

• Connection of MEMS devices and miniaturized fiber optic components 

• Construction of DWDM and multi-channel devices 


OZ Optics Silicon V-Groove chips assist in developing next generation 

photonic devices. The array components allow precise alignment of either 

ribbonized or individual fibers in a linear array. Utilizing OZ Optics silicon 

V-Grooves with a Pyrex lid allows UV or heat curing of the fibers into the array 

and attachment to another device. The side wall design incorporated in the 

rear of the V-Groove chip enhances the overall assembly’s strength and 

rigidity, and reduces breakages. 

OZ Optics now offers metalized silicon V-Groove chips. These chips allow 

direct soldering of metalized fibers into V-Groove assemblies, providing a high 

strength bond that doesn't use epoxies. Contact OZ for more information. 

Silicon V-Groove Chips 

8 Channel V-Groove Chip 

10.40±0.03mm 

(VL) 

Width ± 0.03mm 

(VW) 

5.3mm 

W ±0.05mm 

0.28mm 

0.195±0.005mm 

0.138±0.005mm 

54.74° 

1.000±0.01mm 

(VT) 

Edge Distance ±0.025mm 

(ED) 

Figure 1: Detail Drawing For 1-12 Fiber V-Groove Chips 

(N x 0.250) ±0.0005mm 

0.250±0.0005mm 

(S) 

All Etched Positional Chip Tolerances are ±0.0005mm 

V-Groove Detail 

Pyrex Lid 

250um Coating 

125um Fiber Cladding 

Silicon V-Groove 

Assembled V-Groove, Showing Fiber Layout 



A customer needs to build an 8 fiber V-Groove assembly using an 8 fiber ribbon. The following parts will be required: 


11774 VGC-8-250-10.4-3.8-1-SW 8 channel silicon V-Groove chip with 250 micron fiber spacing 

9686 VGC-LID-5.3-3.8-1 1,2,4 or 8 channel Pyrex V-Groove lid 








1. How many fiber positions does your application require? 

2. What spacing between fibers does your application require? 

3. If you are going to use ribbon, is it standard 8 or 12 fiber count? 

4. If you are using individual fibers, what is the coating diameter? 

5. Do you need a lid for final assembly? 

Gold Plated V-Groove Chip 

V-Groove Chips: 

N = Number of V-Grooves 

S = V-Groove spacing (microns) 

VL = Length (mm) 

VW = Width (mm) 

VT = Thickness (mm) 

VGC-N-S-VL-VW-VT-SW 

V-Groove Lids: 

VL = Length (mm) 

VW = Width (mm) 

VT = Thickness (mm) 

VGC-LID-VL-VW-VT 


A customer needs to purchase a custom V-Groove chip and matching Pyrex lid. The required specifications are that the V-Groove chip have 

10 V-Grooves with 325 micron spacing, be 7mm wide, 15mm long and 1mm thick, the V-Groove length is to be standard (5.3mm). 

Part Number 

VGC-10-325-15-7-1-SW 

VGC-LID-5.3-7 

Description 

10 Channel silicon V-Groove Chip with 325 µm fiber spacing 

Custom Pyrex V-Groove Lid 


Q: What are the standard materials used? 

A: Silicon for the V-Groove, Pyrex for the lid. 

Q: Is the fiber core above or below the surface of the silicon V-Groove chip? 

A: Nominally the center of the core is seated approximately 30 microns below the surface of the chip. 

Q: What types of adhesives can be used to adhere the fibers into the V-Grooves? 

A: UV cured or thermally cured epoxies have been successfully used to mount the fibers into the V-Grooves. The matching Pyrex lids are 

necessary when using UV cured adhesives. 

Q: Are two V-Groove chips used to sandwich the fibers in place? 

A: No, the OZ Optics V-Groove chips are designed to be used with a flat lid, which provides a stable 3 point contact for positioning the fiber. 

Q: Can individual fibers be assembled into the V-Groove chips? 

A: Yes, the design allow for either individual or ribbonized fibers to be used. This also allows for mixing of different fiber types in the 

assembled chip. 

Q: Are the V-Groove channel spacing tolerances cumulative? 

A: No, the absolute tolerance from any one V-Groove to the reference V-Groove on a chip is ± 0.5 micron. 

3


SMART PATCHCORDS TM AND WIRELESS FIBER TM FOR POWER AND 

WAVELENGTH MONITORING 

Features: 

• Local or remote monitoring via RS232, USB, or wireless communication 

• Inexpensive, miniature package 

• Low insertion losses, return losses. High power handling 

• Versions for wavelengths from 600 nm to 1700 nm available 

• Polarization Maintaining (PM) and specialty fiber versions available 

Applications: 

• Network and channel monitoring in FTTH networks 

• Channel balancing for Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM) systems 

• Dynamic optical amplifier gain monitoring 


• Optical power control devices 

• Polarization stabilization 


• Real time in-line test and measurement 


Preliminary 


Smart patchcords utilize a new technology to monitor the properties of optical signals 

traveling through fibers. This includes power monitoring, wavelength sensing, and 

polarization measurement. The technology allows sensors to be integrated into 

networks and test equipment to provide real-time remote monitoring without 

interrupting the optical signal. Applications include channel monitoring in optical 

networks, polarization stabilization, and environmental sensing. 

Using a novel technique to tap signals for measurements, the monitors are very 

compact, and resemble a patchcord in construction.Competing monitoring systems 

typically use fused couplers to tap a fixed amount of light into another fiber and on to 

a measuring module. This method is bulky and must be done using discrete 

components. In contrast, our technique directs a controlled amount of light from the 

fiber core to the surface where it can be directly monitored. This is all done without 

bending, shaping, or otherwise harming the fiber. As a result sensors can be directly 

incorporated into optical assemblies, without affecting functionality. The 

manufacturing process allows full automation, sharply reducing costs. 

Sensors can be made into standard singlemode fiber, polarization maintaining (PM) 

fibers, or specialty fibers, for any design wavelength. The monitor electronics can be 

configured to give either an analog electrical output or a digital output via an RS-232 

or USB port. Multiple sensor modules can be integrated into a single patchcord, 

allowing different properties to be measured simultaneously. The sensors are 

directional in nature, measuring light traveling in one direction through the fiber, but 

not in the reverse direction. This directionality is ideal for monitoring signals in one 

direction independently of signals traveling along the other direction. Bi-directional 

versions can be provided on request. We welcome custom applications and new 

ideas. Contact OZ Optics for additional information. 

The latest member of the Smart Patchcord family is the Wireless Fiber. This is a 

Smart Patchcord with a built-in miniature radio transceiver. This allows the Smart 

Patchcord to communicate with a host computer, which can be a laptop, PDA, or even 

a smart cell phone. This makes it possible in many instances for a technician to 

identify a problem fiber before he even enters a building, resulting in a tremendous 

reduction in troubleshooting time. Several versions of the wireless link are offered, 

with ranges from 10 meters to over 1 kilometer. 

When a smart cell phone is used, measurements can be instantly sent to a central 

location for logging, or for comparison with previous measurements to monitor 

degradation of a link. By allowing easy monitoring of optical signal power levels 

without disrupting the signal, unnecessary maintenance and down time can be 

virtually eliminated. 

Smart Patchcord with Analog Output Module 

Wireless Fiber With Smart Phone 

Wireless Fiber With Laptop Computer 





particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases nonrecurring 

engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 25 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained 

in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 



2. Are you using standard singlemode, polarization maintaining, or a speciality fiber? What type? 

3. What is the expected optical power through the fiber? 

4. Do you need a single channel, or multiple channel device? 

5. Do you need to measure optical power, spectral intensity, or polarization? 

6. What sort of measurement resolution or accuracy do you need? 

7. What dynamic range do you need? 




11. What kind of communication link do you need? 

12. If you need a wirelesss link, what communication range do you need? 

Description 

Part Number 

Smart Patchcord 

OCM-1N-W-a/b-F-XY-JD-L-M-E 

N = Number of fibers (1 channel is standard) 


1550 for 1450 to 1650 nn operating range 

1300 for 1280 to 1440 nm operating range 

(For single channel monitoring, specify 

the exact wavelength) 

Contact OZ Optics for other wavelengths 

a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns: 

9/125 for 1300 or 1550 nm SMF 

7/125 for 1300 nm PMF 

8/125 for 1550 nm PMF. 

See Tables 1 to 5 of the OZ Optics 

Standard Tables for other fiber sizes 

F = Fiber type: S = Singlemode 


E = Electrical Output 

A = analog output 

RS232 = digital output 

U = USB 

W = wireless (radio) 

M = Measurement module 

D = Optical Power (Detector) 

P = Polarization 

C = Single Channel Monitor 

L = Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the 

device. 


0.25 = 250 micron acrylate coating 



XY = Input and output connector codes 






LC = LC 

E = E2000/PC 

EA = Angled E2000/APC 

X = No Connector (See table 6 of the 

Standard Tables for other connector 

types) 


A network station needs to actively monitor the signal strength of the 1545 nm channel in a course optical WDM network. The monitoring 

unit will be spliced into the network, and an analog current proportional to the optical signal strength is sufficient to keep track of the signal. 

Part Number 

OCM-11-1545-9/125-S-XX-1-1-C-A 

Description 

Single channel smart patchcord for monitoring 1545 nm wavelength signals only in an optical 

system. The fiber on either side of the monitor is 1 meter long, 1 mm jacketed, with no connectors 

on either end. The module generates an analog signal proportional to the intensity of the 1545 nm 

light. 

3


Features: 

• Improved coupling to and from waveguides, laser diodes 

and photodiodes 

• Singlemode, Multimode or Polarization Maintaining Fibers 

• AR coated endfaces available 

• Can be made based on either spot size or taper shape 

• Metalized fiber versions available 

• Hermetically sealable versions available 

• Other custom configurations available 

Applications: 

• Active component pigtailing 

• DWDM devices 

• Waveguide packaging 

• MEMS device connections 

• Miniaturized fiber optic components 

• Coupling to circular or elliptical beam outputs 


Tapered and lensed fibers offer a convenient way to improve 

coupling between optical fibers and waveguide devices, laser 

diodes or photo diodes. By laser shaping the fiber end, the light 

can be transformed to improve mode matching and coupling 

efficiency with the waveguide device, laser diode chip or 

photodiode chip. The manufacturing process allows for improved 

coupling to either circular or oval input spots (this must be 

specified in advance). 

OZ Optics tapered and lensed fibers are manufactured by laser 

shaping the endface to create the optimal light output/input for 

specific applications. This method provides the best coupling 

efficiencies and mode matching abilities in a taper. An alternative 

technique is to instead polish the end face of the fiber to a specific 

radius and taper angle, forming a lens. Oval spots can also be 

formed using the polishing technique, normally by shaping the 

fiber to form a chisel shape. 

The characteristics of fiber tapers depend greatly upon the 

application. For laser diode and waveguide coupling applications, 

beam quality is paramount. The focused spot characteristics must 

TAPERED AND LENSED FIBERS 

Tapered / Lensed Fiber 

match the waveguide characteristics as closely as possible to 

ensure good coupling. In contrast, fiber to photodiode coupling 

does not require a high quality beam. One only has to ensure that 

the focused spot size is smaller than the photodetector. Thus 

tapered fibers for photodiodes are offered at lower cost. 

Singlemode, Multimode or Panda Type Polarization Maintaining 

(PM) fibers can be tapered. For multimode fibers, only polished 

versions, with a polish radius and taper angle can be produced. 

While they can improve coupling efficiencies when used with laser 

diodes or VCSELs, they do not focus to an actual spot like 

singlemode and PM fiber versions do. 

PM fibers offer a means to control the polarization of optical 

signals throughout the system, thus controlling Polarization 

Dependent Losses (PDL) and Polarization Mode Dispersion 

(PMD). This control is crucial in developing high speed 10 Gb/s, 

and next generation 40 Gb/s and faster systems. In general, OZ 

Optics uses PM fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when 

building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. 

However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber 

structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so 

please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, 


Custom configurations can be designed if required. Tapered fibers 

can be incorporated into other OZ Optics assemblies including 

Hermetic Patchcords and V-Groove assemblies, thus aiding in the 

development of photonic devices that meet Telcordia requirements. 

Contact OZ Optics for more information. 

Stripped Fiber 

Ø125 micron 

Taper Angle 

“” θ 

Radius of Curvature 

“R” 

Spot Diameter 

"SD" 

Figure 1: Laser Shaped Lensed Fiber (End Detail) 

Fiber with Acrylate Coating 

Ø250 micron or Ø400 micron 

Working Distance 

"WD" 

Strip Length 

"SL" 

Figure 2: Polished Lensed Fiber (End Detail) 

DTS0080 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 29-Nov-04 

1

Description 

Part Number 

Tapered Lensed Fiber: 


M = Multimode 



X = Connector Code 

3S = Super FC 

3U = Ultra FC 


8 = ST 

SC = Super SC 



MU = Super MU 

LC = Super LC 





Singlemode fiber 

TFMJ-X-W-a/b-JD-SL-SD-WD-L(-AR)(-PD) 1 

AR = AR Coating for tapered end 

Add -AR if anti-reflective coating 

is required 

L = Overall Length, in meters 

WD = Working Distance, in microns 

3-50 microns available 

SD = Spot Diameter, in microns (1/e 2 ) 

2.0-7.5 microns available 

SL = Strip Length, in millimeters 


0.25 = 250 micron OD acrylate coating 2 


1 = 900um Hytrel loose tube 

buffered fiber 



6/125 for 980nm PANDA type PM fiber 



Notes: 

1 Add -PD for low cost tapers for photodiode packaging 

2 Singlemode fiber normally has a 250 micron coating. PM fiber has 400 or 250 micron coating. 

Description 

Polished Lensed Fiber: 


M = Multimode 




3S = Super FC 

3U = Ultra FC 


8 = ST 

SC = Super SC 



MU = Super MU 

LC = Super LC 





Singlemode fiber 

Part Number 

TFMJ-X-W-a/b-JD-SL-R-q -L-POL(-AR)(-PD) 1 

AR = AR Coating for tapered end 

Add -AR if anti-reflective coating 

is required 

L = Overall Length, in meters 

q = Taper angle in degrees 

R = Radius of tip, in microns 

SL = Strip Length, in millimeters 




1 = 900um Hytrel loose tube 

buffered fiber 






Notes: 

1 Add -PD for low cost tapers for photodiode packaging 

2 Singlemode fiber normally has a 250 micron coating. PM fiber has 400 or 250 micron coating. 

4


TURNKEY, ULTRA STABLE, OEM LASER DIODE SOURCE 

OZ-1000 & OZ-2000 SERIES 

Features: 

• Output power to >100mW 

• Output power stability to

Questionnaire 

1. What wavelength do you need? 

2. How much output power do you need? 

3. Do you want a built-in fiber, or a receptacle to attach your own fiber? 

4. What size and type of fiber do you require? 

5. How long a fiber do you need? 

6. What kind of fiber connectors are you using? 

7. Do you need a collimated output beam? 

8. If a collimated beam is required, what is the desired beam diameter? 

9. If a focused spot is required, what is the desired spot size and 

working distance? 

10. Do you want a built-in isolator? 

Description: 

Pigtail Style Source 

Part Number 

OZ-N000-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L-P 


front panel 



W = Wavelength 1 : 405, 440, 635, 650, 670, 685, 750, 

780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1480, 1550, 1625. 


(see tables 1 to 5 in the Standard Tables data sheet) 


LB = Backreflection level 2 : 

35 = 35dB return loss (MM only) 

40 = 40dB return loss (SM & PM) 


(SM & PM - 1300/1550nm only) 

Description: 

Receptacle Style Source 





front panel 



X = Connector Receptacle: 

2.5U = 2.5mm universal receptacle 

(for FC, ST, or SC). 



5 = SMA905 

8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 


Part Number 

OZ-N000-X-a/b-W-F-P 

P = Output power available from the fiber end, 

in mW 3 

L = Fiber length (in meters) 



3 = 3mm OD Kevlar jacketed fiber 



armored cable 



armored cable 

X = Connector type: 3 = FC/PC 



5 = SMA905 

8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC or ultra SC 


P = Output power 3 : 

Output power available from the receptacle 

F = Fiber type: M = Multimode Fiber 



W = Wavelength 1 : 405, 440, 635, 650, 670, 685, 

750, 780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 

1480, 1550, 1625 


(see tables 1 to 5 in the standard tables data 

sheet) 

1 These are standard center wavelength values. The tolerance may vary depending on both wavelength and the laser diode manufacturers’ 

tolerances. (Typical tolerances vary from ±5nm to as high as ±30nm). 

2 The backreflection specification refers to the reflected signal strength relative to the output power seen by the laser diode from internal 

reflections. It does not include external sources of reflection, including those from the connector at the end of the fiber. To minimize external 

reflections, OZ Optics recommends using angle polished FC/APC or SC/APC connectors. Backreflection values are limited by the wavelength 

and fiber type selected. Other backreflection levels may be possible. Please contact OZ for further information. 

3 Note that due to variations in the optical characteristics of the laser diodes available, not all output powers are available at every wavelength 

for every fiber type. For wavelengths below 750nm, we recommend pigtail style to eliminate connection loss at the receptacle interface. 

Options: Add "-ISOL" if an optical isolator is required (Please note that this option is only available for the 1300 to 1625nm wavelength range). 

Add "-BL" if OZ Optics is to provide a manual blocking screw to control the output power. 

5


U-BRACKET ASSEMBLY – FIBER OPTIC 

Fiber optic U-bracket assemblies are designed to 

transmit light from an optical fiber, across an air 

gap, and back into a second fiber with low losses. 

The U-bracket is prealigned at the factory for 

minimum insertion losses, making it very easy to 

use. A variety of bulk optical devices, including 

polarizers, isolators, filters, and waveplates, can be 

simply inserted into the U-bracket, allowing the user 

to quickly and easily test or prototype systems 

incorporating fiber and bulk optics. 

The U-Bracket assembly consists of three parts: an 

input fiber collimator, the U-bracket itself, and an 

output fiber focuser. Utilizing OZ Optics' patented 

tilt adjustment technique, losses of only 0.6 dB are 

achieved across a 60mm gap for pigtailed 

singlemode fibers, with backreflection levels of 

-25dB, -40dB or -60 dB available. Connector style 

assemblies are also available for a variety of 

connectors, including NTT-FC, AT&T-ST, bare fiber 

adapters, etc. Typical insertion losses are 1.0 dB 

across a 60mm gap for connectorized versions, 

with backreflection levels typically -20 dB. 

U-Brackets are available in different sizes, with 

different gap spacings according to the customer's 

needs. Many different custom designs can be 

made for your application. For instance, source to 

fiber versions are available, where light from either 

a laser, a laser diode, or an LED is transmitted 

across the air gap and into the output fiber. Another 

option is to have a photo detector attached to the 

output end of the U-bracket, to measure the 

transmitted light. Another device available is a 

black box with a removable filter holder, to quickly 

insert and remove a filter from the optical path. 

Contact OZ for further information. 



Part Number 

UB-0A-XY-W-I-O-D 

UB-1A-11-W-a/b-I-O-D-LB-XY-JD-L 

UB-INSERT-01-0.5 

UB-250-XY-W-F 

UB-150-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L 

Description 

U-Bracket assembly with female connector receptacles. 

Pigtail style U-Bracket assembly with low backreflection. 

0.5” OD Filter holder insert for small U-bracket UB-12, UB-02 style 

assemblies. 

Black box assembly with female receptacles, and a removable filter. 

Pigtail style black box assembly with low backreflection, and a removable 

filter. 

Where: A is the size of the U-Bracket; 1 for large body (H=2.82", W=2.5", A=0.32", B=1.57", T=0.32"), 2 for 

small body (H= 1.68", W=1.0", A=0.38", B=1.03", T=0.25" ). Custom size U-Bracket Assemblies are 

available on request. 

X,Y are the input and output connector receptacle types for connector style U-Brackets. For pigtail style U- 

Brackets they refer to the male connectors on the fiber ends (3 for NTT-FC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for AT&T-ST, 

SC for SC connectors, X for unterminated fibers, etc.), 

W is the operating wavelength in nm, 

a,b are the fiber core and cladding sizes, respectively, in microns, 

I,O,F are the input and output fiber types (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining 

fibers), 

D is the length of the U-Bracket body in inches. (Standard sizes include D=1.85", D=3.03” for large body 

U-Brackets, D=1.15" or 1.80" for small body U-Brackets), 

LB is the desired backreflection level (25dB, 40dB, or 60dB for pigtail style systems), 

JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3 for 3mm OD loose tube Kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored 

cable, and 5A for 5mm armored cable.), 


Example: A customer wants to use a pigtail style U-Bracket for 1300nm fiber, with 40dB backreflection. The input 

side is polarization maintaining fiber, while the output side is singlemode fiber. Both fibers are one meter long, cabled 

with 3.0mm Kevlar cable, and terminated with male NTT-FC connectors. The small body size U-bracket with the 1.15 

inch body length is to be used. OZ Optics' part number: UB-12-11-1300-9/125-P-S-1.15-40-33-3.0-1. 

FILTER HOLDER INSERT DIMENSIONS


UNIVERSAL CONNECTORS AND HYBRID PATCHCORDS 

Features: 

• Allows Patchcords With Different Connector Types To Be Mated 

• Connectors With Different Ferrule Sizes Supported 

• Minimizes Losses Between Fibers With Different Core Sizes And 

Numerical Apertures 

• Male To Female (Hybrid) Connector Versions 

• Rugged And Compact Design 

• Low Insertion Losses 

• Low Return Losses 

• Low Cost 

Applications: 

• Patch panel interconnects 

• Fiber Distribution Hubs 

• Test And Measurement Stations 

• Optical Delivery Systems 


Universal connectors are designed to allow one to mate two patchcords that have different 

connectors on their ends. This is essential when working with components and equipment 

from different suppliers, which in turn use different connectors. 

Universal connectors come in three major variations. The simplest are butt joint style 

universal connectors. These connectors have different female receptacles on either side. The 

patchcords are simply plugged into either side, and the fiber ends butt together in the middle. 

These connectors offer an inexpensive and reliable way to connect matching singlemode, 

multimode, or polarization maintaining patchcords with differing fiber terminations. They can 

connect patchcords with either matching PC finishes or matching APC finishes. These 

adaptors are available in FC to SC, FC to ST, ST to SC, ST to SMA905 and ST to SMA 906 

formats. We now also offer connectors with a universal ferrule adaptor design, for connectors 

that have 2.5mm diameter ferrules, or 1.25mm diameter ferrules. These receptacles are best 

suited for temporary measurements, and give added flexibility. 

Hybrid patchcords are also offered. These connectors have a female receptacle on one side, 

and a male connector on the other side. A small length of fiber lies within the device to 

transmit the light. These connectors allow one to convert an output from male connector type 

to another in as short a time as possible. Male-to-male hybrid patchcords are also available. 

Lens style universal connectors are ideal for connecting fibers that have different optical 

characteristics. They consist of a an input receptacle, a collimating lens, a focusing lens and 

the output receptacle. Light from the input fiber is first collimated, then focused back into the 

output fiber. The alignment is precisely controlled using OZ Optics’ patentened alignment 

technique. Lens style universal connectors are normally prealigned for standard applications, 

such as for standard 9/125 singlemode fibers for telecom applications. However they are tilt 

adjustable, to enable one to compensate for any offsets between the fiber cores and the 

connector housings. This is very useful when working with fibers that have concentricity 

problems, or unusual shapes, such as D shaped polarization maintaing fibers. 

Lens style universal connectors are also ideal for connecting fibers that have different optical 

characteristics. An example would be connecting a singlemode fiber with a high numerical 

aperture and small core size to one with a lower numerical aperture and large core size. By 

selecting different focal length lenses for the input and output sides, the focused spot size 

can be changed to best match the characteristics of the output fiber. The device will work in 

both directions with low losses. Similarly one can design universal connectors to couple light 

from low NA, large core multimode fibers into high NA small core multimode mode fibers. 

Please note that universal connectors will not couple light efficiently from a multimode fiber 

into a singlemode fiber. High losses are unavoidable in this situation, since multimode fibers 

have both larger numerical apertures and larger core sizes. 

Butt Joint Style Universal Connectors 

Hybrid Patchcords 

Lens Style Universal Connector 

Ø0.173 

Ø0.088 THRU 

C’BORE Ø0.156 

x 0.052 DEEP 

2 PLCS 

0.550 

0.147 

0.216 

0.087 

M8X0.75 

THREAD 

0.110 

0.110 

0.591 

0.372 

0.591 

0.372 

Figure 1: Typical Dimmensions For Butt 

Joint Style Universal Connector 

DTS0082 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 09-May-02 

1

Description 

Hybrid patchcord with a male connector input 

and female receptacle output 

Part Number 

AA-200-11-a/b- XY 

a/b = 


9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber, 

See standard tables for other standard 

fiber sizes 

X = 

Y = 

Input connector code: 

Output female receptacle code 




5 = SMA 905 

6 = SMA 906 

8 = AT & T-ST 

SC = SC 


Description 

Part Number 

Hybrid patchcord with a male connectors 

a/b = 



See standard tables for other standard 

fiber sizes 

AA-200-1X-a/b- Y 

X = 

Y = 

Input connector code: 

Output connector code 




5 = SMA 905 

6 = SMA 906 

8 = AT & T-ST 

SC = SC 


Description 

Lens style universal connector 

Part Number 

AA-300- XY -W-F 

X, Y = Input and output receptacle or connector code: 

3 = NTT-FC/PC, Super NTT-FC/PC, Ultra NTT- 

PC/PC or Angled NTT-FC/PC 

5 = SMA 905 

8 = AT & T-ST 

SC = SC 



W = Wavelength: 



Specify in nanometers: 

Example: 1300/1550 for 

telecommunication wavelengths 

Description 

Butt joint style universal connectors 

Part Number 

AA-200-XY 

XY 

Input and output connector codes: 

3 = NTT-FC/PC, Super NTT-FC/PC, 

ULTRA NTT-FC/PC 

5 = SMA 905 

6 = SMA 906 

8 = AT&T-ST 

SC = SC 

1.25U = 1.25mm Universal adaptor 

2.5U = 2.5mm universal adaptor 

. 

3


USB-BASED OPTICAL TIME DOMAIN REFLECTOMETER 


OZ-UFO-320 and OZ-UFO-321 are compact, cost-effective, 

plug-and-play Optical Time-domain Reflectometer (OTDR) units, 

designed for full-range fiber fault detection. With fieldwork in 

mind it is ideal for optical fiber installation, maintenance, field 

construction, and other on-site fault-locations analysis. 

The OTDR unit is designed to operate with a laptop or any other 

computer running on Windows 98, 2000 or above. A USB cable 

connects the computer and the OTDR unit. The application 

program (AP) sends commands from the computer to the OTDR 

unit and gets data back, both through the USB port. The USB port 

and a rechargeable Lithium Ion battery power the unit. 

Applications 

• Fiber link supervision 

• Fiber identification 

• Remote fiber test systems 


• Fiber break point locating 


• Fiber attenuation measurements 

• Splicing loss detection 

Features 

• Plug-and-play unit via USB port 

• Full function OTDR application program compatible with 

Windows 98, Windows 2000, or above 

• Rugged, portable and easy to use 

• Automatic fiber length detection and fault event analysis 

• Mapping function with actual position display 

• Powered by USB port and rechargeable Lithium Ion battery 

Figure 1: USB-Based OTDR Module 

Figure 2: USB-Based OTDR 

Connected To Laptop Computer 

Figure 3: Typical Windows Display 

Figure 4: Typical Event Map Display 


1

Standard Product Specifications 

Model OZ-UFO-320 OZ-UFO-321 

Wavelength 1310/1550 ± 20 nm 1550/1625 ± 20 nm 

Dynamic Range (dB) 


Optical Connector 

Pulse Width 

Event Dead Zone 

9/125 µm singlemode fiber 

FC/PC 

10, 30, 100, 300, 1000, 3000, 10000, 20000 ns, Auto 

Effective 35/33 33/31 

SNR=1 38/36 36/34 

5 m 

Attenuation Dead Zone 

Sampling Resolution 

40 m 

0.25, 0.5, 1, 2 m 

Max. Sampling Points 128,000 

Distance Accuracy 

Linearity 

Return Loss Accuracy 

Max. Display Range 

Dimensions 

Weight 

±(2 m + 3 x10-5 x distance + marker resolution) (Fiber refractive index error not included) 

± 0.05 dB/dB or 0.1 dB (whichever greater) 

± 4 dB 

240 km (150 miles) 

220 x 130 x 55 mm without bumper 

950 g 

Power consumption Operating: 3.6 watt Idle: 2 watt 

Power Supply 

Lithium Ion Battery & AC /DC Adapter ( 100 ~ 240V; 50 ~ 60Hz) 

Notes: 


2

Features: 


VARIABLE ATTENUATORS – BLOCKING RECEPTACLE STYLE 

• Compact, rugged housing 



• Wide variety of connectors available 



• LOW COST! 

Applications: 

• CATV, LAN and Telecommunications use 



• Optical power equalization 


Variable attenuators consist of two baseplates with lenses. The two baseplates 

are aligned for optimum coupling efficiency using a patented alignment 

technique. A threaded radial screw is used to block the collimated beam 

between the two lenses. Rotating the screw changes its position within the 

collimated beam, thus varying the power level coupled into the receiver fiber. 

Because the attenuator works by directly blocking the beam, it is polarization 

insensitive. 

Receptacle Style Variable Attenuator 

Because of limitations in receptacle tolerances, receptacle style attenuators 

are not recommended for singlemode or polarization maintaining applications 

requiring low losses and good repeatability. Instead, please refer to the data 

sheet titled Pigtail Style Inline Variable Attenuators, Beam Blocking Style. 

Figure 1. 




187 BB-200-33-633-M Receptacle style variable attenuator at 633nm for multimode applications with female FC 

receptacles on both sides. 





188 BB-200-55-633-M Receptacle style variable attenuator at 633nm for multimode applications with female SMA 905 

receptacle on both ends. 




receptacle on both ends. 


receptacle on input end and ST receptacle on output end. 

9277 BB-200-88-800-M Receptacle style variable attenuator at 800nm for multimode applications with female ST 









Attenuation Range: 

Available Wavelengths: 

Vibration: 

Typically 2dB for multimode attenuators 

15dB for receptacle style attenuators (BB-200 style), 

2 to 80 dB with 0.01dB resolution up to 10dB, 0.1dB resolution up to 30 dB 

400-1625nm 

Less than ±0.05dB change between 10Hz-55Hz 

Ordering Examples for Standard Parts: 

A customer needs a variable attenuator with female ST receptacles for 1300nm wavelength for a multimode application. In this case OZ Part 

number, barcode and description will be: 


2169 BB-200-88-1300-M Receptacle style variable attenuator at 1300nm for multimode applications 

with female ST receptacles on both sides 




we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases nonrecurring 

engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a _____ piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully 

explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 


1. What is the application? 

2. What wavelengths do you plan on using? 

3. What power level do you need to handle? 

4. What size multimode fiber do you plan on using? 

Receptacle style attenuator: 

Female Receptacle Code: 3 = NTT-FC/PC, Super, 

and Ultra NTT-FC/PC 

8 = AT&T-ST 

5 = SMA 905 

SC = SC 

BB-200-XY-W-M 

Fiber type: 

S=Singlemode 

M=Multimode 




2


VARIABLE FIBER OPTIC ATTENUATOR – REFLECTIVE STYLE 

Features: 

• Neutral density filter or high power versions are available 

• Rugged and compact 


• Singlemode, and multimode fiber versions 

• Low PDL and wavelength dependence 

• Mode independent attenuation in multimode applications with 

neutral density filter version 



• Low Cost 

Applications: 

• Optical power equalization and power control for WDMs and 

multi-channel optically amplified networks 

• Telecommunications 

• CATV 

• LAN 


• Receiver padding. 

Reflective Style Variable Fiber Optic Attenuator 


OZ Optics offers a complete line of low cost, compact PC board mountable reflective style variable attenuators with low backreflection. These attenuators 

can be used for C, L and S wavelength bands, with minimal changes in insertion loss. Reflector style housings are ideal for applications 

where the input and output fibers must be attached to the same side of the attenuator. Mounting holes provide easy attachment to PC boards and 

patch panels. 

The reflector style attenuators contain either a variable neutral density filter or a blocking plate depending on the attenuator version selected. The 

blocking style is ideal for high power (over 50mW) applications, while the neutral density filter provides more uniform attenuation in multimode applications. 

The attenuation is controlled by a turn screw on the side of the attenuator, which controls the position of the filter or plate. 

Figure 1. Mechanical Dimensions (inches) 



1. A customer needs a reflective style attenuator with neutral density filter for 1300/1550nm with 40dB backreflection or better. He wants the 

fibers to be standard 9/125 micron, 3mm OD cabled, single mode fiber. The fibers should be 1 meter long and terminated with Super 

polished FC connectors, on both ends. Our standard part number will be: 


3346 BB-600-11-1300/1550-9/125-S-40-3S3S-3-1-ND Reflector style variable attenuator at 1300/1550nm with 1m long, 3mm OD 

jacketed single mode fiber with FC/Super PC connectors on both ends, 

40dB return loss. ND: Neutral density 

2. A customer needs a high power version reflective style attenuator for 1550nm with 50dB backreflection or better. He wants the fibers to be 

standard 9/125 micron, 3mm OD cabled, single mode fiber. The fibers should be 1 meter long and terminated with Ultra polished SC 

connectors, on both ends. Our standard part number will be: 


12394 BB-600-11-1300/1550-9/125-S-50-SCUSCU-3-1-HP Reflector style variable attenuator at 1300/1550nm with 1m 

long, 3mm OD jacketed single mode fiber with SC/Ultra PC 

connectors on both ends, 50dB return loss. HP: High power, 

up to 2 watts. 






so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products 


1. What wavelengths are you operating at? 



4. What is fiber length and jacket OD? 


6. Do you need a variable or fixed attenuation? 

7. What connectors do you need at each end of fiber? 

8. What environmental requirements do you need to meet? 


Reflector Style Attenuator: 

BB-600-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-V 


Example: 1300/1550 for 1300 to 

1550nm wavelength range 



See the OZ Standard Tables data 



M=Multimode 

S=Singlemode 

P=Polarization Maintaining (PM) 

LB = Backreflection level: 

40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode fibers, 

35dB for MM fibers 

Note 1: For low insertion loss add "-LL" to the end of the part number. 

LL = 0.8dB with units that have 60dB return loss, LL = 1dB for other 

attenuators. 


Example 1: A customer wants to order a reflective style, beam blocker version, single mode attenuator 

at 1300nm, with 2m and 900 micron cabled fiber on both sides with FC super PC polished connectors 

and 40dB back reflection with low loss. The part number should be: 

BB-600-11-1300/1550-9/125-S-40-3S3S-1-2-HP-LL 

V = Version 

ND = Neutral Density Version 

HP = Beam Blocking Style 

L = Fiber length in meters, on each side of 

the device. If they are different, specify 

the input and output lengths separated 

by a comma. 

Example: To order 1 meter of the fiber 

at the input and 7 meters at the output, 

replace the L with 1,7. Total fiber length 

is input fiber length plus output fiber 

length 




PVC cable 

X,Y = Connector code: 





8 = AT & T-ST 

SC = SC 


LC = LC/PC 

LCA = Angled LC/PC 

See the OZ Standard Tables data 


Example 2: A customer wants to order reflective style, neutral density version attenuator at 850nm with 

62.5/125µ multimode fiber, 3m at input, 2m at output, 3mm OD cabled with SC/PC connector on input 

end, Super FC connector on output end, 35dB back reflection. The part number should be: 

BB-600-11-850-62.5/125-M-35-SC3S-3-3,2-ND 3


VARIABLE FIBER OPTIC ATTENUATORS 

NEUTRAL DENSITY FILTER VERSION – PIGTAIL STYLE 

Features: 

• Rugged and compact size 


• Singlemode, polarization maintaining and multimode fiber versions 

• Low Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) 

• Low wavelength dependence 

• Mode insensitive attenuation 



• Low cost 

Applications: 

• Optical power equalization and power control for WDMs and 

multi-channel optically amplified networks 

• Telecommunications 

• CATV 

• LAN 



• Optical sensors 

Neutral Density Style Variable Attenuator 


OZ Optics offers a complete line of low cost, compact PC board mountable, pigtail 

style variable attenuators with low backreflection. These attenuators are designed to 

meet Telcordia requirements. These attenuators can be used for 1300nm and 

1550nm, as well as for C (1520-1570nm), L (1570-1620nm) and S (1470-1520nm) 

bands, with minimal changes in the insertion loss. Mounting holes provide easy 

attachment to PC boards and patch panels. The mounting hole patterns and 

attenuator sizes can be modified to meet our customer requirements on OEM orders. 

The attenuators consist of two baseplates. Each baseplate contains a fiber followed 

by a collimating lens. The attenuator is prealigned for optimum coupling efficiency 

using a patented tilt alignment technique. A variable neutral density filter is used to 

provide more uniform attenuation in multimode applications than the blocking screw 

technique. The attenuation is controlled by a turn screw on the side of the 

attenuator, which controls the position of the filter. 

Figure 1: Neutral Density Style Attenuator 

Dimensions (inches) 

Variable attenuators based on the neutral density filter are ideal for multimode fiber applications where one may be concerned about model noise. 

The term multimode means there is more than one path for light to travel inside a single fiber. These paths are known as modes. It does not mean 

the unit consists of multiple fibers in a bundle. When coherent laser light is coupled into multimode fiber, the output shows speckles. Bending the fiber 

causes the speckle pattern to change. If the losses in a system depend on which modes are excited, then changing the modes excited in the fiber 

changes the output power. This is known as modal noise. If the source being used is an LED, then one does not see speckles, and modal noise is 

not an issue. However, for laser sources, modal noise is an issue. When blocking style attenuators are used with multimode fiber, some modes are 

blocked, while others are transmitted. This can produce 1dB or greater modal noise fluctuations with coherent sources. A variable attenuator using 

a neutral density filter is not as strongly affected by modal noise. However, neutral density filter attenuators offer lower attenuation range (around 

40dB) and can only handle about 50mW of power. 

While generally used for multimode applications, OZ Optics can also produce singlemode and polarization maintaining versions. In general, OZ Optics 

uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However 

OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department 

for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. 






charges, lot charges, and a 10 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision 

will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 

Questionnaire For Customs Parts: 




4. What connectors, if any, do you need? 

5. What should the fiber length and jacket diameter be? 


7. Would a beam blocking attenuator be better suited for your purposes? 

8. Do you need a variable or fixed attenuation? 

9. What environmental requirements do you need to meet? 


Neutral Density Style Attenuator: 

BB-500-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-ND 


Example: 1300/1550 for 1300 and 

1550nm wavelength ranges 



50/125, 62.5/125 are standard 

multimode sizes. See the OZ 

Standard Tables data sheet for other 




M = Multimode 

P = Polarization Maintaining (PM) 

LB = Backreflection level: 

40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode and 

PM fibers, 35dB for multimode fibers 

Note 1: For low loss attenuators add "LL" to the end of the part number. 

LL = 0.6dB with units that have 60dB return loss, LL = 1dB for rest of the attenuators. 

Note 2: Add “-ER=25” or “-ER=30” for extinction ratios of 25 or 30dB respectively. If not specified, 

the extinction ratio for PM versions will be > 20dB. 

L = Fiber length in meters, on each side of 

the device. Example: To order 1 meter of 

the fiber at the input and 7 meters at the 

output, replace the L with 1, 7 



3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC 

cable. See the OZ Standard Tables 

data sheet for other jacket sizes 

X,Y = Input & output connector codes: 





8 = AT & T-ST 

SC = SC 


LC = LC/PC 

See the OZ Standard Tables data sheet for 



Example 1: A customer wants to order a multimode attenuator with a neutral density filter at 1300nm, with 2m long and 900 microns cabled, 

50/125 micron fiber with FC/Super PC polished connectors on both ends and 35dB back reflection with low loss. The fiber is to be a total 

length of 4 meters, 900 microns cabled, and with the attenuators in the middle (ie. 2 meters on each end) 

The part number should be: BB-500-11-1300/1550-50/125-M-35-3S3S-1-2-ND-LL 

Example 2: A customer wants to order a pigtailed variable attenuator at 850nm in a rectangular housing with 62.5/125 multimode fiber, 3m 

long at input, 2m long at output, 3mm OD cabled with neutral density filter, with no connectors and 35dB back reflection. 

The part number should be: BB-500-11-850-62.5/125-M-35-XX-3-3,2-ND 

3


Features: 

• Up to 48 fiber V-Groove arrays 

• Singlemode, multimode or polarization maintaining fibers 

• Ribbon or individual fibers 

• Assemblies with bare fiber or 900µm jacketing, and with or without 

connectors 

• 900µm jacketed breakouts available, up to 2 meters in length 

• Custom configurations possible for OEM applications 

• Designed to meet Telcordia specifications 

Applications: 

• Arrayed Waveguide (AWG) devices 

• Planar Lightwave Chips (PLC) 

• Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexers (DWDM) 

• MEMS devices 

• Miniaturized or integrated fiber optic components 


V-GROOVE ASSEMBLIES 

OZ Optics V-Groove array assemblies assist in developing next generation photonic devices. 

The arrays are manufactured using precision silicon wafer V-Groove technology in conjunction 

with a Pyrex lid, enabling sub-micron alignment accuracy with UV cure attachment capabilities. 

8 Channel PM Fiber 

Pigtailed V-Groove Array 

OZ Optics V-Groove array assemblies are available with singlemode, multimode or PANDA 

type Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers. Customization can even include different types of 

fibers assembled into a single array. PM fibers offer a means to control the polarization of 

optical signals throughout the system thus minimizing Polarization Dependant Losses (PDL) 

and Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) effects. This control is crucial in developing high 

speed 10 Gb/s, next generation 40 Gb/s, and faster systems. 

In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure 

when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However, OZ Optics can 

construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in 

stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to 

use customer supplied fibers to build devices. 

32 Channel V-Groove Assembly 

Standard PANDA style PM arrays are manufactured with the polarization axis (stress rods) 

aligned vertical to the V-Groove base within 1°. High grade assemblies with one to eight 

channels can be provided with the stress rods aligned to within 0.5°. Arrays can also be 

provided with the fibers aligned parallel to the base, alternating axes or at custom angles. 

When supplied with a breakout and connectors, the alignment of the connector is also to the 

slow axis, within 3° for standard connectors or available to within 1.5° for high grade 

connectors. 

V-Groove array assemblies can be manufactured with a hermetic feedthrough attached. This 

enables the development of multichannel photonic devices capable of meeting Telcordia 

requirements. Fiber breakouts can also be added, to convert ribbonized fibers into separated 

fibers, capable of being connectorized. 

Single Channel V-Groove Assembly 

Hermetic V-Groove Assembly 

PM Fiber V-Groove Assembly Endface 

V-Groove Assembly With 900 Micron 

OD Breakout And Connectors 


General Specifications: 

Polish angle: 0°, 8° ± 0.3° Custom angles available up to 15° 

Insertion loss: 

20dB 1 . Twelve or more channels: >17dB 

Standard alignment is with the stress rods vertical. 

Other alignment angles are available. Each fiber can be individually 

aligned and monitored to ensure good extinction ratios 

± 1° ( Standard Grade) or ± 0.5° (Premium Grade, one to eight channels 

only) 








1. How many fibers do you need? 

2. What fiber spacing is needed for your application? (250µm standard) 

3. Do you need the endface polished at an angle?(8° angle standard) 

4. What type of fiber do you need (singlemode, multimode, PANDA type polarization maintaining) 

5. Do you need connectors for the assembly? 

N = Number of V-Grooves 

1,2,4,8,12,16,24,32,or 48 

S = V-Groove Spacing (in microns) 

127, 250, 400 or 500 

250 is standard 

A = Angle of Polish 

0, 8 degrees standard 

VGA-N-S-A-D-VL-VW-VT-F-W-a/b-X-JD-L-B 

B = Breakout length (in meters) 

2 meter maximum, 0.5 meter is typical 

L = Overall Length (in meters) 

Standard length is 1-2 meters 

D = Direction of angle 

A,B,C,D (see Figure 2) 

X for flat polish (0°) 

VL = Length (in millimeters) 

10.3 is standard 

VW = Width (in millimeters) See standard 

specifications for standard chip dimensions 

VT = Thickness (in millimeters) 

2.03 is standard 




M = Multimode 

W = Wavelength of operation 

a/b = Fiber Core/Cladding Diameter 

9/125 for Corning SMF-28 SM fiber 

6/125 for Corning Flexcore 1060 SM fiber 

7/125 for 1300nm PANDA PM fiber 

8/125 for 1550nm PANDA PM fiber 


0.25 = bare fiber, 250µm coated 

and ribbon fiber 

0.40 = PM fiber with 400µm 

coating (500µm spacing only) 

1 = 900µm jacketed (Hytrel) 


Note: Standard Assemblies have 

the same connectors on all fibers 

3S = Super FC/PC (


VISIBLE FIBER OPTIC FAULT LOCATOR 

Features: 

• High visibility (up to 6 km with a 1mW, 635nm source) 

• Higher output up to 30 mW, 635 nm power versions available 

• Continuous light or pulse modulation 

• Power supply options include alkaline batteries or AC/DC adaptor 

• Carrying pouch with belt clip for pocket size version 

• 1.25mm and 2.5 mm ID universal connector receptacles available 

• Pocket size, pen size and bench top versions available 

• Low battery indicator for pocket size version 

• Low cost,compact, rugged, and lightweight 

• 532 nm green fault locator available 

• Optional built-in attenuator for controlling power output 

• User selectable auto turn off mode 

Pocket Size 

Visible 

Fiber Optic Fault 

Locator 

(AA Battery Version) 

Applications: 

• Singlemode and multimode fiber testing 

• Fiber identifier applications 

• Locating breaks and bends in fibers and connectors 

• Identifying fibers and tracing optical signals by using modulated signals 

• Optimizing splices 


The Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator launches 635 nm visible laser diode light into 

the fiber. When light encounters a break or sharp bend, it scatters, and the 

scattered light can be observed emerging from the cable. Fault locators can locate 

breaks in short patchcords, which an OTDR cannot detect due to their operating 

dead zone. A fault locator is also much less expensive than an OTDR. However, 

they are not recommended for use with dark-colored or armored cables. 

Pocket Size 

Visible 

Fiber Optic 

Fault Locator 

(9V Battery 

Version) 

Fault locators are available in three sizes: bench top, pocket size and pen size. 

The pocket size fault locators can be operated in either continuous wave (CW) 

mode or in pulse modulation mode. Pulse modulation aids in locating faults under 

high ambient light conditions and improves battery life. 2 Hz 

modulation is easy to detect by the naked eye, while 270 Hz and 2 kHz pulse 

modulation modes are used for fiber identification by detectors. The pocket size fault 

locator comes with a carrying pouch and belt clip. Pen size fault locators are CW 

only. High power versions are available as bench top units. These are CW only. 

Another use for fault locators is to check connector quality. Often a connector may 

appear to be perfect, even when viewed with a microscope, but inside the 

connector ferrule itself, poor gluing or dirt may create a microbend in the fiber. This 

microbend will produce excess insertion losses or return losses, and may result in 

premature failure of the connector. If one launches visible light through the fiber, so 

that it emerges from the connector in question, one can readily see the distortion as 

a series of rings superimposed on a normal output (See Figure 1). Bending or 

twisting the fiber may affect the overall intensity pattern, but not the ring pattern 

itself. 

One of the key advantages of OZ Optics' pocket size and bench top model fault 

locators is that they use singlemode fiber for 633nm, which has a four micron 

diameter core instead of a nine micron diameter core. This reduces any potential 

misalignment errors between the connector on the fault locator and the connector 

on the fiber. It also ensures that the light launched into the cable being tested 

matches the fundamental mode as much as possible. The light coming out of the 

other end will tend to look circular and Gaussian, rather than showing several 

modes. This makes it easier to identify microbends in connectors. 

Pen Size Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator 

Bench Top High Power Visible Fiber Optic 

Fault Locator (up to 10mW) 



1. A customer needs a visible fiber optic fault locator with 1 mW output power, 2.5 mm ID universal receptacle, modulation function, and AC/DC 

adaptor for North America. 


3970 FODL-22.5U-635-1 

Pocket-size Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator with 635 nm wavelength, 1 mW output, and 2.5 

mm ID universal receptacle. 

8402 AC-9VDC-NA Universal 110/220 VAC to 9VDC power supply adaptor for North America. 

2. A customer needs a visible fiber optic fault locator with 0.5 mW output power, and 2.5 mm ID universal receptacle. Modulation function is 

not needed. 


12625 FODL-02.5U-635-0.5 

Pen Size Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator with635 nm wavelength, 0.5 mW output, and 2.5 mm 

ID universal receptacle. 






so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products 


1. What is the maximum output power level that you require? 

2. Do you prefer pen size, pocket size or a bench top model? 

3. What type of receptacle is required on the fault locator? 

Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator: 

FODL-AX-W-P 

A = Size: 0 = Pen size 

2 = Pocket size (9 volt battery version) 

3 = Bench Top Mode 

4 = Pocket size (AA battery version) 

X = Receptacle Code¹: 

3S = Standard, Super and Ultra 

NTT-FC/PC receptacle 

3A = Angled NTT- FC/PC² 

SC = SC² 

SCA = Angled SC² 

8 = AT&T-ST² 


2.5mm diameter ferrules ( FC, ST, SC, etc.) 


1.25mm diameter ferrules ( LC, MU, etc.) 

P = Output Power Level (in mW, 

coupled into a 9/125µm fiber): 

Up to 0.4mW for Class I devices 

0.8-1mW for Class II (standard)³. 

Caution: Eye protection must be 

worn while using fault locators with 

powers above 1mW 

W = Wavelength, in nm: 

532 = 532 nm 

635 = 635 nm 

Notes: 

¹ See Table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables data sheet for other receptacles. 

² Not available in pen size model 

³ Contact OZ Optics for non-standard power values. 

Figure 1: Using a Fault Locator To Find Connector Microbends 

4


Features: 

• PM fiber versions 

• Miniature inline Versions 

• Visible wavelength (Red/Green/Blue) versions 


• Low Insertion Losses 

• Low return loss 



• Coarse and dense WDM versions 

• LOW COST! 

WAVELENGTH DIVISION MULTIPLEXERS 

Applications: 

• Drop/Add Filters for Telecommunications 

• Fiber Lasers 

• Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifiers 

• Confocal Microscopy 

• Laser Spectroscopy 

• Imaging systems 

• 980nm Pumping 


Wavelength division multiplexers (WDMs) are used to combine light of 

different wavelengths into a single fiber. The light from each fiber is first 

collimated. The collimated beams are then combined using a dichroic filter, with 

typically the longer wavelength transmitted from port T, the shorter wavelength 

reflected from port R. The combined beams are then focused into the output fiber at 

Port 1. 

OZ Optics manufacturers wave division multiplexors for both telecom and nontelecom 

applications. Of special interest are our WDMs for combining visible 

wavelengths. Our RGB multiplexors combine light at red, green and blue 

wavelengths into singlemode or polarization maintaining fiber. This makes them ideal 

for applications such as confocal microscopy, white light imaging, full colour 

holograpy and others. One advantage of OZ Optics WDM's is that different fiber 

types can be used on the input and output ends of the device. This is especially 

useful in fiber amplifier applications, when the Erbium doped fibers have a different 

core diameter and numerical aperture. WDM's with 1dB typical insertion losses have 

been made this way. OZ Optics also offers source to fiber wavelength division multiplexers, 

where the sources are mounted directly onto the device. This improves the 

overall system efficiency, and reduces costs. 

Our miniature size WDMs are ideal for telecommunication applications such as 

drop/add filters for either coarse WDM (CWDM) or dense DWM applications. They 

are also used for combining 980 to 1080nm pump light with 1550nm signals in erbium 

doped fiber amplifiers (EDFAs). 

Laser diode power combiners come in a small, rugged package and are available 

either with female receptacles to accept different connectors or pigtail style, with the 

fiber directly attached. Pigtail style combiners are recommended for optimum 

stability, minimum insertion losses, and low backreflection. Receptacle style systems 

are best suited for applications where the output coupler is used with a multimode 

fiber. If a receptacle style combiner is used with a singlemode fiber, then the user may 

experience low coupling efficiency. 

OZ Optics also manufactures polarization maintaining WDM's. The device typically 

maintains polarization to better than 20dB for 1300 and 1550nm applications. Higher 

extinction ratios are available on request. 

OZ Optics specializes in manufacturing custom designed WDM's. Contact OZ Optics 

for further information. 

Miniature Inline Wavelength Division Multiplexor 

Standard Wavelength Division Multiplexer 

RGB Wavelength Division Multiplexor 

Laser Diode Power Combiner 

DTS0089 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 02-Dec-2004 1


Parameter Units Condition Value 

WDM Type 

WDM-12P 

WDM-13P 

WDM-12N 

CWDM-12N 

DWDM-12N 

WDM-11P 

Description Standard Pigtail Style Miniature Inline Style Laser Diode Combiner 

Available Wavelengths nm 400-1650 400-1650 1 400-1650 

Return Losses 

Insertion Losses (Typical) 2 

Insertion Losses (Maximum) 2 

Insertion Losses 

(60dB Return Loss Option) 

dB 

dB 

dB 

400-1200 nm 40 40 40 

1200-1650 nm 40, 50, or 60 40, 50, or 60 40, 50, or 60 

400-1200 nm 1.0 1.0 

1200-1650 nm 0.8 0.8 

400-1200 nm 1.2 1.2 

1200-1650 nm 1.0 1.0 

Not applicable 3 

Not applicable 3 

dB 1280-1650 nm 0.7 max 0.7 max Not applicable 3 

400-600 nm 18 15 18 

Polarization Extinction Ratio dB 

600-1150 nm 20 18 20 

1250-1550 nm 20, 25, or 30 20 or 25 20 

Power Handling mW SM or PM fiber, 1550nm 500 4 200 4 200 4 

Operating Temperature °C -20 to +60 

1 

Applies to WDM-12N parts only. For CWDM and DWDM parts, available wavelenths range from 180 to 1650nm. 

2 

For components whose wavelengths are separated by more than 20nm and less than 200nm 

3 

For laser diode power combiners, actual insertion losses depend on the laser diodes selected for the application. 

4 

Higher power versions (up to 5 Watts into singlemode fiber, higher into multimode fiber), are available on request. 

Port R 

1.93 [49] 

1.38 [35] 

0.91 [23] 

Port T 

Port 1 

Ø 0.12 [3.1] 

Ø 0.19 [4.75] 

Ø 0.22 [5.5] 



Figure 1: Miniature Inline WDM Dimensions 

Figure 2: Standard Wave Division Multiplexor Dimensions 

2-56 x 0.10 DEEP 

TAPPED 

MOUNTING HOLES 

2PLCS 

Ø1.31 

Ø0.56 1.44 

2-56 x 0.10 DEEP 

TAPPED 

MOUNTING HOLES 

2PLCS 

0.53 

1.88 

2.60 

Ø1.31 


0.53 

Ø1.31 

0.72 

1.84 

1.66 

DICHROIC 

MIRROR 

Figure 3:Laser Diode Power Combiner Dimensions 

2



10923 WDM-12P-111-1300/1550-7/125-PPP-60-3U3U3U-3-1 Wavelength division multiplexer for 1300 & 1550nm with 1 meter long, 

3mm OD jacketed 7/125 PM fiber pigtails, 60dB return loss and ultra 

FC/PC connectors. 

12808 WDM-12P-111-1480/1550-8/125-PPP-60-3A3A3A-3-1 Wavelength division multiplexer for 1480 & 1550nm with 1 meter long, 

3mm OD jacketed 8/125 PM fiber pigtails, 60dB return loss and angled 


12809 WDM-12P-111-980/1550-8/125-PPP-40-3A3A3A-3-1 Wavelength division multiplexer for 980 & 1550nm with 1 meter long, 

3mm OD jacketed 8/125 PM fiber pigtails, 40dB return loss and angled 






charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision 

will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. 


1) What wavelength range are you interested in? 

2) What type of fiber is being used? Singlemode, Multimode or PM? 

3) What power levels are being used in your system? 

4) What coupling efficiency do you require? 

5) Are you using a polarized or randomly polarized light source? 

6) What return losses are acceptable in your system? 

7) What connector type are you using? 

8) How do you intend to use this product? 

Note concerning part numbers: Depending on the configuration of the desired design, the fiber types, lengths, and connectors may be 

different on each channel. Therefore it is important to correctly identify each port in the proper order. When specifying wavelengths, list them 

from shortest to longest. When identifying fiber types, start from the shortest wavelength to the longest wavelength, and identify the combined 

port last. This rule is also used when specifying the connector types and fiber lengths 

Description 

Wavelength Division Multiplexer: 

Part Number 

WDM-1NA-111-Wi/Wo-a/b-ABC-LB-XYZ-JD-L 

N = 

A = 

Wi/Wo = 





See tables 1 to 5 ofthe Standard Tables 

for other Sizes 

ABC, 

Number of wavelengths to combine 

(2, 3, 4, ect) 

Package style 


N for miniature inline style 

Operating Wavelengths in 

nanometers 

Fiber types: on each port 

M = Multimode 




JD = 

X,Y,Z = 




PVC cable 





8=AT&T-ST 

SC=SC 

SCA=Angled SC 

LC=LC 

LCA=Angled LC 

MU=MU 







3

Pigtail Style Laser Diode Combiner: 

WDM-11P-a/b-F-Wi/Wo-LB-X-JD-L 

a/b= Fiber core/cladding size, in microns 




See tables 1 to 5 ofthe Standard Tables 

for other Sizes 

F 

Fiber types: on the output port 

M = Multimode 



Wi/Wo = Operating Wavelengths in 

nanometers 







JD = 

X,Y,Z = 




PVC cable 





SC=SC 

SCA=Angled SC 

LC=LC 


See table 6 of the standard tables 



Q: What wavelength ranges are available? 

A: OZ Optics offers a variety of WDMs working from 400nm to 1650nm. 

Custom designs are available for combining and splitting most 

combinations of wavelengths in this region. 

Q: Can I use different fibers on each port? 

A: Yes, OZ Optics WDM design offers the flexibility of having different fiber types on each of the ports. 

Q: Can I use high power with these WDMs? 

A: Yes, OZ Optics standard design can handle up to 200mW, for higher power applications a custom design can be done to handle up to 2W. 

Q: What is the standard package size? Can I get a smaller package? 

A: The standard packages for WDMs use a 0.8 or 1.6 inch cube design. These packages are ideal for low cost proto-type applications. For OEM 

applications OZ Optics will work with you to design a package that meets your size requirements. 

Q: Do you offer WDM’s that can combine more than two wavelengths? 

A: Yes. Systems that combine 3 and 4 different wavelengths have also been made. 


Wavelength Division Multiplexers (WDM) are used to combine and split (multiplex and demultiplex) signals in different systems ranging from 

telecommunications to imaging systems. The basic principle of WDM is based on thin film filters that transmit light in a certain spectral range and 

reflect light in another spectral range. Figure 3 below demonstrates the basic principle of splitting and combining two different wavelengths. 

Figure 3: 

The WDM plate is designed to transmit λ, and reflect λ 2 thereby “multiplexing” the two inputs into the common port. Due to the inherent 

bi-directional nature of the filter, this component will also work in the opposite direction in order to “de-multiplex” the two wavelengths. 

4

Exceptionally-Low-Loss LiNbO 3 

Optical Devices & ICs 

Technology Originally Developed for High-Performance Aerospace Systems 

www.skPhotonics.com 

Electro-Optic Modulators & Switches & Polarization Controllers 

info@skPhotonics.com 

(λ=1310, 1060, 980, 850, 800 nm, etc.) 

3.48” x 0.35” x 0.35” (88.4 x 8.9 x 8.9 mm 3 ) 

‘Digital’ & ‘RF Analog’ Modulators 

X-cut: or Z-cut zero-chirp 

1x2 

3.48” x 0.35” x 0.35” (88.4 x 8.9 x 8.9 mm 3 ) 

2.56” x 0.35” x 0.195” (65 x 8.9 x 4.95 mm 3 ) 

• Z-cut: ( Pre-chirp: α = - 0.7 ): Vπ ~ 5 V @ 1GHz 

• X-cut: ( Zero-chirp: α = 0.0 ): Vπ ~ 5 V @ 1GHz 

4.0” x 0.35” x 0.24” (101.6 x 8.9 x 6.1 mm 3 ) 

Polarization Tracking, Scrambling, PMD/PDL Compensation 

High-speed (ns) 1xN, NxN Switches 

Single-Polarization (SP) or Polarization-Independent (PI) 

Short -λ 10-20 Gb/s Modulators 

• Low-Loss < 4 dB, (< 3 dB option, and < 2 dB custom) 

• Bandwidth >12.5 GHz, (>20 GHz version) 

• Phase & Intensity (& Ultra-High Extinction Ratio version) 

Very-Low-Loss Phase Modulators 

• Low-Loss < 3 dB, (< 2 dB option) 

• Low Vπ ~ 5 V @ 1GHz, (~ 4 V option, & < 3V custom) 

• Bandwidth > 12.5 GHz, (>25 GHz version) 

12-20 Gb/s (Z-cut & X-cut ) Modulators 

• Z-cut: Pre-chirp: Low-Loss < 3 dB, (< 2 dB option) 

• BW >12.5 GHz, (>18 GHz version); Vπ ~ 4 V@1GHz 

• X-cut: Zero-chirp: Low-Loss < 4 dB, (< 3 dB option) 

• BW >12.5 GHz, (>18 GHz version); Vπ ~ 5 V@1GHz 

• Other versions: 

• 1x2 Dual-Output 

• Integrated PD 

40 Gb/s (Z-cut & X-cut ) Modulators 

• Z-cut: Pre-chirp 

• BW >30 GHz; Vπ ~ 5.5 V (Lower-Vπ version available) 

• < 4.5 dB, (< 3 dB, 30 GHz; Vπ ~ 5.5 V (Lower-Vπ version available) 

• < 4.5 dB, (< 3 dB option) • Integrated PD 

Small-Form-Factor 10 + Gb/s Modulators 

• Insertion-Loss < 4.5dB, (< 3 dB or < 2 dB option) 

• Bandwidth > 10 GHz, (> 16 GHz option) 

• Lower Drive-Voltage version: Vπ ~4V 

High-speed Polarization Controllers 

• Insertion Loss < 3 dB , (< 2 dB option) 

• Response Time 18GHz option),

fiber optic isolators

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?